You are on page 1of 404

TopPage

SERVICE MANUAL
CODE: 00ZMXM503/S2E

DIGITAL MULTIFUNCTIONAL SYSTEM

MX-M283 N
MX-M363 N/U
MX-M453 N/U
MODEL MX-M503 N/U
CONTENTS

NOTE FOR SERVICING ● DETAILS OF EACH SECTION
[1] PRODUCT OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 [A] EXTERIOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-1
[2] CONSUMABLE PARTS . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 [B] OPERATION PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . .B-1
[3] EXTERNAL VIEW AND [C] DSPF/RSPF SECTION. . . . . . . . . . C-1
INTERNAL STRUCTURE . . . . . . . . . 3-1 [D] SCANNER SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . D-1
[4] ADJUSTMENTS AND [E] PAPER FEED SECTION . . . . . . . . .E-1
SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
[F] PAPER TRANSPORT
[5] SIMULATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1 SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .F-1
[6] SELF DIAG AND [G] LSU SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-1
TROUBLE CODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
[H] PHOTO-CONDUCTOR
[7] FIRMWARE UPDATE . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1 SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-1
[8] MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1 [i] TONER SUPPLY SECTION . . . . . . . i-1
[9] VARIOUS STORAGE DATA [J] DEVELOPING SECTION . . . . . . . . . J-1
HANDLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
[K] TRANSFER SECTION . . . . . . . . . . .K-1
[10] SERVICE WEB PAGE . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
[L] FUSING SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L-1
[11] SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
[M] DUPLEX/PAPER EXIT
[12] ELECTRICAL SECTION. . . . . . . . . 12-1 SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-1
[13] TOOL LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1 [N] DRIVE SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N-1
[O] PWB SECTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . O-1
[P] FAN SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P-1
[Q] SENSOR/SWITCH SECTION . . . . Q-1

Parts marked with " " are important for maintaining the safety of the set. Be sure to replace these parts with
specified ones for maintaining the safety and performance of the set.

This document has been published to be used
SHARP CORPORATION for after sales service only.
The contents are subject to change without notice.

CONTENTS

NOTE FOR SERVICING ● DETAILS OF EACH SECTION
1. Precautions for servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i [A] EXTERIOR
2. Warning for servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i 1. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-1
3. Note for installing site. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i [B] OPERATION PANEL
4. Note for handling PWB and electronic parts . . . . . . . . . .ii
1. Electrical and mechanical relation diagram . . . . . . . . .B-1
5. Note for repairing/replacing the LSU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii 2. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-4
6. Note for handling the drum unit, the transfer unit, 3. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-4
the developing unit, and the fusing unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii
[C] DSPF/RSPF SECTION
7. Screw tightening torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii
1. Electrical and mechanical relation diagram . . . . . . . . C-1
[1] PRODUCT OUTLINE
2. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-5
1. System configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
3. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-10
2. Machine configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
[D] SCANNER SECTION
3. Combination of options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1. Electrical and mechanical relation diagram . . . . . . . . D-1
[2] CONSUMABLE PARTS
2. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-3
1. Supply system table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
3. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-4
2. Maintenance parts list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
[E] PAPER FEED SECTION
3. Definition the developer/drum life end . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
1. Electrical and mechanical relation diagram . . . . . . . . .E-1
4. Production number identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
2. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .E-4
[3] EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE
3. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .E-5
1. Identification of each section and functions . . . . . . . . . 3-1
[F] PAPER TRANSPORT SECTION
[4] ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS
1. Electrical and mechanical relation diagram . . . . . . . . .F-1
1. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
2. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .F-2
2. Adjustment item list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
3. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .F-2
3. Details of adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
[G] LSU SECTION
[5] SIMULATION
1. Electrical and mechanical relation diagram . . . . . . . . G-1
1. General (Including basic operations) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
2. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-2
2. List of simulation codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
3. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-2
3. Details of simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
[H] PHOTO-CONDUCTOR SECTION
[6] SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE
1. Electrical and mechanical relation diagram . . . . . . . . H-1
1. Self diag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
2. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-2
2. Trouble code list. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
3. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-3
3. Details of trouble code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
[i] TONER SUPPLY SECTION
4. Paper JAM code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22
1. Electrical and mechanical relation diagram . . . . . . . . . i-1
[7] FIRMWARE UPDATE
2. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i-2
1. Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
3. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i-2
2. Update procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
[J] DEVELOPING SECTION
[8] MAINTENANCE
1. Electrical and mechanical relation diagram . . . . . . . . . J-1
1. Necessary execution items in maintenance and
2. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J-2
servicing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
3. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J-2
2. Contents of the maintenance codes
(Relationship between various counters values and [K] TRANSFER SECTION
display messages) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2 1. Electrical and mechanical relation diagram . . . . . . . . .K-1
3. Maintenance list (parts) and details of works . . . . . . . . 8-4 2. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .K-2
[9] VARIOUS STORAGE DATA HANDLING 3. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .K-2
1. HDD partition and data contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1 [L] FUSING SECTION
2. Necessary works when replacing the PWB and 1. Electrical and mechanical relation diagram . . . . . . . . . L-1
the HDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 2. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L-2
3. Counter list. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5 3. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L-3
[10] SERVICE WEB PAGE [M] DUPLEX/PAPER EXIT SECTION
1. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1 1. Electrical and mechanical relation diagram . . . . . . . . M-1
2. Details and operation procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1 2. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-3
[11] SPECIFICATIONS 3. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-3
1. Basic specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1 [N] DRIVE SECTION
[12] ELECTRICAL SECTION 1. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N-1
1. Block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1 [O] PWB SECTION
2. Actual wiring chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-9 1. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . O-1
3. Signal list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-22 [P] FAN SECTION
[13] TOOL LIST 1. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P-1
1. Exclusive-use tools list. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1 [Q] SENSOR/SWITCH SECTION
1. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Q-1

NOTE
MX-M503N
FOR SERVICING 4) When connecting
Service Manualthe grounding wire, never connect it to the
following points.
It may cause an explosion, a fire or an electric shock.
1. Precautions for servicing
• Gas tube
1) When servicing, disconnect the power plug, the printer cable, • Lightning conductor
the network cable, and the telephone line from the machine,
• A water pipe or a water faucet, which is not recognized as a
except when performing the communication test, etc.
grounding object by the authorities.
It may cause an injury or an electric shock.
• Grounding wire for telephone line
2) There is a high temperature area inside the machine. Use an
5) Do not damage, break, or work the power cord.
extreme care when servicing.
Do not put heavy objects on the power cable. Do not bend it
It may cause a burn.
forcibly or do not pull it extremely.
3) There is a high voltage section inside the machine which may
It may cause a fire or an electric shock.
cause an electric shock. Be careful when servicing.
6) Keep the power cable away from a heat source.
4) Do not disassemble the laser unit. Do not insert a reflective
material such as a screwdriver in the laser beam path. Do not insert the power plug with dust on it into a power outlet.

It may damage eyes by reflection of laser beams. It may cause a fire or an electric shock.

5) When servicing with the machine operating, be careful not to 7) Do not put a receptacle with water in it or a metal piece which
squeeze you hands by the chain, the belt, the gear, and other may drop inside the machine.
driving sections. It may cause a fire or an electric shock.
6) Do not leave the machine with the cabinet disassembled. 8) With wet or oily hands, do not touch the power plug, do not
insert the telephone line jack, do not operate the machine, or
Do not allow any person other than a serviceman to touch
inside the machine. It may cause an electric shock, a burn, or do not perform servicing.
an injury. It may cause an electric shock.
7) When servicing, do not breathe toner, developer, and ink
excessively. Do not get them in the eyes. 3. Note for installing site
If toner, developer, or ink enters your eyes, wash it away with Do not install the machine at the following sites.
water immediately, and consult a doctor if necessary. 1) Place of high temperature, high humidity, low tempera-
8) The machine has got sharp edges inside. Be careful not to ture, low humidity, place under an extreme change in tem-
damage fingers when servicing. perature and humidity.
9) Do not throw toner or a toner cartridge in a fire. Otherwise, Paper may get damp and form dews inside the machine, caus-
toner may pop and burn you. ing paper jam or copy dirt.
10) When replacing the lithium battery of the PWB, use a specified For operating and storing conditions, refer to the specifications
one only. described later.
If a battery of different specification is used, it may be broken,
causing breakdown or malfunction of the machine.
11) When carrying a unit with PWB or electronic parts installed to
it, be sure to put it in an anti-static-electricity bag.
It may cause a breakdown or malfunctions.

CAUTION
DOUBLE POLE/NEUTRAL FUSING 2) Place of much vibrations
(200V series only) It may cause a breakdown.

2. Warning for servicing
1) Be sure to connect the power cord only to a power outlet that
meets the specified voltage and current requirements.
Avoid complex wiring, which may lead to a fire or an electric
shock.
It may cause a fire or an electric shock.
2) If there is any abnormality such as a smoke or an abnormal
smell, interrupt the job and disconnect the power plug.
3) Poorly ventilated place
It may cause a fire or an electric shock.
An electrostatic type copier will produce ozone inside it.
3) Be sure to connect the grounding wire. If an electric leakage
The quantity of ozone produced is designed to a low level so
occurs without grounding, a fire or an electric shock may
as not to affect human bodies. However, continuous use of
result.
such a machine may produce a smell of ozone. Install the
To protect the machine and the power unit from lightening, machine in a well ventilated place, and ventilate occasionally.
grounding must be made.

MX-M503N NOTE FOR SERVICING - i

4) Place of direct sunlight. 4. Note for handling PWB and electronic
Plastic parts and ink may be deformed, discolored, or may parts
undergo qualitative change.
When handling the PWB and the electronic parts, be sure to
It may cause a breakdown or copy dirt.
observe the following precautions in order to prevent against dam-
age by static electricity.
1) When in transit or storing, put the parts in an anti-static bag or
an anti-static case and do not touch them with bare hands.

5) Place which is full of organic gases such as ammonium
The organic photo-conductor (OPC) drum used in the machine
may undergo qualitative change due to organic gases such as
ammonium.
Installation of this machine near a diazo-type copier may result
in dirt copy.
2) When and after removing the parts from an anti-static bag
(case), use an earth band as shown below:
• Put an earth band to your arm, and connect it to the
machine.

6) Place of much dust
When dusts enter the machine, it may cause a breakdown or
copy dirt.

7) Place near a wall
Some machine require intake and exhaust of air.
If intake and exhaust of air are not properly performed, copy
dirt or a breakdown may be resulted.

11-13/16"
• When repairing or replacing an electronic part, perform the
(30cm) procedure on an anti-static mat.

11-13/16" 17-23/32"
(30cm) (45cm)

8) Unstable or slant surface
If the machine drops or fall down, it may cause an injury or a
breakdown.
If there are optional paper desk and the copier desk specified,
it is recommendable to use them.
When using the optional desk, be sure to fix the adjuster and
lock the casters.

MX-M503N NOTE FOR SERVICING - ii

5. Note for repairing/replacing the LSU 7. Screw tightening torque
When repairing or replacing, be sure to observe the following The screws used in this machine are largely classified into three
items. kinds.
1) When repairing or replacing the LSU, be sure to disconnect These kinds are classified according to the shape of the screw
the power plug from the power outlet. grooves and use positions.
2) When repairing or replacing the LSU, follow the procedures The table below shows the kinds of the screws and the tightening
described in this Service Manual. torques depending on the use position.
3) When checking the operations after repairing the LSU, keep all When tightening the screws for repair or maintenance, refer to the
the parts including the cover installed and perform the opera- table.
tion check. However, for the other conditions of tightening screws than speci-
4) Do not modify the LSU. fied on this table, or when a special care is required, the details are
5) When visually checking the inside of the machine for the oper- described on the separate page. Refer to the descriptions on such
ation check, be careful not to allow laser beams to enter the a case.
eyes. NOTE: Especially for the screw fixing positions where there is an
If the above precaution is neglected or an undesignated work is electrode or a current flows, use enough care to tighten
performed, safety may not be assured. securely to avoid loosening.

6. Note for handling the drum unit, the Screw kinds and tightening torques
transfer unit, the developing unit, and the Normal screws, set screws (including step screws)
fusing unit Tightening Tightening Tightening
Screw Material to be
When handling the OPC drum unit, the transfer unit, and the devel- torque torque torque
diameter fixed
oping unit, strictly observe the following items. (Nm) (kgfcm) (lbft)
M2.6 Steel plate 0.8 - 1.0 8 - 10 0.6 - 0.7
If these items are neglected, a trouble may be generated in the
M3 Steel plate 1.0 - 1.2 10 - 12 0.7 - 0.9
copy and print image quality.
M4 Steel plate 1.6 - 1.8 16 - 18 1.2 - 1.3
(Drum unit)
1) Avoid working at a place with strong lights. Tapping screws (for iron)
2) Do not expose the OPC drum to lights including interior lights Tightening Tightening Tightening
for a long time. Screw Material to be
torque torque torque
diameter fixed
3) When the OPC drum is removed from the machine, cover it (Nm) (kgfcm) (lbft)
with light blocking material. (When using paper, use about 10 M3 Steel plate 1.0 - 1.2 10 - 12 0.7 - 0.9
sheets of paper to cover it.) (Plate thickness
0.8mm or above)
4) Be careful not to attach fingerprints, oil, grease, or other for-
M4 Steel plate 1.6 - 1.8 16 - 18 1.2 - 1.3
eign material on the OPC drum surface. (Plate thickness
(Transfer unit) 0.8mm or above)
1) Be careful not to attach fingerprints, oil, grease, or other for- M3 Steel plate 0.6 - 0.8 6-8 0.4 - 0.6
eign material on the transfer roller. (Plate thickness
less than 0.8mm)
(Developing unit)
M4 Steel plate 1.2 - 1.4 12 - 14 0.9 - 1.0
1) Be careful not to attach fingerprints, oil, grease, or other for- (Plate thickness
eign material on the developing unit. less than 0.8mm)
(Fusing unit)
Tapping screw (for plastic)
1) Be careful not to put fingerprints, oil, grease, or other foreign
material on the fusing roller and the external heating belt. Tightening Tightening Tightening
Screw Material to be
torque torque torque
2) Do not leave the fusing roller in contact state for a long time. diameter fixed
(Nm) (kgfcm) (lbft)
M3 Plastic resin 0.6 - 0.8 6-8 0.4 - 0.6
M4 Plastic resin 1.0 - 1.2 10 - 12 0.7 - 0.9

MX-M503N NOTE FOR SERVICING - iii

[1] PRODUCT OUTLINE
MX-M503N
Service Manual

1. System configuration

Paper exit system

DIGITAL MULTIFUNCTIONAL SYSTEM DIGITAL MULTIFUNCTIONAL SYSTEM

STAPLE CARTRIDGE MX-M283N/M363N/M453N/M503N MX-M363U/M453U/M503U
10 MX-SCX1
PAPER PASS UNIT
6 MX-RBX3
STAPLE CARTRIDGE
11 AR-SC3 (For saddle)

PUNCH MODULE SADDLE STITCH FINISHER
9 MX-PNX5 7 MX-FN10
A/B/C/D

STAPLE CARTRIDGE Paper feed system
10 MX-SCX1

FINISHER

PUNCH MODULE
5 MX-FNX9
8 MX-PNX1 EXIT TRAY UNIT
A/B/C/D 4 MX-TRX2
LARGE CAPACITY TRAY
3 MX-LCX1

STAPLE CARTRIDGE
14 AR-SC2 PAPER PASS UNIT
6 MX-RBX3
FINISHER PUNCH MODULE STAND/1 x 500 SHEET STAND/2 x 500 SHEET
12 MX-FN11 13 MX-PNX6 PAPER DRAWER PAPER DRAWER

A/B/C/D
1 MX-DEX8 2 MX-DEX9

Printer expansion Image send expansion

PRINTER EXPANSION KIT PRINTER EXPANSION KIT
WITHOUT HDD WITH HDD
(For U model only) (For U model only)
15 MX-PB10 16 MX-PB11 FACSIMILE
EXPANSION KIT STAMP UNIT
INTERNET FAX
EXPANSION KIT
APPLICATION
INTEGRATION MODULE
PS3 EXPANSION KIT 20 MX-FXX2 21 AR-SU1 23 MX-FWX1 25 MX-AMX1
17 MX-PKX1
ENHANCED COMPRESSION KIT NETWORK SCANNER
BARCODE FONT KIT
XPS EXPANSION KIT
18 MX-PUX1 19 AR-PF1 STAMP CARTRIDGE
22 AR-SV1
(For N model only)
24 MX-EBX3
EXPANSION KIT (For U model only)
26 MX-NSX1

Authentication/Security Application/Solution

DATA SECURITY KIT DATA SECURITY KIT
(For the machine (For the machine SHARPDESK SHARPDESK APPLICATION
1 LICENSE KIT 50 LICENSE KIT COMMUNICATION MODULE KEYBOARD (For N model only)
with HDD installed)
27 MX-FR14U
without HDD installed)
28 MX-FR15U 29 MX-USX1 32 MX-US50 34 MX-AMX2 36 MX-KBX2
SHARPDESK SHARPDESK EXTERNAL
5 LICENSE KIT
Memory 30 MX-USX5
100 LICENSE KIT
33 MX-USA0
ACCOUNT MODULE
35 MX-AMX3
EXPANSION
SHARPDESK
MEMORY BOARD
10 LICENSE KIT
37 MX-SMX3 31 MX-US10

MX-M503N PRODUCT OUTLINE 1 – 1

2. Machine configuration
MX-M363N/MX-M453N/MX-M503N MX-M283N MX-M363U/MX-M453U/MX-M503U
Copier STD STD STD
PCL printer STD STD OPT*1
PS printer OPT*1 OPT*1 OPT*1
Main body LCD COLOR WVGA 8.5" COLOR WVGA 8.5" MONOCHROME HVGA 8.1"
FAX OPT OPT OPT
Scanner STD STD OPT*1
Filing (Print hold function) STD STD OPT*1
HDD STD STD OPT*1
RSPF/DSPF DSPF RSPF RSPF
Automatic duplex STD STD STD
Security OPT*1 OPT*1 OPT*1
Internet Fax OPT*1 OPT*1 OPT*1

STD: Standard provision. OPT: Option. OPT*1: Product key target.

3. Combination of options
MX-M283N
MX-M363U Product
MX-M363N
Section Name Model name MX-M453U key Remarks
MX-M453N
MX-M503U target
MX-M503N
Paper feed 1 STAND/1 x 500 SHEET PAPER DRAWER MX-DEX8  
system 2 STAND/2 x 500 SHEET PAPER DRAWER MX-DEX9  
3 LARGE CAPACITY TRAY MX-LCX1   A4
Paper exit 4 EXIT TRAY UNIT MX-TRX2  
system 5 FINISHER MX-FNX9   Inner finisher
6 PAPER PASS UNIT MX-RBX3  
7 SADDLE STITCH FINISHER MX-FN10  
8 PUNCH MODULE MX-PNX1A/B/C/D   For inner finisher
9 PUNCH MODULE MX-PNX5A/B/C/D   For saddle stitch finisher
10 STAPLE CARTRIDGE MX-SCX1   For finisher (MX-FNX9)/
For saddle stitch finisher
(MX-FN10)
11 STAPLE CARTRIDGE AR-SC3   For saddle
12 FINISHER MX-FN11  
13 PUNCH MODULE MX-PNX6A/B/C/D   For finisher (MX-FN11)
14 STAPLE CARTRIDGE AR-SC2   For finisher (MX-FN11)
Printer 15 PRINTER EXPANSION KIT WITHOUT MX-PB10 —  
expansion HDD
16 PRINTER EXPANSION KIT WITH HDD MX-PB11 STD  
17 PS3 EXPANSION KIT MX-PKX1   
18 XPS EXPANSION KIT MX-PUX1 *3 *3  The expansion memory board
(MX-SMX3) is required.
19 BARCODE FONT KIT AR-PF1  
Image send 20 FACSIMILE EXPANSION KIT MX-FXX2 *1 *1
expansion 21 STAMP UNIT AR-SU1  
22 STAMP CARTRIDGE AR-SV1  
23 INTERNET FAX EXPANSION KIT MX-FWX1  *4 
24 ENHANCED COMPRESSION KIT MX-EBX3  —
25 APPLICATION INTEGRATION MODULE MX-AMX1  *4 
26 NETWORK SCANNER EXPANSION KIT MX-NSX1 STD  
Authentication/ 27 DATA SECURITY KIT MX-FR14U  *4  Commercial version
Security (For the machine with HDD installed)
28 DATA SECURITY KIT MX-FR15U —   Commercial version
(For the machine without HDD installed)
Application/ 29 SHARPDESK 1 LICENSE KIT MX-USX1  
Solution 30 SHARPDESK 5 LICENSE KIT MX-USX5  
31 SHARPDESK 10 LICENSE KIT MX-US10  
32 SHARPDESK 50 LICENSE KIT MX-US50  
33 SHARPDESK 100 LICENSE KIT MX-USA0  
34 APPLICATION COMMUNICATION MX-AMX2 STD/*2 *4  For North America,
MODULE the SharpOSA Utility CD-ROM
is not provided.
35 EXTERNAL ACCOUNT MODULE MX-AMX3  *4 
36 KEYBOARD MX-KBX2 STD/*2 —
Memory 37 EXPANSION MEMORY BOARD MX-SMX3   1GB (Required when the XPS
expansion kit is used.)

STD: Standard provision. : Installable. —: Cannot be connected. *1: No support for some destinations. *2: Standard for North America.
*3: Memory expansion are required. *4: The printer expansion kit with hard drive (MX-PB11) is required.

MX-M503N PRODUCT OUTLINE 1 – 2

[2] CONSUMABLE PARTS
MX-M503N
Service Manual
1. Supply system table
A. USA/Canada/South and Central America (MX-M283N/M363N/M363U/M453N/M453U/M503N/M503U)
Life
Quantity in
MX-M363 N/U
No. Item Content Model Name collective Remarks
MX-M283N MX-M453 N/U
package
MX-M503 N/U
1 Toner Cartridge (Black) Toner Cartridge with IC Chip x1 40K MX-500NT 10 Life: A4/Letter
(Toner: Net 930g) 6% document
2 Developer (Black) Developer (Developer: Net 310g) x1 150K 200K MX-500NV 10
3 Drum OPC Drum x1 150K 200K MX-500NR 10

B. MPE (MX-M283N/M363N/M363U/M453N/M453U/M503N/M503U)
Life
Quantity in
MX-M363 N/U
No. Item Content Model Name collective Remarks
MX-M283N MX-M453 N/U
package
MX-M503 N/U
1 Toner Cartridge (Black) Toner Cartridge with IC Chip x1 40K MX-500BT 10 Life: A4/Letter
(Toner: Net 930g) 6% document
2 Developer (Black) Developer (Developer: Net 310g) x1 150K 200K MX-500NV 10
3 Drum OPC Drum x1 150K 200K MX-500NR 10

C. Asia/SRH (MX-M283N/M363N/M363U/M453N/M453U/M503N/M503U)
Life
Quantity in
MX-M363 N/U
No. Item Content Model Name collective Remarks
MX-M283N MX-M453 N/U
package
MX-M503 N/U
1 Toner Cartridge (Black) Toner Cartridge with IC Chip x1 40K MX-500AT 10 Life: A4/Letter
(Toner: Net 930g) 6% document
2 Developer (Black) Developer (Developer: Net 310g) x1 150K 200K MX-500AV 10
3 Drum OPC Drum x1 150K 200K MX-500AR 10

D. Europe/Australia/New Zealand (MX-M283N/M363N/M363U/M453N/M453U/M503N/M503U)
Life
Quantity in
MX-M363 N/U
No. Item Content Model Name collective Remarks
MX-M283N MX-M453 N/U
package
MX-M503 N/U
1 Toner Cartridge (Black) Toner Cartridge with IC Chip x1 40K MX-500GT 10 Life: A4/Letter
(Toner: Net 930g) 6% document
2 Developer (Black) Developer (Developer: Net 310g) x1 150K 200K MX-500GV 10
3 Drum OPC Drum x1 150K 200K MX-500GR 10

E. SMEF/Taiwan/Africa/Israel/Philippines (MX-M283N/M363N/M363U/M453N/M453U/M503N/M503U)
Life
Quantity in
MX-M363 N/U
No. Item Content Model Name collective Remarks
MX-M283N MX-M453 N/U
package
MX-M503 N/U
1 Toner Cartridge (Black) Toner Cartridge with IC Chip x1 40K MX-500FT 10 Life: A4/Letter
(Toner: Net 930g) 6% document
2 Developer (Black) Developer (Developer: Net 310g) x1 150K 200K MX-500AV 10
3 Drum OPC Drum x1 150K 200K MX-500AR 10

F. SESC (MX-M363N/M363U/M453N/M453U/M503N/M503U)
Quantity in
No. Item Content Life Model Name collective Remarks
package
1 Toner Cartridge (Black) Toner Cartridge with IC Chip x1 40K MX-500CT 10 Life: A4/Letter
(Toner: Net 930g) 6% document
2 Developer (Black) Developer (Developer: Net 310g) x1 200K MX-500CV 10
3 Drum OPC Drum x1 200K MX-500CR 10

MX-M503N CONSUMABLE PARTS 2 – 1

Maintenance parts list A.2. Europe/Australia/New Zealand (MX-M283N/M363N/M363U/M453N/M453U/M503N/M503U) Life Model MX-M363 N/U No. Item Content Quantity Package Remarks name MX-M283N MX-M453 N/U MX-M503 N/U 1 Heat roller kit MX-503HK Lower heat roller 1 150K 200K 5 (200K kit) Upper separation pawl/pawl spring 4 Lower separation pawl/pawl spring 2 Upper heat roller 1 Upper pressure roller bearing 2 Pressure roller 1 Web roller 1 2 Transfer kit MX-503TU Transfer roller 1 150K 200K 10 Discharge plate 1 3 DV seal kit MX-503DS DV seal 1 150K 200K 10 DV side seal F/R 1 pair TN filter UN 2 4 Main charger kit MX-503MK Cleaner blade 1 150K 200K 10 Toner reception seal 1 Side seal F/R 1 pair Drum separation pawl unit 4 MC unit 1 Side sheet F/R for toner reception 2 seal Molt cushion for side seal F/R 2 5 Toner collection box MX-503HB Toner collection box 1 80K 5 6 Paper dust MX-503PD Paper dust removing unit 1 150K 200K 10 removing unit 7 Filter kit MX-503FL Ozone filter 1 300K 400K 10 8 Staple cartridge AR-SC2 Staple cartridge 3 5000 times x 3 20 For finisher (MX-FN11) 9 Staple cartridge AR-SC3 Staple cartridge 3 2000 times x 3 40 For saddle stitch finisher (MX-FN10) 10 Staple cartridge MX-SCX1 Staple cartridge 3 5000 times x 3 20 For inner finisher/ saddle stitch finisher (MX-FNX9/FN10) 11 Finish stamp AR-SV1 Finish stamp cartridge 2 — 20 cartridge B. Item Content Quantity Package Remarks name MX-M283N MX-M453 N/U MX-M503 N/U 1 Upper heat roller kit MX-503UH Upper heat roller 1 150K 200K 10 (200K kit) Upper separation pawl/pawl spring 4 2 Lower heat roller kit MX-503LH Lower heat roller 1 150K 200K 10 (200K kit) Lower separation pawl/pawl spring 2 3 Web cleaning kit MX-503WC Upper pressure roller bearing 2 150K 200K 10 Pressure roller 1 Web roller 1 4 Transfer kit MX-503TU Transfer roller 1 150K 200K 10 Discharge plate 1 5 DV seal kit MX-503DS DV seal 1 150K 200K 10 DV side seal F/R 1 pair TN filter UN 2 6 Main charger kit MX-503MK Cleaner blade 1 150K 200K 10 Toner reception seal 1 Side seal F/R 1 pair Drum separation pawl unit 4 MC unit 1 Side sheet F/R for toner reception 2 seal Molt cushion for side seal F/R 2 7 Toner collection box MX-503HB Toner collection box 1 80K 5 8 Paper dust MX-503PD Paper dust removing unit 1 150K 200K 10 removing unit 9 Filter kit MX-503FL Ozone filter 1 300K 400K 10 10 Staple cartridge AR-SC2 Staple cartridge 3 5000 times x 3 20 For finisher (MX-FN11) MX-M503N CONSUMABLE PARTS 2 – 2 . USA/Canada/South and Central America/Asia/Agency/Middle East (MX-M283N/M363N/M363U/M453N/M453U/M503N/M503U) Life Model MX-M363 N/U No.

28 CPM model 36/45/50 CPM model The number is printed on the flange on the front side. When either of the above reached the specified level.000 Indicates the day of the production date. the developer and the drum rotates. 3 sheets multi 150. Each digit indicates the content as follows. 3: Number Indicates the end digit of the production year. To check the drum life. Y November.000 For this model.000 150. Life Model MX-M363 N/U No. A.000 177. when correction or warm-up operation is per- formed as well as output operation.000 1: Number 2 sheets multi 140. 8/9: Number Indicates the day of the packing date. 7: Number Indicates the day of the month of packing.000 X stands for October. Production number identification When the developer/drum counter reaches the specified level. When.000 Indicates the model conformity code. this digit is 2.000 10: Alphabet Indicates the production factory. therefore. Therefore.000 2: Alphabet 4 sheets multi – 200. Definition the developer/drum life end 4. it is judged as life end. 5/6: Number 36/45/50 CPM model 200. Item Content Quantity Package Remarks name MX-M283N MX-M453 N/U MX-M503 N/U 11 Staple cartridge AR-SC3 Staple cartridge 3 2000 times x 3 40 For saddle stitch finisher (MX-FN10) 12 Staple cartridge MX-SCX1 Staple cartridge 3 5000 times x 3 20 For inner finisher/ saddle stitch finisher (MX-FNX9/FN10) 13 Finish stamp AR-SV1 Finish stamp cartridge 2 — 20 cartridge 3. Single multi 100.000 X stands for October. 250. the developer/drum consuming level cannot be determined only by the copy/print quantity. Drum cartridge When the developer/drum rpm reaches the specified level.000 0 Single multi 2 sheets multi 3 sheets multi 4 sheets multi MX-M503N CONSUMABLE PARTS 2 – 3 . Y November. use SIM22-1/22-13. Printable counter 4: Number or X. and Z December. 100. Y. In an actual case. the rpm reaches the specified level. 50.000 110. and Z December. Z 28 CPM model Indicates the production month. it is judged as life end. Developer/drum counter Developer/drum rpm 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 28 CPM 36/45/50 CPM model model Developer/drum 150K 200K 930K rotations The lot number is of 10 digits. 150.

2009 MX-M503N CONSUMABLE PARTS 2 – 4 . Toner cartridge The label indicating the management number is attached to the side of the toner cartridge. Environmental conditions BK (Humidity) 85% 60% 20% 10 30 35 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 (Temperature) The lot number is of 8 digits. 5/6: Number Indicates the production day. 7: Hyphen 8: Number Indicates the production lot. Drum: 36 months from the manufactured month 3/4: Number under unsealed state Indicates the production month. Each digit indicates the content as fol- lows. manufactured month (Production lot) under 2: Number unsealed state Indicates the production year. Internal product name Destination Incompatibility A3M X500NT 1 A B 00001 090210 B Production Serial No. Standard environmental Temperature 20 – 25 °C conditions Humidity 65  5 %RH The number is printed on the right under side of the back surface of Usage environmental Temperature 10 – 35 °C the developer bag. C. Developer D. conditions Humidity 20 – 85 %RH 1: Alphabet Storage period Toner/Developer: 24 months from the Indicates the production factory. Production Version place in production day year/month/day Example: 1st of production on February 10.B.

it can be stored under the operation panel. When not A standard part or an option depending used. on the model and the destination. The saddle stitch function for folding and stapling output and the fold function for folding output in half are also available. be careful of USB memory to the machine. 5 Right tray* When installed. paper drawer or a stand/2 x 500 sheet paper drawer is installed)* 16 Tray 4 (when a stand/2 x 500 sheet This holds paper. When a finisher / saddle stitch finisher is not installed (7) When a finisher is installed (12) (13) (14) (15) (16) (17) When a saddle stitch finisher is (11) installed No. 3 Paper pass unit* This transfers output to the finisher (large capacity) or the saddle stitch finisher. 15 Tray 3 (when a stand/1 x 500 sheet This holds paper. For the USB cable. Name Function/Operation NOTE 1 Automatic document feeder This automatically feeds and scans multiple originals. output can be delivered to this tray. installed)* *: Peripheral device. A punch module can also be installed to punch holes in output. External view (10) (8) (1) (2) (3) (4) (9) (5) (6) The keyboard is provided as a standard part for some models only. Identification of each section and functions A.[3] EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE MX-M503N Service Manual 1. 8 Punch module* This is used to punch holes in output. 11 Saddle stitch finisher* This can be used to staple output. exceed 500mA. 12 Finisher (large capacity)* This can be used to staple output. This is used to connect a USB device such as When using the USB port. use a shielded the total current consumption not to cable. Requires the finisher (large capacity). paper drawer is installed)* 17 Tray 5 (when a large capacity tray is This holds paper. 6 Output tray (center tray) Output is delivered to this tray. 9 USB connector (A type) Supports USB 2.0. 2 Front cover Open this cover to switch the main power switch to "On" or "Off" or to replace a toner cartridge. MX-M503N EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 3 – 1 . 4 Operation panel This is used to select functions and enter the number of copies. 13 Tray 1 This holds paper. 14 Tray 2 This holds paper. Both sides of 2-sided originals can be automatically scanned. 10 Keyboard* This is a keyboard that is incorporated into the machine. A punch module can also be installed to punch holes in output. 7 Finisher* This can be used to staple output.

9 Right cover of stand/ Open this to remove a paper mis-feed in tray 3 or tray 4. 1 x 500 sheet paper drawer right cover of stand/ 2 x 500 sheet paper drawer (when a stand/ 1 x 500 sheet paper drawer or a stand/ 2 x 500 sheet paper drawer is installed) 10 Paper tray right side cover Open this to remove a paper mis-feed in tray 1 or tray 2. 8 Handle Pull this out and grasp it when moving the machine. 2 Document feeding area cover Open this cover to remove an original mis-feed or clean the paper feed roller. B. 3 Right side cover Open this cover to remove a paper mis-feed. 5 Original exit tray Originals are delivered to this tray after scanning. Adjust the guides to the width of the original. Internal operation parts (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11) No. be sure to pull out the bypass tray extension. Open this cover to remove a paper mis-feed. When loading paper larger than 8-1/2" x 11"R or A4R. 6 Main power switch This is used to power on the machine. 6 Scanning area Originals placed in the document feeder tray are scanned here. pull and hold this lever up to open the right side cover. 7 Original size detector This detects the size of an original placed on the document glass. When using the fax or Internet fax functions. 5 Bypass tray Use this tray to feed paper manually. 8 Document glass Use this to scan a book or other thick original that cannot be fed through the automatic document feeder. MX-M503N EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 3 – 2 . the cartridge of the color that ran out must be replaced. When the toner runs out in a cartridge. Name Function/Operation 1 Toner cartridges These contain toner for printing. 7 Waste toner box This collects excess toner that remains after printing. Name Function/Operation 1 Paper feed roller This roller rotates to automatically feed the original. keep this switch in the "on" position. 11 Right side cover release lever To remove a paper mis-feed. 4 Document feeder tray Place originals in this tray. 3 Original guides These help ensure that the original is scanned correctly. 1-sided originals must be placed face up.[Automatic document feeder and document glass] (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) No. 4 Paper reversing section cover This is used when 2-sided printing is performed. 2 Fusing unit Heat is applied here to fuse the transferred image onto the paper.

an extension phone can be connected to this socket. machine. an exclusive connection is enabled. The connector on the careful of the total current front section can be used under the factory setting. Important note for service technicians: The cable connected to the service connector must be less than 118" (3 m) in length. be machine. 7 Telephone line socket When the fax function of the machine is used. When the keyboard is installed to the consumption not to exceed 500mA. A computer can be connected to this connector to use the machine as a printer. This is used to connect a USB device such as USB memory to the When using the USB port. use a shielded cable.0. Connectors When the fax expansion kit is installed (6) (7) (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) No. (Simultaneous connection is disabled.) 2 LAN connector Connect the LAN cable to this connector when the machine is used on a network.C. use a shielded type cable. For the USB cable. MX-M503N EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 3 – 3 . the telephone line is connected to this socket. Connecting a cable to this connector may cause the machine to malfunction. For the LAN cable. 5 Power plug 6 Extension phone socket When the fax function of the machine is used. 3 USB connector (B type) Supports USB 2. Name Function/Operation NOTE 1 USB connector (A type) Supports USB 2. This connector cannot be used under the factory setting. 4 Service-only connector CAUTION: This connector is for use only by service technicians.0.

4 PRINT mode indicators • READY indicator Print jobs can be received when this indicator is lit. The system settings are used to configure paper tray settings. this key can also be pressed to send tone signals on a pulse dial line. 13 [STOP] key ( ) Press this key to stop a copy job or scanning of an original. store addresses for transmission operations. 9 [START] key Press this key to copy or scan an original. Touch the displayed keys to perform a variety of operations. 16 Main power indicator This lights up when the machine's main power switch is in the "on" position. These keys are also used to enter numeric value settings (except for the system settings). this key can be used when dialing. The job status screen is used to check information on jobs and to cancel jobs. 12 [CLEAR ALL] key ( ) Press this key to return to the initial operation state. Frequently used settings can be registered in the home screen to enable quick and easy operation of the machine. This provides confirmation as you perform an operation. When using the fax function. press this key to use a job program. and adjust parameters to make the machine easier to use. 15 [POWER] key ( ) Use this key to turn the machine power on and off. 14 [POWER SAVE] key ( ) / indicator Use this key to put the machine into auto power shut-off mode to save energy. When using the fax function. 7 [HOME] key Touch this key to display the home screen. Name Function/Operation 1 Touch panel Messages and keys appear in the touch panel display. This key is also used to send a fax in fax mode. 5 Numeric keys These are used to enter the number of copies. 8 IMAGE SEND mode indicators • LINE indicator This lights up during transmission or reception of a fax or Internet fax. This also lights during transmission of an image in scan mode. fax numbers. 2 [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key Press this key to display the system settings menu screen.D. This lights up when there is a transmission job that has not been sent. Use this key when you wish to cancel all settings that have been selected and start operation from the initial state. 10 [LOGOUT] key ( ) Press this key to log out after you have logged in and used the machine. a beep sounds and the selected item is highlighted. 6 [CLEAR] key ( ) Press this key to return the number of copies to "0". 11 [#/P] key ( ) When using the copy function. • DATA indicator This blinks while print data is being received and lights steadily while printing is taking place. The [POWER SAVE] key ( ) blinks when the machine is in auto power shut-off mode. and other numerical values. • DATA indicator This blinks when a received fax or Internet fax cannot be printed because of a problem such as out of paper. 3 [JOB STATUS] key Press this key to display the job status screen. MX-M503N EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 3 – 4 . When a key is touched. Operation panel (1) MX-M283N/M363N/M453N/M503N (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (9) JOB STATUS PRINT READY DATA SYSTEM SETTINGS IMAGE SEND LINE DATA HOME LOGOUT (7) (8) (10) (11) (12) (13) (14) (15) (16) No.

Press this key to switch to document filing mode when you wish to store a document as an image file on the hard drive or print or transmit an image stored on the hard drive. 8 [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key Press this key to display the system settings menu screen. This lights up when there is a transmission job that has not been sent. 17 Main power indicator This lights up when the machine's main power switch is in the "on" position. • DATA indicator This blinks while print data is being received and lights steadily while printing is taking place. 10 [START] key Press this key to copy or scan an original. press this key to use a job program. this key can be used when dialing. The job status screen is used to check information on jobs and to cancel jobs. fax numbers. 12 [#/P] key ( ) When using the copy function. 15 [POWER SAVE] key ( ) / indicator Use this key to put the machine into auto power shut-off mode to save energy. this key is the [PRINT] key. 4 IMAGE SEND mode indicators • LINE indicator This lights up during transmission or reception of a fax or Internet fax. This also lights during transmission of an image in scan mode. 11 [LOGOUT] key ( ) Press this key to log out after you have logged in and used the machine. press this key to switch to Sharp OSA mode. This key is also used to send a fax in fax mode. • [IMAGE SEND] key Press this key to select network scanner / fax mode to use the scanner function or fax function. a beep sounds and the selected item is highlighted. MX-M503N EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 3 – 5 . and adjust parameters to make the machine easier to use.(2) MX-M363U/M453U/M503U (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (10) PRINT DOCUMENT READY FILING DATA LINE IMAGE SEND DATA COPY SYSTEM JOB STATUS SETTINGS LOGOUT (7) (8) (9) (11) (12) (13) (14) (15) (16) (17) No. 6 [CLEAR] key ( ) Press this key to return the number of copies to "0". store addresses for transmission operations. When a hard drive is not installed in the machine. 2 Mode select keys and indicators Use these keys to change the mode displayed in the touch panel. Hold the [COPY] key down to view the machine's total page use count and amount of toner remaining. When a key is touched. 7 [JOB STATUS] key Press this key to display the job status screen. 16 [POWER] key ( ) Use this key to turn the machine power on and off. 14 [STOP] key ( ) Press this key to stop a copy job or scanning of an original. • [PRINT] key / [DOCUMENT FILING] key The name and function of the key varies depending on the peripheral devices that are installed. 13 [CLEAR ALL] key ( ) Press this key to return to the initial operation state. Touch the displayed keys to perform a variety of operations. The system settings are used to configure paper tray settings. Use this key when you wish to cancel all settings that have been selected and start operation from the initial state. Name Function/Operation 1 Touch panel Messages and keys appear in the touch panel display. When using the fax function. 3 PRINT mode indicators • READY indicator Print jobs can be received when this indicator is lit. • [COPY] key Press this key to select copy mode. this key is the [DOCUMENT FILING] key. this key can also be pressed to send tone signals on a pulse dial line. When a hard drive is installed in the machine. 5 Numeric keys These are used to enter the number of copies. These keys are also used to enter numeric value settings (except for the system settings). and other numerical values. • DATA indicator This blinks when a received fax or Internet fax cannot be printed because of a problem such as out of paper. Press this key to select print mode when printing data that uses the print hold function. This provides confirmation as you perform an operation. The indicator of a key lights when the key is selected. 9 Function key To use the Sharp OSA function. When using the fax function. The [POWER SAVE] key ( ) blinks when the machine is in auto power shut-off mode.

3 Separation roller Separate a document to prevent against double-feed. 4 Resist roller (Drive) Performs resist of document transport. SPLS2 DSPF document length sensor (long) Transmission type Detects the document length in the DSPF paper feed tray. SPPD3 DSPF document pass sensor 3 Transmission type Detects pass of the document. SOCD DSPF open/close sensor Transmission type Detects open/close of the DSPF unit. 9 Transport roller 2 (Idle) Applied a pressure to document and the transport roller. and provides the transport power of the transport roller to document. 10 Transport roller 3 (Drive) Transports document from the transport roller 2 to the paper exit roller.E. and provides the transport power of the transport roller to document. SPPD5 DSPF document pass sensor 5 Transmission type Detects pass of the document. 14 Transport auxiliary roller Helps to transport document smoothly. (2) Sensors and Switches SCOV SPPD2 SPPD1 SPLS2 SPED SPWS SPLS1 CIS SOCD SPPD3 SPPD5 SPPD6 (SPOD) Signal name Name Type Function/Operation CIS CIS unit CIS Converts document images (optical signals) into electrical signals. 13 Paper exit roller (Idle) Applies a pressure to document and the paper exit roller and provides transport power of the paper exit roller to document. SPLS1 DSPF document length sensor (short) Transmission type Detects the document length in the DSPF paper feed tray. 2 Paper feed roller Performs the paper feed operation of documents. 8 Transport roller 2 (Drive) Transports document to the transport 3 roller. and provides the transport power of the transport roller to document. DSPF (1) Internal structure 5 4 14 2 3 1 7 6 8 9 10 11 12 13 No. 11 Transport roller 3 (Idle) Applied a pressure to document and the transport roller. 12 Paper exit roller (Drive) Discharges document. 6 Transport roller 1 (Drive) Transports document from resist roller to transport roller 2. SPWS DSPF document width sensor Volume resistor Detects the document width in the DSPF paper feed tray. 5 Resist roller (Idle) Applied a pressure to document and the resist roller. SPPD6 (SPOD) DSPF document exit sensor Transmission type Detects pass of the document. MX-M503N EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 3 – 6 . 7 Transport roller 1 (Idle) Applied a pressure to document and the transport roller. SPPD1 DSPF document pass sensor 1 Transmission type Detects pass of the document. Name Function/Operation 1 Pickup roller Picks up a document and feeds it to the paper feed roller. SPED DSPF document sensor Transmission type Detects document empty in the DSPF paper feed tray. SCOV DSPF upper cover open/close sensor Micro switch Detects open/close of the DSPF upper cover. SPPD2 DSPF document pass sensor 2 Transmission type Detects pass of the document. and provides transport power of the resist roller to document.

6 Transport roller 1 (Drive) Transports document from resist roller to transport roller 2. 10 Transport roller 3 (Drive) Transports document from the transport roller 2 to the paper exit roller. 12 Paper exit roller (Drive) Discharges document. 4 Resist roller (Drive) Performs resist of document transport.(3) Motors. PWB and lamps 4 SPFM SPM SRRC STMPS FAN 3 1 2 Signal name Name Type Function/Operation FAN Cooling fan motor DC motor Cools the CIS unit and the motor. 2 Paper feed roller Performs the paper feed operation of documents. No. 2 DSPF flash ROM PWB Program ROM for DSPF 3 DSPF driver PWB Drives the motor and the clutch in the DSPF section. and provides transport power of the resist roller to document. 3 Separation roller Separate a document to prevent against double-feed. 13 Paper exit roller (Idle) Applies a pressure to document and the paper exit roller and provides transport power of the paper exit roller to document. Name Function/Operation 1 Pickup roller Picks up a document and feeds it to the paper feed roller. clutches. 11 Transport roller 3 (Idle) Applied a pressure to document and the transport roller. and provides the transport power of the transport roller to document. 7 Transport roller 1 (Idle) Applied a pressure to document and the transport roller. / Transports document to the resist roller when reversing the document. STMPS Stamp solenoid Electromagnetic solenoid Drives the stamp. SRRC PS clutch Electromagnetic clutch Controls ON/OFF of resist roller. Name Function/Operation 1 DSPF control PWB Controls the DSPF section. 14 Transport auxiliary roller Helps to transport document smoothly. (CIS PWB: CIS control. 9 Transport roller 2 (Idle) Applied a pressure to document and the transport roller. SPM Paper feed motor Stepping motor Drives the roller in the paper feed section. and provides the transport power of the transport roller to document. SPFM Transport motor Stepping motor Drives the transport roller. 5 Resist roller (Idle) Applied a pressure to document and the resist roller. and provides the transport power of the transport roller to document. RSPF (1) Internal structure 5 4 14 2 3 1 15 7 6 8 9 10 11 12 13 No. MX-M503N EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 3 – 7 . 15 Reverse gate Reverses a document to scan the back surface of the document. 8 Transport roller 2 (Drive) Transports document to the transport 3 roller. 4 DSPF CIS unit Reads document images. solenoids. LED: Light source) F.

Name Function/Operation 1 RSPF driver PWB Drives the motor and the clutch in the RSPF section. SPPD3 RSPF document pass sensor 3 Transmission type Detects pass of the document. STMPS Stamp solenoid Electromagnetic solenoid Drives the stamp. SPLS1 RSPF document length sensor (short) Transmission type Detects the document length in the RSPF paper feed tray. SPRS Pressure release solenoid Electromagnetic solenoid Releases the pressure of the transport roller 3 when reversing a document and transporting it to the resist roller.(2) Sensors and Switches SCOV SPPD2 SPPD1 SPLS2 SPED SPWS SPLS1 SOCD SPPD3 SPPD5 Signal name Name Type Function/Operation SCOV RSPF upper cover open/close sensor Micro switch Detects open/close of the RSPF upper cover. SPPD2 RSPF document pass sensor 2 Transmission type Detects pass of the document. clutches. SPWS RSPF document width sensor Volume resistor Detects the document width in the RSPF paper feed tray. SPLS2 RSPF document length sensor (long) Transmission type Detects the document length in the RSPF paper feed tray. SRVC Reverse clutch Electromagnetic clutch Controls ON/OFF of the transport power of the transport roller 3 and the paper exit roller when discharging a document and reversing it to transport to the resist roller. No. solenoids. SRRC PS clutch Electromagnetic clutch Controls ON/OFF of resist roller. (3) Motors. SPPD5 RSPF document pass sensor 5 Transmission type Detects pass of the document. SPPD1 RSPF document pass sensor 1 Transmission type Detects pass of the document. SPM Paper feed motor Stepping motor Drives the roller in the paper feed section. PWB SPFM SPM SRRC STMPS SRVC SPRS 1 Signal name Name Type Function/Operation SPFM Transport motor Stepping motor Drives the transport roller. MX-M503N EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 3 – 8 . SPED RSPF document sensor Transmission type Detects document empty in the RSPF paper feed tray. SOCD RSPF open/close sensor Transmission type Detects open/close of the RSPF unit.

G. Sensors OCSW MHPS CCD TFD3 TFD2 POD3 HPOS POD2 APPD1 POD1 WEB-END TH_MY TH_US DSW_ADU BD PCS TCS TH_DV/HUD_DV APPD2 PPD2 MPED MPLD TNBOX MTOP1 TNF MPWD MTOP2 PPD1 MPFD CLUD1 CPFD1 CPED1 CSS11 CSS12 CSS13 CSPD1 DSW_C CSS14 CLUD2 CPFD2 CPED2 CSS21 CSS22 CSS23 CSPD2 CSS24 MX-M503N EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 3 – 9 .

TH_DV/HUD_DV Temperature/humidity detection Detects the temperature and the humidity in the process section. Transmission type PPD2 Resist detection Detects the paper in rear of resist roller. TH_MY Main thermistor Fusing temperature detection (main) Thermistor TH_US Sub thermistor Fusing temperature detection (sub) Thermistor TNF Waste toner box remaining quantity detection Detects installation of the waste toner box. OCSW Original cover SW Detects the trigger for document size.4. Transmission type CLUD2 Tray 2 upper limit detection (Lift HP detection) Detects the tray 2 upper limit. Duct switch CSS24 Tray 2 rear edge detection 4 Duct switch DSW_ADU ADU transport open/close detection Detects the duplex (ADU) cover open/close. Transmission type CPED1 Tray 1 paper empty detection Detects the tray 1 paper empty. MTOP2 Manual paper feed tray pull-out position detector 2 Detects the manual paper feed tray paper pull-out position (pull. Electrode switch MX-M503N EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 3 – 10 . Transmission type TFD3 Right tray paper exit full detection Detects the right tray paper exit full. Transmission type APPD2 ADU transport path detection 2 Detects the duplex (ADU) midstream paper pass. Transmission type BD Laser beam detection Detects the laser scan start timing. Transmission type MPED Manual feed paper empty detection Detects the manual feed paper empty. PPD1 Resist pre-detection Detects the paper in front of resist roller. Duct switch CSS14 Tray 1 rear edge detection 4 Duct switch CSS21 Tray 2 rear edge detection 1 Insertion of the tray is detected by detecting either of tray 2 rear Duct switch CSS22 Tray 2 rear edge detection 2 edge detection 1 . Transmission type MPFD Manual feed paper entry detection Detects the manual feed paper entry. WEB-END Web end detection Detects life end of the web cleaner. Reflection type TCS Toner density sensor Detects the toner density (K). MPWD Manual paper feed tray paper width detector Detects the manual paper feed tray paper width. CSS11 Tray 1 rear edge detection 1 Insertion of the tray is detected by detecting either of tray 1 rear Duct switch CSS12 Tray 1 rear edge detection 2 edge detection 1 . Transmission type MPLD Manual feed paper length detector Detects the manual paper feed tray paper length. MHPS Scanner home position sensor Detects the scanner home position. Transmission type DSW_C Tray 1 and 2 transport cover open/close detection Detects the tray 1 and 2 transport cover open/close. Transmission type CPFD2 Tray 2 transport detection (Paper entry detection) Detects tray 2 paper pass. Transmission type out position). TNBOX Waste toner box remaining quantity detection Detects installation of the waste toner box. Magnetic sensor TFD2 Paper exit full detection Detects the face down paper exit tray full. Transmission type CSPD1 Tray 1 paper remaining quantity detection Detects the tray 1 paper remaining quantity. CSPD2 Tray 2 paper remaining quantity detection Detects the tray 2 paper remaining quantity. Transmission type POD1 Fusing rear detection Detects the paper exit from fusing. Detects the waste Transmission type toner near end and the waste toner full. Volume resistor MTOP1 Manual paper feed tray pull-out position detector 1 Detects the manual paper feed tray paper pull-out position Transmission type (storing position). CLUD1 Tray 1 upper limit detection (Lift HP detection) Detects the tray 1 upper limit. CCD CCD unit Converts document images (optical signals) into electrical signals. Duct switch CSS13 Tray 1 rear edge detection 3 The paper size of tray 1 is detected. Transmission type CPED2 Tray 2 paper empty detection Detects the tray 2 paper empty. Reflection type PCS Image density sensor Detects toner patch density.4. Duct switch CSS23 Tray 2 rear edge detection 3 The paper size of tray 2 is detected. Signal name Name Function/Operation Type APPD1 ADU transport path detection 1 Detects the duplex (ADU) upstream paper pass. Detects the waste Transmission type toner near end and the waste toner full. HPOS Shifter home position detection Detects the shifter home position. Transmission type POD3 Right tray paper exit detection Detects the paper exit to right tray. Transmission type POD2 Paper exit detection Detects the paper from paper exit. Transmission type CPFD1 Tray 1 transport detection (Paper entry detection) Detects tray 1 paper pass.

PWRSW Operation panel power switch Push switch Controls ON/OFF of the DC power source. and turns ON/OFF the power line of the fusing. MX-M503N EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 3 – 11 . Switches PWRSW DSW-R MSW DSW-F Signal name Name Type Function/Operation DSW-F Front door open/close switch Micro switch Detects open/close of the front door. and turns ON/OFF the power line of the fusing. motor and the LSU laser. MSW Main switch Seesaw switch Turns ON/OFF the DC power source. DSW-R Right door open/close switch Micro switch Detects open/close of the right door. motor and the LSU laser.H.

MX-M503N EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 3 – 12 . CPUC1 Paper feed clutch Electromagnetic clutch Controls ON/OFF of the roller in the paper feed tray 1 section. TDSC Toner supply clutch Electromagnetic clutch Controls ON/OFF of toner supply. Clutches and solenoids ADUGS MPUC CPFC2 MPFS MPGS PSPS TDSC CPUC1 CPFC1 CPUC2 Signal name Name Type Function/Operation ADUGS ADU gate solenoid Electromagnetic solenoid Controls the ADU gate. PSPS Separation solenoid Electromagnetic solenoid Separates paper from the OPC drum. (Paper feed tray 2) MPFS Paper pickup solenoid Electromagnetic solenoid Paper pickup solenoid (Manual paper feed) (Manual paper feed) MPGS Manual paper feed gate solenoid Electromagnetic solenoid Controls the manual paper feed gate Open/Close. MPUC Manual paper feed clutch Electromagnetic clutch Controls the manual paper feed section paper feed roller ON/OFF. (Paper feed tray 1) CPUC2 Paper feed clutch Electromagnetic clutch Controls ON/OFF of the roller in the paper feed tray 2 section.I. CPFC1 Paper transport clutch 1 Electromagnetic clutch Controls ON/OFF of the paper transport roller 7. CPFC2 Paper transport clutch 2 Electromagnetic clutch Controls ON/OFF of the paper transport roller in the paper transport section of the paper feed tray section.

OSM Shifter motor Stepping motor Performs offset of paper.J. Drives the transport roller which is between the resist roller and the right door section. POM Paper exit drive motor Stepping motor Drives the paper exit roller. DM Drum motor Brush-less motor Drives the OPC drum and the developing unit. MX-M503N EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 3 – 13 . PFM Transport motor Stepping motor Drives the transport roller which is between the resist roller and the paper feed section. (Paper feed tray 2) CPFM Paper feed motor Brush-less motor Drives the paper feed section. RRM Resist motor Stepping motor Drives the resist roller and controls ON/OFF. CLUM1 Paper tray lift-up motor DC brush motor Drives the lift plate of the paper feed tray. Drive motor OSM ADUM_H POM WEBM FUM PGM MIM DM PFM CPFM RRM CLUM1 ADUM_L CLUM2 Signal name Name Type Function/Operation ADUM_H ADU motor upper Stepping motor Drives the transport roller 13. FUM Fusing drive motor Brush-less motor Drives the fusing unit. ADUM_L ADU motor lower Stepping motor Drives the paper transport roller in the right door section. PGM Polygon motor DC brush-less motor Scans the laser beam. WEBM Fusing web cleaning motor Synchronous motor Drives the fusing web cleaning paper. (Paper feed tray 1) CLUM2 Paper tray lift-up motor DC brush motor Drives the lift plate of the paper feed tray. MIM Scanner motor Stepping motor Drives the scanner (reading) unit.

Lamps and gates CCFT CLI CLI (N model) (U model) 2 1 HL_UM/HL_US/HL_UW Signal name Name Type Function/Operation CCFT LCD back-light Cold Cathode Fluorescent Tube Back-light for LCD CLI Scanner lamp N model: LED Radiates lights onto a document for the CCD to scan the document image.K. No. MX-M503N EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 3 – 14 . HL_UW Heater lamp (for warm-up) Heats up supplementarily when warming-up. HL_US Heater lamp (sub) Heats the heat roller (sub). Name Type Function/Operation 1 Right paper exit gate Selects the paper path to transport paper to the duplex (ADU) section or to discharge paper to the right tray. U model: Xenon lamp HL_UM Heater lamp (main) Heats the heat roller (main). 2 ADU reverse gate Switches the transport route of paper to the duplex (ADU) section.

RDCFM Suction fan Stabilizes paper transport. No. PSFM1 Power cooling fan 1 Cools the power unit. POFM2 Paper exit cooling fan 2 Cools the fusing and the paper exit section. Name Function/Operation 1 Ozone filter Absorbs ozone generated in the image process section. OZFM Ozone fan Exhausts ozone. POFM3 Paper exit cooling fan 3 Cools the fusing and the paper exit section. Fans and filters POFM1 POFM2 RDCFM OZFM POFM3 1 LSUFM CPUFAM PSFM2 2 2 PSFM1 Signal name Name Function/Operation CPUFAM MFP PWB cooling fan Cools the MFP PWB. LSUFM LSU cooling fan Cools the LSU section. POFM1 Paper exit cooling fan 1 Cools the fusing and the paper exit section. 2 Toner filter Prevents dispersing of toner.L. MX-M503N EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 3 – 15 . PSFM2 Power cooling fan 2 Cools the power unit.

M. PWB N model U model 13 12 N model U model 14 14 15 15 9 9 13 12 27 27 11 8 10 1 2 22 23 21 26 7 16 5 4 19 20 18 28 17 6 24 25 29 3 MX-M503N EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 3 – 16 .

No. and controls the whole machine. 7 Scanner control PWB Controls the scanner and the operation panel section. 9 LED drive PWB (N model) / Inverter PWB (U model) Drives the scanner lamp. 11 Document detection light emitting PWB Drives the document size detection LED. 12 LCD INV PWB Generates the high voltage for the LCD back-light. 3 DC power PWB Generates a DC voltage. 22 LSU PWB Controls the LSU. 10 Document detection light collector PWB Outputs the document size detection signal. and the transfer voltage. 16 HL PWB Controls the heater lamp. MX-M503N EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 3 – 17 . 17 MFP PWB Controls data related to images. 20 PCU Flash ROM PWB The ROM PWB that control the PCU PWB. the developing bias voltage. 6 AC power PWB Controls the power source in the primary side. 4 Motor drive PWB Drives each motor in the paper transport section. 21 BD PWB Detects laser and outputs the synchronous signal. Name Function/Operation 1 RD I/F PWB Interfaces each sensor signal in the right door unit section. 14 MFP OPE PWB Outputs the key operation signal. 15 Power SW PWB Controls ON/OFF of the DC power source. 13 LVDS PWB Converts display signals into LCD display signals. 8 CCD PWB Scans document images. 18 Mother PWB Interfaces signals of the MFP PWB and another PWB. 5 HV PWB Generates the main charger voltage. 24 PROG1 ROM PWB Program ROM PWB for booting the printer controller 25 PROG2 ROM PWB MFP PWB program ROM PWB 26 SCN Flash ROM PWB Scanner control program ROM PWB 27 USB I/F PWB USB I/F 28 Scanner function expansion PWB (Option for N model) Controls compression and decompression of image data. 23 LD PWB Controls laser lighting. 2 Paper size detection PWB Detects the paper size in the paper feed tray. 29 WH PWB (Service kit: Dehumidifier heater) Controls the dehumidifier heater. 19 PCU PWB Controls the engine section.

N.3AH 250V DC power PWB 2 F202 Fuse T6.3AH 250V DC power PWB 3 F203 Fuse T6.15AH 250V (200V) DC power PWB 12 F103 Fuse T8AH 250V (100V) / T5AH 250V (200V) DC power PWB 13 F301 Fuse T5AH 250V (100V) / T3.15AH 250V (200V) DC power PWB 14 F1 Fuse T0.3AH 250V DC power PWB 6 F1 Fuse 15A 250V (100V) / T10AH 250V(200V) AC power PWB 7 F2 Fuse T10AH250V (200V only) AC power PWB 8 F3 Fuse T2AH 250V AC power PWB 9 F4 Fuse T2AH 250V (200V only) AC power PWB 10 F101 Fuse 12A 125V (100V) / T6.8A 250V LCD INV PWB 15 F1 Fuse 200mA 250V LCD INV PWB 16 F1 Fuse 1.25A 250V CL inverter PWB MX-M503N EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 3 – 18 . Fuses/Thermostats U model 16 N model 14 15 U model TS_UM TS_US 10 13 11 12 8 6 7 1 9 2 3 4 5 Signal name Name Specifications Section TS UM Thermostat Fusing roller overheat protection Fusing unit TS US Thermostat Fusing roller overheat protection Fusing unit NO Signal name Name Specifications Section 1 F201 Fuse T6.3AH 250V (200V) DC power PWB 11 F102 Fuse T1AH 250V (100V) / T3.3AH 250V DC power PWB 5 F205 Fuse T6.3AH 250V DC power PWB 4 F204 Fuse T6.

Rollers 34 35 33 32 36 37 24 25 27 26 39 38 11 10 28 29 1 3 2 20 22 23 21 31 30 5 19 17 18 4 6 15 16 8 14 40 7 41 12 13 9 MX-M503N EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 3 – 19 .O.

1 paper feed tray) Separates paper to prevent Double Feed. / Transports paper to the right paper exit tray. 8 Paper pickup roller (No. 31 Transport roller 12 (Drive) Transports paper from the transport roller 11 to the transport roller 8. Name Function/Operation 1 Paper feed roller (Manual paper feed tray) Feeds paper to the paper transport section. 10 Resist roller (Drive) Transports paper to the transfer section. 27 Transport roller 10 (Drive) Transports paper from the transport roller 13 to the transport roller 11. 26 Transport roller 10 (Idle) Applies a pressure to paper and the transport roller to give the transport power of the transport roller to the paper. 23 Transport roller 8 (Drive) Transports the paper to resist roller. 14 Transport roller 3 (Idle) Reduces friction between paper and the paper guide. 36 Paper exit roller 2 (Idle) Applies a pressure to paper and the paper exit roller to give the transport power of the paper exit roller to the paper. 19 Transport roller 6 (Idle) Reduces friction between paper and the paper guide. 2 Separation roller (Manual paper feed tray) Separates paper to prevent Double Feed. / Transport paper to the duplex (ADU) section. 1 paper feed tray) Feeds paper to the paper transport section. 25 Transport roller 9 (Drive) Transports paper from the fusing roller to the transport roller 1. 2 paper feed tray) Feeds paper to the paper transport section. 38 Fusing roller (Heating) Heat and press toner onto paper to fuse images. 9 Separation roller (No. 16 Transport roller 4 (Drive) Transports paper from the transport roller 1 and paper feed roller (No. 32 Transport roller 13 (Drive) Transports paper to the duplex (ADU) section. / Transports the paper from the manual paper feed tray to the transport roller 8. 39 Fusing roller (Pressing) Applies a pressure to the fusing roller (heating). 3. 4 Paper feed roller (No. 3 and No. 22 Transport roller 8 (Idle) Applies a pressure to paper and the transport roller to give the transport power of the transport roller to the paper. MX-M503N EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 3 – 20 . 6 Separation roller (No. 1 paper feed tray) Sends paper to the paper feed roller. 28 Transport roller 11 (Idle) Applies a pressure to paper and the transport roller to give the transport power of the transport roller to the paper. 13 Transport roller 1 (Drive) Transports paper from No. 41 Transport roller 14 (Idle) Applies a pressure to paper and the transport roller to give the transport power of the transport roller to the paper. 17 Transport roller 5 (Drive) Transports paper from the paper feed tray 1 to the transport roller 7. 2 paper feed tray) Separates paper to prevent Double Feed. 7 Paper feed roller (No. 37 Paper exit roller 2 (Drive) Discharges paper. 29 Transport roller 11 (Drive) Transports paper from the transport roller 10 to the transport roller 12. 3 Paper pickup roller (Manual paper feed tray) Sends paper to the paper feed roller. Controls the paper transport timing to adjust relative relations between images and paper. 15 Transport roller 4 (Idle) Applies a pressure to paper and the transport roller to give the transport power of the transport roller to the paper. 11 Resist roller (Idle) Applies a pressure to paper and the resist roller to give the transport power of the transport roller to the paper. 24 Transport roller 9 (Idle) Applies a pressure to paper and the transport roller to give the transport power of the transport roller to the paper. 34 Paper exit roller 1 (Idle) Applies a pressure to paper and the paper exit roller to give the transport power of the paper exit roller to the paper. 35 Paper exit roller 1 (Drive) Discharges paper. 40 Transport roller 14 (Drive) Transports paper from the paper feed tray 2 to the transport roller 4. / Transports paper to the paper exit roller 2.No. 2. 12 Transport roller 1 (Idle) Applies a pressure to paper and the transport roller to give the transport power of the transport roller to the paper. 4 paper feed tray to the transport roller 4. 2 paper feed tray) to the transport roller 7. 33 Transport roller 13 (Idle) Applies a pressure to paper and the transport roller to give the transport power of the transport roller to the paper. 20 Transport roller 7 (Idle) Applies a pressure to paper and the transport roller to give the transport power of the transport roller to the paper. 2 paper feed tray) Sends paper to the paper feed roller. 30 Transport roller 12 (Idle) Applies a pressure to paper and the transport roller to give the transport power of the transport roller to the paper. 21 Transport roller 7 (Drive) Transports paper from the paper feed tray 1. 18 Transport roller 5 (Idle) Applies a pressure to paper and the transport roller to give the transport power of the transport roller to the paper. and 4 to the transport roller 8. 5 Paper pickup roller (No.

Even in this case. void area adjustment (Printer mode) 50-5 ADJ 10 Copy image position. Perform the adjustment procedures in the ever. image loss. Adjustment item list Job No Adjustment item list Simulation ADJ 1 Adjust the developing unit 1A Adjust the developing doctor gap 1B Adjust the developing roller main pole position 1C Toner density control reference value setting 25-2 ADJ 2 Adjusting high voltage values 2A Adjust the main charger grid voltage 8-2 2B Adjust the developing bias voltage 8-1 2C Transfer current and voltage adjustment 8-6 2D Transfer separation bias voltage adjustment 8-17 ADJ 3 Print engine image skew. 10A Copy image position.[4] ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS MX-M503N Service Manual 1. the sequence from the smallest to the greatest Job number sequence of Job numbers from the smallest to the greatest. scan. image loss. and FAX 46-19 ADJ 15 Paper size detection adjustment 15A Manual paper feed tray paper width sensor adjustment 40-2 15B DSPF/RSPF paper feed tray paper width sensor adjustment 53-6 ADJ 16 Document size detection 16A Document size sensor detection point adjustment 41-1 adjustment (Document table mode) 16B Adjust the sensitivity of the original size sensor 41-2 MX-M503N ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 4 – 1 . the adjustment would form only the necessary adjustments according to the need. General Each adjustment item in the adjustment item list is associated with Unnecessary adjustments can be omitted. not complete normally or trouble may occur. 2. and the adjustment) ADJ 13 Printer quality adjustment (Printer 13A Manual printer density and gradation adjustment 67-25 density and gradation adjustment) ADJ 14 Automatic setting of exposure mode operating conditions in copy. If the above precaution should be neglected. and auto printer density and gradation 46-24 (Auto printer density and gradation adjustment adjustment) 12B Manual copy density and gradation adjustment 46-16 12C Copy density in each copy mode (Overall density adjustment) 46-2 (Normally unnecessary to adjust) 12D Density and gradation adjustment in each copy mode (Normally not required) 46-10 12E Document background density reproducibility adjustment in the auto copy mode 46-32 (Normally unnecessary to adjust) 12F Color document reproducibility adjustment in the copy mode 46-37 (Normally unnecessary to adjust) (N model only) 12G Copy density and gradation adjustment (DSPF mode) (Individual adjustment of the low 46-9 density area and the high density area) (In the case of DSPF) 12H Copy density and gradation adjustment (RSPF mode) (Individual adjustment of the low 46-9 density area and the high density area) (In the case of RSPF) 12I Automatic copy and printer density and gradation adjustment by the user (Setting of ENABLE/DISABLE of the automatic copy density and gradation adjustment. how- a specific Job number. must be observed. However. there is no need to perform all the adjustment items. image 3A Print engine image skew adjustment (LSU parallelism adjustment) 64-2 position. image magnification ratio. void area adjustment (Document table mode) 50-1 and void area adjustment 10B Document scan position adjustment 53-8 (Manual adjustment) (DSPF/RSPF mode scanner scan position adjustment) 10C Copy mode image loss adjustment (DSPF/RSPF mode) 50-6 ADJ 11 CCD calibration 11A CCD gamma adjustment (CCD calibration) (Document table mode) 63-3/63-5 11B CIS gamma adjustment (CIS calibration) (DSPF mode) (DSPF-installed machine only) 63-3 11C Shading adjustment (Calibration) (DSPF mode) (DSPF-installed machine only) 63-2 ADJ 12 Copy quality adjustment 12A Auto copy density and gradation adjustment. Per. 3B Print engine image magnification ratio adjustment (Main scanning direction) 50-10 void area adjustments 3C Print engine print area (void area) adjustment 50-10/50-1 (Manual adjustments) 3D Print engine image off-center adjustment 50-10 ADJ 4 Scan image distortion adjustment 4A Scanner (reading) unit parallelism adjustment (OC mode) 4B Scan image sub scanning direction distortion adjustment 4C Scan image main scanning direction distortion adjustment 4D Scan image distortion adjustment (Whole scanner unit) ADJ 5 Scanner image skew adjustment 5A DSPF/RSPF parallelism adjustment (DSPF/RSPF mode) 5B DSPF/RSPF skew adjustment (Front surface mode) 64-2 5C DSPF skew adjustment (Back surface mode) 64-2 ADJ 6 Scan image focus adjustment 6A Image focus adjustment (Document table mode/DSPF/RSPF front surface mode) 48-1 6B Image focus adjustment (DSPF back surface mode) ADJ 7 Scan image magnification ratio 7A Main scanning direction image magnification ratio adjustment (Document table mode) 48-1 adjustment (Manual adjustment) 7B Sub scanning direction image magnification ratio adjustment (Document table mode) 48-1/48-5 7C Main scanning direction image magnification ratio adjustment (DSPF/RSPF mode) 48-1 7D Sub scanning direction image magnification ratio adjustment (DSPF/RSPF mode) 48-1 ADJ 8 Scan image off-center adjustment 8A Scan image off-center adjustment (Document table mode) 50-12 (Manual adjustment) 8B Scan image off-center adjustment (DSPF/RSPF mode) 50-12/50-6 ADJ 9 Print lead edge image position.

2) Loosen the developing doctor fixing screw. * When inserting a thickness gauge. developing doctor and the developing roller. Details of adjustment 3) Insert a thickness gauge of 0. or foreign materials on the roller during the work. and place the develop- ing unit on a flat surface. • The advisable point of measurement is the MIN point of the MG roller oscillation.40  0. 4) Push the developing doctor in the arrow direction. grease. or foreign materials on the roller during the work.02mm. * When the print image density is low. 1) Remove the developing unit from the main unit. image magnification (Document table mode) ratio adjustment 18B Image off-center automatic adjustment (Each paper feed tray) 50-28 (Automatic adjustment) 18C Copy lead edge image reference position adjustment. oil. NOTE: Be careful not to put fingerprints. and remove 20mm 20mm the developing unit upper cover. Job No Adjustment item list Simulation ADJ 17 Touch panel coordinate setting 65-1 ADJ 18 Image lead edge position. image 18A Print image main scanning direction image magnification ratio automatic adjustment 50-28 off-center. • Do not insert the gauge diagonally. NOTE: Be careful not to put fingerprints. image off-center. * The toner is excessively dispersed. * When there is unevenness in the print image density. image lead edge position. * When there is a blur on the print image. NOTE: Do not hold the adjacent section of the MG roller strongly. from the both sides of the developing doctor are in the range of * When the print image density is low. MX-M503N ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 4 – 2 .40mm * The developing unit has been disassembled.40mm in between 20mm . 0. be careful not to scratch the * When there is unevenness in the print image density. sub scanning direction image 50-28 magnification ratio automatic adjustment (DSPF/RSPF mode) ADJ 19 Fusing paper guide position adjustment 3. * When there is a blur on the print image. * The toner is excessively dispersed. 1) Remove the developing doctor cover. and tighten 1-A Adjust the developing doctor gap the fixing screw of the developing doctor.) This adjustment is needed in the following situations: 5) Check that the doctor gaps at two positions in 20mm . 2) Attach a piece of string to a sewing needle or pin. (Perform the similar procedure for the front frame and the rear frame. oil. 1-B Adjust the developing roller main pole position This adjustment is needed in the following situations: * The developing unit has been disassembled. NOTE: All DV material must be removed before begining step 2. grease. 40mm 40mm Note for use of a thickness gauge NOTE: All DV material must be removed before beginning step 2. • The gauge must pass freely.40mm ADJ 1 Adjust the developing unit from the edge of the developing doctor. sub scanning 50-28 direction image magnification ratio automatic adjustment (Document table mode) 18D Copy image off-center.

) NOTE: Be sure to execute this adjustment only when developer is replaced.5mm .08/$7.08/$7.(&87(  0.  2 㨪 3mm ǂǂǂ6.3) Hold the thread and bring the needle near the developing roller. . Never execute it in the other cases. fix the developing roller main pole adjust- ment plate with the fixing screw.3mm from the developing roller * When developer is replaced.08/$7. enter SIM 25-2. (Do not use a paper clip because too heavy. oping roller main pole position in the following procedures. If the distance is not within the above range.(&87(  Abnormal end  ǂǂǂ6.  ǂǂǂ6. (. screw of the developing roller main pole adjustment plate.0±0. (. (. 7&9B.&'(9(/23(5$'-8670(17 7&'B.6) until the developing roller main pole position comes to the specified range. move the adjustment plate in the arrow direction to adjust. 12. $7'(9(92B. adjust the devel. pull out the toner cartridge in advance.(&87(  Adjustment completed  ǂǂǂ6. 1) With the front cabinet open.) setting 4) Mark the developing roller surface on the extension line of the This adjustment is needed in the following situations: needle with the needle at 2 .21ǂǂ12 7(67 &/26( $8720$7. (Never touch the needle tip with the developing roller. loosen the fixing $7'(9($'-B.&'(9(/23(5$'-8670(17 7&'B. .5mm.21ǂǂ12 7(67 &/26( $8720$7. 5) Measure the distance between the marking position and the doctor tip of the developing unit. surface.(&87(  MX-M503N ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 4 – 3 . and check that it is 12. 7) After completion of the adjustment of the developing roller main pole position.08/$7.21ǂǂ12 7(67 &/26( $8720$7. (. When setting the toner density control reference value. and $7'(9(92B. It will not 1-C Toner density control reference value provide a correct position.21ǂǂ12 7(67 &/26( $8720$7.(((/ Repeat procedures 3) .&'(9(/23(5$'-8670(17 $7'(9($'-B.(((/ 7&9B.0  .&'(9(/23(5$'-8670(17 6) Remove the developing unit front cover. 2) Close the front cabinet and press [EXECUTE] button.

If possible. oping roller rotates. change the adjustment value and adjust. reference value.1*$1'287387 $˖ ˖*%B. When the reference toner density control adjustment operation is completed.'6(77. erence toner density control value is not completed normally. or sensor control voltage level over 197 EE-EU EU abnormality Sensor output level over 154. or sensor control voltage level over 105 0. The devel.08/$7. do not execute SIM25. or after 30 sec. and the output value is displayed.''/( /2: (.26V 0 . 5) Check the monitor voltage with the digital multi-meter. This makes known about whether the adjustment operation is completed or not.21ǂǂ12 7(67 &/26( 5) When [EXECUTE] key is pressed. [EE-EL] or [EE-EC] is displayed. the OPC drum 1 and the developing roller may be adversely affected.  ǂǂǂ6. NOTE: 10-key EXECUTE If the operation is interrupted within 3 minutes. the adjustment EXECUTE result is not reflected. ADJ 2 Adjusting high voltage values 2-A Adjust the main charger grid voltage This adjustment is needed in the following situations: * When the high voltage PWB is replaced.21ǂǂ12 play.''/( /2: (. If the monitor voltage is not in the range of the specified val- ues. 7(67 &/26( 0+9*5. [EXECUTE] key returns to normal from highlight.1*$1'287387 If [EE-EU]. the opera- tion is stopped and [EXECUTE] key returns to the normal dis. 4) Press [EXECUTE] key.3) After completion of the adjustment of the toner density control 2) Enter the SIM 8-2 mode.  4) Close the front cabinet. and the aver- age value of the toner density sensor detection level is set (saved) as the reference toner density control value. ˷̚˹ The above operation is executed for 3 minutes. insert the toner cartridge. * The PCU PWB has been replaced.22  0.(&87( 2. • High voltage PWB • PCU PWB • MC unit • OPC drum unit • High voltage circuit electrode MX-M503N ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 4 – 4 . * U2 trouble has occurred. NOTE: When not replacing the developer. voltage PWB and the GND. use a old developer unit and OPC drum for this adjustment. and the toner density sensor detects toner $˖  density. 0. ˷̚˹ Error display Content Details of content EE-EL EL abnormality Sensor output level less than 67. ǂǂǂ6. $˖  $˖ ˖*%B. 1) Remove the rear cover of the machine.(&87( 2.08/$7. 2 The main charger grid voltage is outputted for 30sec.850 650 bias set value If the specified value voltage is not obtained even though the adjustment value is changed. 0+9*5.'6(77. the following parts may be defective. * The EEPROM of the PCU PWB has been replaced. it is highlighted. or sensor control voltage level less than 49 EE-EC EC abnormality Sensor output level less than 95. When [EXECUTE] key is pressed during rotation. 3) Apply a digital multi-meter between the check pin 1 of the high 2. If this procedure is executed for a long time. setting of the ref. Use this procedure as short as possible. Adjustment value Setting Default Item/Display Content (Monitor voltage) range value A GB_K K charging/grid 31.

21ǂǂ12 7(67 &/26( '96(77. the following parts  ˷̚˹ may be defective. This adjustment is needed in the following situations: * When the high voltage PWB is replaced.1*$1'287387 $˖ ˖7&3/$.1%:63. ǂǂǂ6. 10-key EXECUTE EXECUTE or after 30 sec.08/$7.1*$1'287387  $˖ ˖'9%B. 5) Check the monitor voltage with the digital multi-meter.1%:'3. MX-M503N ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 4 – 5 .1*352&21 . '˖ ˖7&+($9<%:'3. If the specified value voltage is not obtained even $˖ ˖'9%B.84  0. ˷̚˹ $˖  %˖ ˖7&3/$. bias set value If the monitor voltage is not in the range of the specified values  ǂǂǂ6. * The EEPROM of the PCU PWB has been replaced. 10-key EXECUTE * U2 trouble has occurred.  1) Enter the SIM 8-6 mode. 3) Apply a digital multi-meter between the check pin 3 of the high 2-B Adjust the developing bias voltage voltage PWB and the GND.1*$1'287387 $˖ ˖7&3/$.1*352&21 . • High voltage PWB • PCU PWB • Developing unit • High voltage circuit electrode 2-C Transfer current and voltage adjustment 0.  ǂǂǂ6.1* +˖ ˖7&&/($1. Adjustment value Setting Default Item/Display Content (Monitor voltage) range value A DVB_K K developing 0. The main charger voltage is outputted for 30sec. ǂǂǂ6. change the adjustment value and '96(77.˖ ˖7&$'62537.02V 0 . * The EEPROM of the PCU PWB has been replaced.21 (.08/$7.21 0.˖ ˖7&$'62537.21ǂǂ12 7(67 &/26( $˖  7+96(77. ˷̚˹ &˖ ˖7&+($9<%:63.(&87( 2.(&87( 2. (. * U2 trouble has occurred.1*$1'287387 adjust. (˖ ˖7&2+3%: )˖ ˖7&(19(/23(%: *˖ ˖7&&/($1. ˷̚˹ &˖ ˖7&+($9<%:63.(&87( 2.''/( /2: (. * The PCU PWB has been replaced.08/$7.1%:'3.21ǂǂ12 7(67 &/26( 7+96(77.700 496 2) Enter the SIM 8-1 mode.1* +˖ ˖7&&/($1.21ǂǂ12 7(67 &/26( shown in the table above.''/( /2: (. '˖ ˖7&+($9<%:'3. $˖  %˖ ˖7&3/$.(&87( 2. This adjustment is needed in the following situations: * When the high voltage PWB is replaced.08/$7. 2 1 4) Press [EXECUTE] key. (˖ ˖7&2+3%: )˖ ˖7&(19(/23(%: *˖ ˖7&&/($1. or after 30 sec. $˖ though the adjustment value is changed. EXECUTE * The PCU PWB has been replaced. 1) Remove the rear cover of the machine.1%:63.

7(67 7+9$&6(77. 3-A Print engine image skew adjustment 1) Enter the SIM 8-17 mode. By setting the default value.255 161 161 H TC CLEANING PROCON bias voltage Cleaning in the process control mode 0 .255 113 129 B TC PLAIN BW DPX White Back surface 0 .2) Select a mode to be adjusted with the scroll key.255 113 129 D TC HEAVY BW DPX Back surface 0 . (LSU parallelism adjustment) This adjustment is needed in the following situations:  ǂǂǂ6. image adjustment This adjustment is needed in the following situations: position. void area adjustments * U2 trouble has occurred. * The EEPROM of the PCU PWB has been replaced. (Manual adjustments) * The PCU PWB has been replaced. the transfer voltage is outputted. When [EXECUTE] key is pressed. image magnification * When the high voltage PWB is replaced. $˖ ˖3/9 )$&(.1*$1'287387 * When the LSU unit is removed from the main unit.255 113 129 F TC ENVELOPE BW Envelope mode 0 .255 161 161 I TC ADSORPTION Transfer current between paper 0 .255 113 129 2-D Transfer separation bias voltage ADJ 3 Print engine image skew. ratio.255 113 129 E TC OHP BW OHP mode 0 . the specified voltage is outputted.255 113 129 C TC HEAVY BW SPX Heavy paper mode Front surface 0 . Setting Default value Item/Display Content range 28/36 PPM model 45/50 PPM model A TC PLAIN BW SPX Transfer current Black/ Standard paper mode Front surface 0 . 3) Enter an adjustment value (specified value) and press [OK] key.08/$7.21ǂǂ12 &/26( * When the LSU unit is replaced.255 113 129 G TC CLEANING Transfer cleaning Cleaning in the normal operation mode 0 .

$˖  %˖ ˖3/9 %$&.

08/$7.21ǂǂ12 7(67 &/26( 6(/)35. 1) Enter the SIM 64-2 mode. ˷̚˹  ǂǂǂ6.17 %:.

6(59.&( $˖ ˖35.173$77(51 ̚̚̚.

)$. $˖  %˖ ˖'27 '27˚˙.

)$. ˷̚˹ &˖ ˖'27 '27˚˙.

('āā.7< ).. '˖ ˖'(16.)$.

(˖ ˖08/7.32685( ̚.)$̚̚.ǂ&2817 )˖ ˖(.

(&87( 2. (. 7+9$&6(77.12 .1*$1'287387 $˖ ˖3/9 )$&(.7+(5 *˖ ˖3$3(5&6 (.  ǂǂǂ6. +˖ ˖'83/(.˖ ˖3$3(5ǂ7<3(3/$.67$1'$5''.08/$7.(&87( 2.21ǂǂ12 7(67 &/26( 2) Set the set items to the values shown below.1 10-key EXECUTE EXECUTE or after 30 sec.

Item Setting value $˖  %˖ ˖3/9 %$&.

There are following two methods of checking the image for any By setting the default value. Item/Display Content range value Method 2: A PLV (FACE) Separation bias output 0 . 5) Check the printed image for any skew.5" paper for judgment of good or no good. (.255 170 of the rectangle print pattern with the right angle of A3 or 11" x (Back surface) 8.(&87( 2.255 170 (Front surface) Compare the right angle of vertical side and the horizontal side B PLV (BACK) Separation bias output 0 . Measure the right angle level by using the printed cross pat- 3) Enter an adjustment value (specified value) and press [OK] tern. 4) Press [EXECUTE] key. key. the specified voltage is outputted. skew (right angle). The check pattern is printed out. the transfer separation bias Method 1: voltage is outputted. Measure the maximum length of the diagonal lines of the rect- angle print pattern. Check the difference in the length of the Setting Default diagonal lines for judgment of good or no good. A 1 ˷̚˹ B 1 C 254 D 255 3) Select the paper feed tray with A3 (11" x 17") paper in it by changing the value of G. When [EXECUTE] key is pressed. MX-M503N ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 4 – 6 . 2) Select a mode to be adjusted with the scroll key.

(Repeat procedures 4). tighten the LSU unit fixing screws (at the left and at the center).8mm If the difference between C and D is in the above range. C – D =  0. to shift the LSU upward. (Method 1) a) Measure the length of the diagonal lines of the rectangle print pattern. the LSU is shifted downward.5mm or less. Be sure to check the right angle of paper to be used in advance. execute the following procedures. MX-M503N ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 4 – 7 . b) Calculate the difference between the measured lengths C and D of the diagonal lines. 9) Execute procedures 4) and 5). If the image is skewed in the arrow direction of B. Loosen the fixing screw which is attached to the adjustment hole position on the upper side. Loosen the LSU fixing screw (left). the LSU is 0. the right angle of paper to be used may not be exact. 7) and 8) until a satisfactory result is obtained. If the above distance is 0. 5). 8) Move the LSU front frame side up and down to adjust. Direction A Direction B (When Method 2 is used to check the image for any skew (right angle) in procedure 5 in advance) If the image is skewed in the arrow direction of A. c) Check to insure that the difference between C and D is in the following range. When C < D (the lengths of the diagonal lines). remove the fixing screw and attach it to the hole on the upper side.5mm or less shifted upward.) 10) When the adjustment result reaches a satisfactory level. In the case of Method 2. (Method 2) a) Fit the side of A3 or 11" x 17" paper to the long side of the rectangle print pattern. to shift the LSU downward. there is no need to adjust. If not. b) Measure the shift distance between vertical side of paper and side of the rectangle print pattern. there is no need to adjust. 2 A 4 1 3 Diagonal line C Diagonal line D 7) When the LSU unit fixing screw is attached to the hole position on the lower side. (When Method 1 is used to check the image for any skew Comparison line (right angle) in procedure 5 in advance) When C > D (the lengths of the diagonal lines).(NOTE) 6) Remove the left cover and the paper exit tray cabinet.

the BK image magnification * When the LSU (writing) unit is replaced. '˖ ˖0$. -˖ ˖68%&6 .0$* $˖  %˖ ˖0$.˖ ˖68%0)7 -˖ ˖68%&6 $˖ ˖%. do the following steps. * The EEPROM of the PCU PWB has been replaced.1&6 *˖ ˖0$.10)7 engine image magnification ratio adjustment (Main scanning direc- ˷̚˹ &˖ ˖0$.1&6 * When the paper tray section is disassembled.1$'8 3) Select the paper feed tray set in procedure 2) with the scroll . End of print * The PCU PWB has been replaced.  %˖ ˖0$.1&6 * When a paper tray is replaced.1mm.6) until a satisfactory result is obtained. be sure to execute ADJ 3B print 3$3(5&(17(52))6(76(783 $˖ ˖%.1&6 * When the manual feed tray is replaced. value is decreased.˖ ˖68%&6  %˖ ˖0$. * When the large capacity paper feed tray section is disassembled. the dimension is changed adjustment (Main scanning direction) by 0. 3-B Print engine image magnification ratio When the set value is changed by 1. When the set * U2 trouble has occurred. * The EEPROM of the PCU PWB has been replaced.5mm.08/$7. ratio in the main scanning direction is increased. . -˖ ˖68%&6 .08/$7. 3-C Print engine print area (void area)  adjustment ǂǂǂ6. The adjustment pattern is printed. adjustment target paper feed tray.1&6 (.0$* $˖ .1$'8 ǂǂǂ6. *˖ ˖0$. (.1&6 240 0. MX-M503N ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 4 – 8 . (.5") paper in the paper feed tray. * When the registration roller section is disassembled.21ǂǂ12 7(67 &/26( 3$3(5&(17(52))6(76(783 This adjustment is needed in the following situations: $˖ ˖%. and select the set item J with the scroll key.(&87( 2.˖ ˖68%0)7 key. /˖ ˖68%/&& The check pattern is printed out.0$* $˖  %˖ ˖0$. Repeat procedures 2) . EXECUTE EXECUTE * U2 trouble has occurred.˖ ˖68%0)7 * When the duplex section is disassembled.(&87( (˖ ˖0$.1&6 (˖ ˖0$. main scanning direction is decreased.1&6 *˖ ˖0$.0$* $˖ * When the LSU is replaced or removed.1&6 tion) in advance. '˖ ˖0$.1$'8 * When the manual feed tray is disassembled.10)7 ˷̚˹ &˖ ˖0$. the BK image magnification ratio in the * The PCU PWB has been replaced. 6) Change the set value of set item A.  7(67 ǂǂǂ6. )˖ ˖0$.1&6 2) Set A4 (11" x 8. Enter the value corresponding to the If the above requirement is not met.(&87( 2.1&6 (˖ ˖0$.5mm )˖ ˖0$.1/&& +˖ ˖0$.1&6 1) Enter the SIM 50-10 mode.1/&& +˖ ˖0$.1&6 2.˖ ˖68%&6 /˖ ˖68%/&& (.21ǂǂ12 &/26( 3$3(5&(17(52))6(76(783 $˖ ˖%. *˖ ˖0$.˖ ˖68%&6 * When the duplex section is installed or replaced. /˖ ˖68%/&& * When the large capacity paper feed tray is installed or replaced.08/$7.10)7 ˷̚˹ &˖ ˖0$.10)7 /˖ ˖68%/&& ˷̚˹ &˖ ˖0$.1&6 )˖ ˖0$. 2) Set A4 (11" x 8. This adjustment is needed in the following situations: When the set value is increased.˖ ˖68%&6 4) Press [EXECUTE] key. 3) Press [EXECUTE] key.1&6 '˖ ˖0$.1&6 (˖ ˖0$.21ǂǂ12 7(67 &/26( 3$3(5&(17(52))6(76(783 . 5) Check that the inside dimension of the printed half tone is 240  0. 1) Enter the SIM 50-10 mode.5") paper to all the trays. EXECUTE EXECUTE End of print  7(67 ǂǂǂ6. '˖ ˖0$. )˖ ˖0$.1/&&  +˖ ˖0$.08/$7.1$'8 .1/&& +˖ ˖0$.21ǂǂ12 &/26( (Note) Before executing this adjustment.˖ ˖68%0)7 -˖ ˖68%&6 .(&87( 2.

'( T DENB-ADU ADU correction value 1 .0mm Y H setting SIDE Side image loss area 0 . )˖ ˖55&%$'8 That is. D.08/$7.99 50 cation SPEED_OC magnification ratio If the above condition is not satisfied. -˖ ˖'(1% After execution of the above.99 50 G Image LEAD Lead edge image 0 . Repeat the above procedures until a satisfactory result is obtained.0 . correction (Note) Feed paper from all the paper feed trays to confirm. ˷̚˹ &˖ ˖55&%&6 '˖ ˖55&%/&& The adjustment item J (DENB) have a effect on the paper (˖ ˖55&%0)7 of all paper feed tray.5. the adjustment value and press [OK] key.99 30 adjust.˖ ˖)52175($5 /˖ ˖2))6(7B2& that the void area is within the specified range. MX-M503N ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 4 – 9 . T *˖ ˖/($' +˖ ˖6. or if it is set to a desired ratio adjustment (CCD) condition.99 20 REAR area adjustment L Off-center OFFSET_ OC document off.99 30 adjustment K FRONT/ FRONT/REAR void 1 . Though the lead edge void area adjustment value is proper. (OC) B ment RRCB-CS12 Resist Standard 1 .˖ ˖'(1$ each paper tray. J. When the adjustment value is decreased.99 50 D RRCB-LCC adjust.0 . Content Standard adjustment value Setting Default Item/Display Content X Lead edge void area 3. OK NOTE: The adjustment value and the actual void area are related as follows: Adjustment value/10 = Actual void area  ǂǂǂ6. SCAN_ SCAN sub scanning 1 .99 50 E RRCB-MFT ment Manual 1 .99 50 /($'('*($'-8670(179$/8( value value $˖ ˖55&$ $˖  %˖ ˖55&%&6 Q DENB-CS3 Tray 3 correction 1 . When the adjustment value is changed by 1.99 20 2. scanning correction value O direction DENB-CS1 Tray 1 correction 1 . if the lead edge void area is not within the specified range. F) of SIM 50-1.08/$7.0 1. O.21ǂǂ12 7(67 &/26( P correction DENB-CS2 Tray 2 correction 1 .1mm.4) Check the adjustment pattern to confirm that the items below 6) Select the adjustment item I. the void area is 10-key changed by 0. N Sub DENB-MFT Manual feed 1 . OC center adjustment Z2 ment 2.99 30 X loss area loss area setting 3.99 50 paper feed F RRCB-ADU ADU 1 . P. the void area is .21ǂǂ12 7(67 &/26( NOTE: When the amount of the rear edge void is different between /($'('*($'-8670(179$/8( $˖ ˖55&$ each paper feed tray. execute the simulation 50-1.0  1. S.99 50 adjust. R.99 50 Z1/Z2 FRONT/REAR void area 2. change the adjustment value of item $˖  %˖ ˖55&%&6 N.99 50  print area value ǂǂǂ6.0mm A Lead RRCA Document lead edge 0 .0mm range value Y Rear edge void area 2. R. adjustment J ment DENB Rear edge void area 1 . P. S. adjustment value of item N. 1 . C.99 50 +˖ ˖6. LCC 1 .0mm value adjustment I Void area DENA Lead edge void area 1 .99 66 .99 50 5) Enter the SIM 50-1 mode. perform procedures 1) . 2. Q. and enter are in the range of the standard values.˖ ˖'(1$ -˖ ˖'(1% When the adjustment value is increased. E.0 2.0mm M Magnifi. O. Q.˖ ˖)52175($5 increased.0 2. change the adjustment value of RRCB-XXX (item B.99 50 ˷̚˹ &˖ ˖55&%&6 value '˖ ˖55&%/&& R DENB-CS4 Tray 4 correction 1 .5.0  2. T (DENB-XXX) in SIM50-1 and adjust.0mm C RRCB-CS34 timing Desk 1 .99 50 (˖ ˖55&%0)7 value )˖ ˖55&%$'8 *˖ ˖/($' S DENB-LCC LCC correction value 1 .'( (DENB-XXX) fine adjusts to adjustment item J (DENB) for . the void /˖ ˖2))6(7B2& area is decreased. K with the scroll key. 2.0mm edge reference position adjust.4) to check .99 50 Z1 value motor ON Tray 2.

99 50 Before execution of this adjustment.0mm  7(67 ǂǂǂ6.˖ ˖68%&6 /˖ ˖68%/&& (. EXECUTE End of print RV 2.10)7 ˷̚˹ &˖ ˖0$. MX-M503N ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 4 – 10 . value (Tray 3) * When a paper tray is replaced.99 50 * U2 trouble has occurred.1&6 cedure 2).140 100 RV: REAR VOID AREA magnification ratio BK B MAIN-MFT Print off center adjustment 1 . this adjustment cannot be * When the registration roller section is disassembled. +˖ ˖0$. If not.99 50 item.0mm value (Tray 1) FV = 2. insure that the adjustment items A .H) Setting Default FV Item/Display Content 2. F MAIN-CS4 Print off center adjustment 1 .08/$7.1&6 3) Set A4 (11" x 8. H MAIN-ADU Print off center adjustment 1 .0mm range value A BK-MAG Main scan print 60 .99 50 FV: FRONT VOID AREA value (Manual paper feed) RV + FV  4.0  2.99 50 value (Tray 2) If the above requirement is not met.99 50 * When the LSU is replaced or removed. CS2 Tray 2 3 CS3 Tray 3 4  CS4 Tray 4 5 ǂǂǂ6.99 50 * When ADJ 3B Print engine image magnification ratio adjustment value (LCC) (Main scanning direction) is performed. adjustment tray (Note) K SUB-CS34 DESK 1 .999 1 * Check that the ADJ 3B Print engine image magnification ratio O PAPER MFT Tray selection Manual 1-6 1 2 adjustment (Main scanning direction) has been properly paper feed (CS1) adjusted.1/&& +˖ ˖0$.0$* $˖  %˖ ˖0$. Measure the dimension of the void area in the front and the rear frame direction of the adjustment pattern.1$'8 . (Items B .1&6 '˖ ˖0$.99 50 L SUB-LCC LCC 1 .0$* P DUPLEX YES Duplex print Yes 0-1 0 1 (NO)  %˖ ˖0$. J SUB-CS12 Timing Standard 1 .(&87( 2.1&6 *˖ ˖0$.1&6 '˖ ˖0$.99 50 * When the manual feed tray is replaced. properly adjusted.0mm C MAIN-CS1 Print off center adjustment 1 . and check that EXECUTE all the following conditions are satisfied.0mm D MAIN-CS2 Print off center adjustment 1 . check to insure the following M SUB-ADU ADU 1 .0mm 2.G have been * When the large capacity paper feed tray is installed or replaced.˖ ˖68%0)7 -˖ ˖68%&6 .0mm 2. made properly. (. value (ADU) NOTE: * When the manual feed tray is disassembled.1$'8 .21ǂǂ12 &/26( 3$3(5&(17(52))6(76(783 $˖ ˖%.99 50 RV = 2. -˖ ˖68%&6 5) Check that the adjustment pattern image is printed in the cor- .1&6 )˖ ˖0$. adjustment check to * When the duplex section is installed or replaced. * When the large capacity paper feed tray section is disassembled. do the following steps.˖ ˖68%0)7 The adjustment pattern is printed.08/$7.˖ ˖68%&6 /˖ ˖68%/&& rect position.99 50 value (Tray 4) * When the paper tray section is disassembled.99 50 * The EEPROM of the PCU PWB has been replaced. I SUB-MFT Registration Manual 1 .0  2. motor ON paper feed * The PCU PWB has been replaced.(&87( 2. Setting Default 3-D Print engine image off-center adjustment Item/Display Content range value This adjustment is needed in the following situations: E MAIN-CS3 Print off center adjustment 1 . CS1 Tray 1 2 1) Enter SIM 50-10 mode.5") paper in the paper feed tray selected in pro- (˖ ˖0$. 2) Use the scroll key to select a paper feed tray which is to be adjusted.21ǂǂ12 7(67 &/26( 3$3(5&(17(52))6(76(783 LCC LCC 6 $˖ $˖ ˖%.1&6 (˖ ˖0$. N MULTI COUNT Number of print 1 .10)7 NO selection No 1 ˷̚˹ &˖ ˖0$.1/&& 4) Press [EXECUTE] key.1&6 )˖ ˖0$. Before execution of this * When the duplex section is disassembled. *˖ ˖0$. G MAIN-LCC Print off center adjustment 1 .

N model 1) Remove the LED lamp unit. remove the document table glass. the shift distance is changed by about 0. the adjustment pattern is printed. ADJ 4 Scan image distortion adjustment (OC mode) This adjustment is needed in the following situations: If this requirement is not met. the adjustment pat- tern is shifted to the front frame side. MX-M503N ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 4 – 11 . Repeat procedures 3) . When [EXECUTE] key is pressed. Repeat the adjustment procedures from 4). 3) Loosen the fixing screw of the pulley angle on the front frame * When the copy image is distorted.6) Change the adjustment value. perform the following procedure. 4-A Scanner (reading) unit parallelism adjustment Before execution of this adjustment.) at the center section of the lift plate of the paper feed tray.1mm. When the adjustment value is increased. In case a satisfactory result cannot be obtained by repeating the above procedures. do the following steps. When it is decreased.6) until the conditions of procedure 5) are satisfied. * When the scanner (reading) section is disassembled. 2) Turn the scanner drive pulley manually and shift the scanner unit B to bring it into contact with the stopper. When the scanner unit B is in contact with the two stoppers on the front and the rear frames simultaneously. Release the scanner unit A from the drive wire. the parallelism is proper. and change the gear unit position in the front/rear frame direc- tion. the adjustment pattern is shifted to the rear frame side. and then loosen the screws which are fixing the scanner unit A and the drive wire. When the set value is changed by 1. 4) Adjust the position of the pulley angle on the front frame side of the scanner unit B so that it is in contact with two stoppers on the front and the rear frames simultaneously. 7) Loosen the paper feed tray off-center adjustment screws (2 pcs. Enter the adjustment value and press the [OK] key or the [EXECUTE] key. side of the scanner unit B.

turn the scanner unit drive pulley manually and adjust so that the scanner unit B is in contact with both stoppers on the front frame and the rear frame simultaneously. Loosen the fixing screw of the scanner unit drive pulley which is not in contact. (Change the relative position of the scanner unit drive pulley and the drive shaft. the parallelism is proper. and fix the scanner unit A with the fixing screw. and remove the scanner unit A from the drive wire. 6) With the scanner unit B in contact with both stoppers.5) Fix the pulley angle on the front frame side of the scanner unit U model B. perform the following procedures. 3) Loosen the fixing screw of the pulley angle on the front frame side of the scanner unit B. When the scanner unit B is in contact with the two stoppers on the front and the rear frames simultaneously. wire. dures. If this requirement is not met. 2) Turn the scanner drive pulley manually and shift the scanner unit B to bring it into contact with the stopper. 4) Adjust the position of the pulley angle on the front frame side of the scanner unit B so that it is in contact with two stoppers on the front and the rear frames simultaneously. MX-M503N ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 4 – 12 . do the following steps.) Fix the scanner unit drive pulley fixing screw. Without moving the scanner unit drive shaft. fit the edge of the scanner unit A with the right edge of the frame. 1) Loosen the fixing screws of the scanner unit A and the drive If a satisfactory result is not obtained from the above proce.

and fix the scanner unit A with the fixing screw. (Change the relative position of the scanner unit drive pulley and the drive shaft.5) Fix the pulley angle on the front frame side of the scanner unit B. perform the following procedures. Loosen the fixing screw of the scanner unit drive pulley which (Draw a rectangular with four right angles. make a copy on A3 (11" x 17") paper. (Either one on the front frame or on the rear frame will do. 4) Loosen either one of the fixing screws of the scanner unit drive pulley. (Shift the test chart edge 30mm from the reference position as shown below.) is not in contact.) Fix the scanner L L unit drive pulley fixing screw. L = 10mm L 2) Set the test chart prepared in the procedure 1) on the docu- ment table. 3) Check for distortion in the sub scanning direction.) With the document cover open.) MX-M503N ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 4 – 13 . distortion adjustment dures. L Without moving the scanner unit drive shaft. fit the edge of the scanner unit A with the right edge of the frame. there is no distortion. 4-B Scan image sub scanning direction If a satisfactory result is not obtained from the above proce. If La = Lb. 1) Make a test chart on A3 (11" x 17") paper as shown below. turn the scanner unit drive pulley manually and adjust so that the scanner unit B is in contact with both stoppers on the front frame and the rear frame simultaneously. La Lb If there is any distortion in the sub scanning direction. perform the following procedures. 6) With the scanner unit B in contact with both stoppers.

Repeat the procedures 2) . go to the procedure 6). perform ADJ 4D Scan image dis- 2) Set the test chart prepared in the procedure 1) on the docu- tortion adjustment (whole scanner unit). 2) Adjust the scanner unit distortion adjustment plate. 4-D Scan image distortion adjustment If the four angles of the rectangle of the copy image are right (Whole scanner unit) angles.6) until the condition of the procedure 3) is satisfied. (Draw a rectangular with four right angles. the distortion on the left is equal to that on the right. 7) Set the test chart prepared in the procedure 1) on the docu- ment table. 1) Loosen the fixing screw (A). ner unit A and B. If the distortion in the sub scanning direction cannot be deleted with the above procedures. and ADJ 4C related to the scan image distortion adjustment. perform the following procedure. (The distortions are balanced. (Change the relative position of the scanner unit drive pulley and the drive shaft. If there is any distortion in the main scanning direction. the scan image distortion is adjusted. and make a copy on A3 (11" x 17") paper. 4-C Scan image main scanning direction distortion adjustment 1) Make a test chart on A3 (11" x 17") paper as shown below. Check that the distortion in the main scanning direction is within the specified range. L If the distortion in the sub scanning direction cannot be deleted with the above procedures. Lc Lc Copy A Copy B A A A Ld Ld A There is no difference There is some difference between the distortion on between the distortion on the right and that on the left. MX-M503N ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 4 – 14 . perform ADJ 4D Scan image distortion adjustment (Whole scanner unit). Lc Ld Lc Ld If Lc = Ld. perform the following procedures.5) until the difference between the image distortions (distortion balance) is deleted. By adjusting the distortion of the whole scanner unit. Repeat the procedures 2) . ADJ 4B. 6) Without changing the balance of the scanner rail on the front L L frame side. L = 10mm Repeat the procedures 6) and 7) until the distortion in the main scanning direction is in the specified range.) This adjustment is executed when scan image distortion cannot be adjusted with ADJ 4A. 4) Check the difference (distortion balance) between left-hand and right-hand side images distortions. manually turn the 5) Change the height balance of the scanner rail on the front scanner unit drive pulley to change the parallelism of the scan. change the overall height.) If the above condition is satisfied. the right and that on the left.) Remove the lower cabinet of the operation panel. and make a copy on A3 (11" x 17") paper.) 6) Tighten the scanner unit drive pulley fixing screw. (The work is completed. 3) Check for distortion in the main scanning direction. If not. it is judged that there is no distortion. Change the upper and lower positions of the scanner unit distortion adjustment plate on the right edge of the scanner unit so that the scan image distortion is minimized. Loosen the scanner rail fixing screw to change the balance between the L right and the left heights of the scanner rail.5) Without moving the scanner unit drive shaft. ment table. frame side.

Slowly pull out the DSPF/RSPF height adjustment sheet. Check section A. Check to insure that a slight resistance is felt when pulling out the DSPF/RSPF height adjustment sheet. A is lowered ance? too much. D to lift the DSPF/RSPF so that there is a resistance in the section A. Yes a Adjust hinge D until there is a resistance in section A. ADJ 5 Scanner image skew adjustment (DSPF/RSPF mode) 5-A DSPF/RSPF parallelism adjustment 1) Make an DSPF/RSPF parallelism adjustment sheet. A Is No The section there a resist. * Be careful not to cover the convex section of the glass holding resin surface with the height adjustment sheet. (Clockwise) D MX-M503N ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 4 – 15 . If it can be pulled out without resistance. and make an adjustment. and close the DSPF/RSPF unit. (Counter. 20mm A4/Letter size 2) Perform the adjustment according to the flowchart below. b) If it cannot be pulled out. Cut copy paper in the longitudinal direction. loosen the fixing nut and turn the section D counterclockwise to move down the Turn the hinge DSPF/RSPF unit. loosen the fixing nut and turn the clockwise) section D clockwise to lift the DSPF/RSPF unit. and make an adjustment. <Flow chart> <Work procedure> a) Check section A. Start of the adjustment Place the DSPF/RSPF height adjustment sheet between section A and the DSPF/RSPF glass height adjustment resin surface (a).

5. edge (a) of the OC mat. Use a clearance gauge to check to confirm that the clearance in the section F is 4. No 4. If not. loosen the fixing nut and turn the section E to adjust.0mm Is there a Section F resistance in the section B? Yes a Increase the 20mm clearance in the section F until there is a resistance in the section B. * Turn section E clockwise to lift the DSPF/RSPF unit.3 . c) Adjust the section F. the max. However. Turn it counterclockwise to move down the DSPF/RSPF unit. is 5.5.0mm.0mm. E MX-M503N ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 4 – 16 .3mm . Adjust the * Insert a clearance gauge in the range of 20mm from the section F.

d) Check section B. E Adjust hinge f) Check section C. B b Is there a re. glass surface (b). side is separating. E until the Check to confirm that the projection in section C in the right separation in front side of then DSPF/RSPF bottom is in contact with the section C is Check section C.K. (The right section.) * Be careful not to put the book sensor (b) on the height adjustment sheet. (If the boss in section B is in contact. Place the DSPF/RSPF height adjustment sheet between section B and the DSPF/RSPF glass height adjustment resin surface (a). Check to insure that a slight resistance is felt when pulling out the DSPF/RSPF height adjustment sheet. No sistance? Yes a e) If it can be pulled out without resistance. Slowly pull out the DSPF/RSPF height adjustment sheet. it is O. turn the hinge in section E clockwise to adjust. and close the DSPF/RSPF unit.) Yes C End of the b adjustment MX-M503N ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 4 – 17 . deleted. Check section B. (Counter- clockwise) b C * The bosses in section A Is there No and B are excessively a separating pressed.

1. * When replacing the DSPF/RSPF unit. and then check the image for skews (Set in the DSPF/RSPF feed tray so that the mark on the adjustment chart is at the edge). If the above requirement is not met for the paper's front side. SIM 64-2 set values A A = 1. B 2) Copy the adjustment chart (created in step 1) to A3 (11" x 17") paper in DSPF/RSPF duplex mode. • Check with one of the following methods. 1) Create an adjustment chart by printing in duplex mode the self- print pattern (grid pattern) specified in Simulation 64-2. then do step 3). D = 255 Make sure that the print grid pattern is almost in parallel with the paper edges. 3) Remove the hex nut cover in the DSPF/RSPF diagonal adjust- ment screw section.0mm * The DSPF/RSPF unit generates skewed scanned images. 'C' and 'D' to the leading and trailing edges of the paper for both front and back sides of the paper. C = 254. [Check Method 2] 5-B DSPF/RSPF skew adjustment Check that the squareness of the main scanning direction (Front surface mode) print line for the longitudinal direction of paper is within This adjustment is needed in the following situations: 1. A Paper pass direction If the front surface copy image is as shown above and the back surface copy is not as shown above. 0 . * The DSPF/RSPF section has been disassembled. go to the step 3) of "ADJ 5C DSPF skew adjustment (Back surface mode)". [Check Method 1] 4) Raise the DSPF/RSPF unit upright. Make sure that the output satisfies the condition: |a-b| ± 1 mm A B a b (Back side) Make sure that the output satisfies the condition: |c-d| ± 1 mm C D c d MX-M503N ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 4 – 18 . and loosen the fixing (Front side) screw of the hinge.0mm. 'B'. and apply position marks 'A'. B = 1.

'B'. 1) Create an adjustment chart by printing in duplex mode the self- print pattern (grid pattern) specified in Simulation 64-2. SIM 64-2 set values A = 1. turn the DSPF/RSPF diagonal adjustment screw counterclockwise. 'C' and 'D' to the leading and trailing edges of the paper for both front and back sides of the paper. • Check with one of the following methods. * The DSPF unit generates skewed scanned images. C = 254. and then check the image for skews (Set in the DSPF feed tray so that the mark on the adjustment chart is at the edge). A Paper pass direction * In the case of (A). and apply position marks 'A'. 5-C DSPF skew adjustment Turn the hex wrench of the DSPF/RSPF diagonal adjustment (Back surface mode) screw to adjust the alignment. D = 255 Make sure that the print grid pattern is almost in parallel with the paper edges. c d MX-M503N ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 4 – 19 .(b) =  1mm or less) is satisfied. * When replacing the DSPF unit. Repeat procedures 2) to 5) until the condition ((a) . This adjustment is needed in the following situations: * The DSPF section has been disassembled. [Check Method 1] (Front side) A B Make sure that the output satisfies the condition: |a-b| ± 1 mm A B a b (Back side) Make sure that the output satisfies the condition: |c-d| ± 1 mm 6) Make a copy again and measure (a) and (b) on the copied test chart. B = 1.5) Close the DSPF/RSPF unit. and loosen the hex nut of the DSPF/RSPF diagonal adjustment screw section. C D 7) Tighten the hinge section fixing screw which was loosened in the procedure 4) to tighten the hinge section. In the case of (B). B 2) Copy the adjustment chart (created in step 1) to A3 (11" x 17") paper in DSPF duplex mode. turn the DSPF/RSPF diagonal adjustment screw clockwise.

21$'-8670(17 $˖ ˖&&' 0$.   ǂǂǂ6. If the back surface copy is not as shown above. 1) Enter the SIM 48-1 mode. [Check Method 2] [When the main scanning direction print line is shifted to the Check that the squareness of the main scanning direction left] print line for the longitudinal direction of paper is within (When c < d): Shift the CIS mounting plate to "L" direction.08/$7. * The CCD unit has been replaced. perform the * U2 trouble has occurred.1. 3) Remove the front frame cabinet of the DSPF. If the back surface copy image is as shown above and the front surface copy is not as shown above.&$7.21ǂǂ12 7(67 &/26( 0$*1. A ADJ 6 Scan image focus adjustment 6-A Image focus adjustment (Document table mode/DSPF/RSPF front surface mode) This adjustment is needed in the following situations: * The CCD unit has been removed from the machine. * When the copy image focus is not properly adjusted.). ning direction is not properly adjusted. 1. go to the step 3) * When the copy magnification ratio in the copy image main scan- of "ADJ 5B DSPF skew adjustment (Front surface mode)". 0 . procedures of step 3) or later. [When the main scanning direction print line is shifted to the right] (When c > d): Shift the CIS mounting plate to "R" direction.1.0mm Repeat steps 2) to 5) until an acceptable result is obtained.0mm.

$˖  %˖ ˖&&' 68%.

1. ˷̚˹ &˖ ˖63) 0$.

'˖  ˖63) 68%.

(˖  ˖63)% 0$.1.

)˖  ˖63)% 68%.

MX-M503N ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 4 – 20 . 2) Set the adjustment item CCD (MAIN) to 50 (default value). 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150 5) Check the image skew state. and shift the CIS mounting plate to "L" or "R" direction to adjust. and make a copy. 3) Place a scale on the original table as illustrated below. Press [CLOSE] key to shift from the simulation mode to the copy mode. (On the front frame Select the adjustment item with the scroll key. 5) Compare the copied image of the scale and the actual scale length in terms of length. 2. L R 4) Make a normal copy on A4 paper. and enter the side) adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key. 4) Loosen the adjustment plate fixing screw.

one turn) At that time. steps. shift the CCD unit in the direction A.11) until the condition is satisfied.6) Obtain the copy magnification ratio correction ratio in the main U model scanning direction from the following formula. the whole scanner unit must be replaced. perform the following procedures. * Never loosen the screws marked with X. 11) Slide the CCD unit in the arrow direction (CCD sub scanning If the image is not satisfactorily focused. the position and the 1) Make a duplex copy in DSPF mode. is satisfactorily focused. than the original scale. Main scanning direction copy magnification ratio correction ratio = (Original size . CCD unit base as shown below. (1mm (1%) 10 20 90 100 110 NOTE: By changing the CCD unit fixing position with the simula- shorter than tion 48-1 adjustment value at 50. do the following direction) to change the installing position. adjusted. surface mode) 8) Remove the dark box cover. scale on the front and the rear side of the CCD unit base. which cannot be adjusted in the market. If the copy magnification ratio is not satisfactory.2%. angle of the CCD unit base may be changed to cause a problem. When the copy image is shorter DSPF unit.0mm 12) Make a copy and check the copy magnification ratio again. the copy magnification the original) ratio is adjusted within the specified range (100  1. N model A B MX-M503N ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 4 – 21 .0%) and the specified resolution is obtained based on the opti- cal system structure. 4) Loosen the fixing screw of the focus adjustment plate. mark the * When the CIS unit is replaced. When the copy image is longer than the original scale.Copy image size) / Original size x 100% (Example) Compare the scale of 10mm with the scale of 10mm on the copy image. This adjustment is required in the following cases: 9) To prevent against shift of the CCD unit optical axis. * When the CIS unit is replaced.99) / 100 x 100 = 1 100mm scale (Orignal) 10 20 90 100 110 A B 1. In that 2) Make sure that the copied image on the back side of the paper case. 6-B Image focus adjustment (DSPF back 7) Remove the document table glass. 10) Loosen the CCD unit fixing screws. * Fix the CCD unit so that it is in parallel with the line marked in procedure 9). shift the 3) Remove the rear frame and the front frame cabinet of the CCD unit in the direction B. Main scanning direction copy magnification ratio correction ratio = (100 . * When the DSPF unit is replaced. * When the DSPF unit is removed. If the copy magnification ratio is not in the range of 100  1%. If any one of these screws is loosened. Copy image repeat the procedures of 9) . * This procedure must be executed also when the CCD unit is * When the COPY/SCAN/FAX image focus is not properly replaced. fix the CCD unit so that it is in parallel with the On the front frame side and the rear frame side. (About One scale of mark-off line corresponds to 0.

frame sides to adjust the focus.21$'-8670(17 $˖ ˖&&' 0$.08/$7.1.   ǂǂǂ6.21ǂǂ12 7(67 &/26( 0$*1.5) Turn the CIS focus adjustment screws on the front and the rear 2) Enter the SIM 48-1 mode.&$7.).

$˖  %˖ ˖&&' 68%.

˷̚˹ &˖ ˖63) 0$.1.

'˖  ˖63) 68%.

(˖  ˖63)% 0$.1.

)˖  ˖63)% 68%.

When the adjustment value is increased. below. If the copy magnification ratio is within the specified range (100  1. 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150 2) Enter the SIM 48-1 mode. the focus adjustment (CCD unit installing position adjustment) must have been completed.02%. 5) Change the CCD (MAIN) adjustment value of Simulation 48-1.0%). and make a copy. 3) Make a normal copy and obtain the copy magnification ratio.5) until the copy magnification ratio is within the specified range (100  1. magnification ratio adjustment This adjustment is needed in the following situations: (Document table mode) * When the copy image magnification ratio in the sub scanning 1) Place a scale on the document table as shown in the figure direction is not properly adjusted. the copy magnifica- tion ratio is increased. perform the following procedure.&$7.0%).   ǂǂǂ6. (Manual adjustment) This manual adjustment is used when the automatic adjustment of 7-B Sub scanning direction image SIM 50-28 cannot obtain a satisfactory result. 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150 * When the EEPROM on the scanner control PWB is replaced. When the adjustment value is changed by 1. * When the scanner control PWB is replaced. adjustment Repeat the procedures 3) . 2. Repeat the above procedures until a satisfactory focus is obtained. Before this adjustment.1. * When a U2 trouble occurs. * When the scanner motor is replaced.). 4) Check that the copy magnification ratio is within the specified range (100  1. Press [CLOSE] key to shift from the simulation mode to the copy mode.0%).21ǂǂ12 7(67 &/26( 0$*1. 7-A Main scanning direction image magnification ratio adjustment (Document table mode) 1) Place a scale on the document table as shown in the figure below.21$'-8670(17 $˖ ˖&&' 0$.08/$7. If the copy magnification ratio is not within the specified range. the adjustment is completed. the copy magnifi- ADJ 7 Scan image magnification ratio cation ratio is changed by about 0.

$˖  %˖ ˖&&' 68%.

˷̚˹ &˖ ˖63) 0$.1.

'˖  ˖63) 68%.

(˖  ˖63)% 0$.1.

)˖  ˖63)% 68%.

MX-M503N ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 4 – 22 . 2.

copy mode.3) Make a normal copy and obtain the copy magnification ratio. Copy magnifi- cation ratio (Original dimension .1. 5) Enter the SIM 48-1 mode.21$'-8670(17  1.&$7.0%). (Longer than the original) If it is not within the specified range. there is no need to perform the adjustment. and make a copy. 4) Check that the copy magnification ratio is within the specified range (100  1.Copy dimension) Original dimension 100% original (Example 1) Copy A copy 10 20 90 100 110 (Shorter than 10 50 100 150 200 250 the original) 10 50 100 150 200 250 Scale 10 20 90 100 110 4) Obtain the image magnification ratio according to the following (Original) formula: Image magnification ratio = Original size / Original size x 100 (%) Image magnification ratio = 99 / 100 x 100 = 99 (%) (Example 2) If the image magnification ratio is within the specified range Copy B 10 20 90 100 110 (100  0.   ǂǂǂ6. If the copy magnification $˖ ˖&&' 0$.08/$7.21ǂǂ12 7(67 &/26( If the copy magnification ratio is within the specified range (100 0$*1.8%). the adjustment is completed.). perform the following pro- cedures.0%). 3) Measure the images on the copy paper and the original Press [CLOSE] key to shift from the simulation mode to the images.

perform the following %˖ ˖&&' 68%. $˖  ratio is not within the specified range.

1. ˷̚˹ &˖ ˖63) 0$.

procedure. '˖  ˖63) 68%.

1. 5) Change the CCD (SUB) adjustment value of Simulation 48-1. (˖  ˖63)% 0$.

)˖  ˖63)% 68%.

0%). D SPF(SUB) DSPF/RSPF document front 1 . Paper pass direction * Items B.1%. E: When the set value is increased by 1. adjustment (Main scan) * When the copy magnification ratio is not matched. * It affects scanning (PC scanning. When the adjustment value is changed by 1.1%. the magni- A4 size fication ratio is increased by 0.99 50 magnification ratio adjustment magnification ratio adjustment (CCD) (DSPF/RSPF mode) B CCD(SUB) SCAN sub scanning 1 . etc. C. Setting Default Item Display Content range value 7-C Main scanning direction image A CCD(MAIN) SCAN main scanning 1 . Repeat the procedures 3) . the magnification ratio is increased by 0. (Both the front surface and the back surface) SPF (MAIN) Main scanning direction image magnification ratio 10mm 10mm (Front surface) SPFB (MAIN) Main scanning direction image magnification ratio 2) Make a duplex copy at the normal ratio on A4 paper.99 50 surface magnification ratio * When the DSPF/RSPF is disassembled. (Back surface) MX-M503N ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 4 – 23 .02%.5") paper. adjustment (Sub scan) a. and put marks on both sides and adjustment (Sub scan) both surfaces of the paper at 10mm from each edge. the copy magnifi- cation ratio is changed by about 0. * Items A. When the adjustment value is increased. F SPFB(SUB) RSPF document back 1 . 6) Select an adjustment item of SPF (MAIN)/SPFB (MAIN) with the scroll key. surface magnification ratio * When U2 trouble occurs.) as well as copying. D: When the set value is increased by 1. adjustment (CCD) C SPF(MAIN) DSPF/RSPF document front 1 .5) until the copy magnification ratio is within the specified range (100  1. 2. surface magnification ratio Use A4 (11" x 8. Adjustment procedures E SPFB(MAIN) DSPF/RSPF document back 1 .99 50 surface magnification ratio 1) Place the duplex adjustment chart shown below on the docu- adjustment (Main scan) ment tray of the DSPF/RSPF.99 50 * When the EEPROM on the scan control PWB is replaced.99 50 This adjustment must be performed in the following cases: magnification ratio * When the scan control PWB is replaced.99 50 The adjustment chart is prepared by the following procedures. the copy magnifica- tion ratio in the sub scanning direction is increased.

When the adjustment value is increased. the image magni.&$7.).   ǂǂǂ6.21ǂǂ12 7(67 &/26( When the adjustment value is changed by 1. the image magnifica- tion ratio is increased. 0$*1.7) Enter an adjustment value with 10-key.1.21$'-8670(17 fication ratio is changed by 0. 5) Enter the SIM 48-1 mode. $˖ ˖&&' 0$.08/$7.02%. and press [OK] key.

$˖  %˖ ˖&&' 68%.

Repeat the procedures of 1) .1.7) until a satisfactory result is ˷̚˹ &˖ ˖63) 0$.

obtained. '˖  ˖63) 68%.

1. (˖  ˖63)% 0$.

NOTE: When [CLOSE] key is pressed in this simulation mode. the )˖  ˖63)% 68%.

adjustment (CCD) * When the EEPROM on the scan control PWB is replaced. 6) Select an adjustment item with the scroll key.5") paper. Adjustment procedures D SPF(SUB) DSPF/RSPF document front 1 . 100 Repeat the procedures of 1) . magnification ratio adjustment (CCD) * When the copy magnification ratio is not matched.1%.99 50 This adjustment must be performed in the following cases: magnification ratio * When the scan control PWB is replaced. When the adjustment value is changed by 1.) as well as copying. adjustment (Sub scan) The adjustment chart is prepared by the following procedures. E: When the set value is increased by 1. B CCD(SUB) SCAN sub scanning 1 . the machine returns to the simula- 150 tion mode. the machine goes into the normal operation mode. When the adjustment value is increased. When the system key is pressed. machine goes into the normal operation mode. Under this state. Under this 200 100 state.99 50 1) Place the duplex adjustment chart shown below on the docu. When the copy system key is pressed.99 50 * When U2 trouble occurs.8%). the image magni- 50 fication ratio is changed by 0.99 50 surface magnification ratio Use A4 (11" x 8. the magnification ratio is increased by 0. SPFB (SUB) Sub scanning direction image magnification ratio (Back surface) 3) Measure the images on the copy paper and the original images. 7) Enter an image magnification ratio adjustment value with 10- key. copy check can be normally performed. * Items B. If it is not within the specified range. there is no need to perform the adjustment. MX-M503N ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 4 – 24 . D: When the set value is increased by 1. the image magnifica- 10 tion ratio is increased. and put marks on both sides and adjustment (Main scan) both surfaces of the paper at 10mm from each edge.02%. copy check can be normally performed. E SPFB(MAIN) DSPF/RSPF document back 1 . C SPF(MAIN) DSPF/RSPF document front 1 .99 50 * When the DSPF/RSPF is disassembled. * It affects scanning (PC scanning. and press [OK] key.99 50 surface magnification ratio 10mm adjustment (Sub scan) Paper pass direction * Items A. surface magnification ratio ment tray of the DSPF/RSPF. 10mm SPF (SUB) Sub scanning direction image magnification ratio (Front surface) 2) Make a duplex copy at the normal ratio on A4 paper. 7-D Sub scanning direction image magnification ratio adjustment Setting Default Item Display Content (DSPF/RSPF mode) range value A CCD(MAIN) SCAN main scanning 1 .7) until a satisfactory result is 10 obtained.01%. 200 4) Obtain the image magnification ratio according to the following formula: Image magnification ratio = Original size / Original size x 100 (%) Image magnification ratio = 99 / 100 x 100 = 99 (%) If the image magnification ratio is within the specified range (100  0. surface magnification ratio adjustment (Main scan) a. F SPFB(SUB) RSPF document back 1 . perform the following pro- cedures. C. 2. original 150 50 NOTE: When [CLOSE] key is pressed in this simulation mode. the machine returns to the simula- tion mode. etc. the A4 size magnification ratio is increased by 0.

08/$7. and press [OK] key. it is required that the ADJ 8A A Scan image off-center adjustment (Document table mode) must have been properly adjusted. * When the DSPF/RSPF unit is replaced. adjustment mode (document table). NOTE: To execute this adjustment. This manual adjustment is used when the automatic adjustment of 6) Press [CLOSE] key and shift from the simulation mode to the SIM 50-28 cannot obtain a satisfactory result. * When the scan control PWB is replaced.B' = 1.B' = 1. (Document table mode) This adjustment is needed in the following situations: 8-B Scan image off-center adjustment * When the scanner (reading) section is disassembled. 4) Select the adjustment mode OC with the scroll key. * When U2 trouble occurs. * When the scanner control PWB is replaced. A' A' . copy mode and make a copy. (Manual adjustment) When the set value is increased. original copy   a ǂǂǂ6. Draw a line at the center of the front surface and the back sur- face of A4 (11" x 8. This adjustment must be performed in the following cases: * When a U2 trouble occurs. Adjustment procedures A=B 1) Prepare the adjustment chart. B' 2) Set the adjustment chart to the DSPF/RSPF.'(. * When the EEPROM on the scanner control PWB is replaced.*. If the above condition is not satisfied. * When the scanner (reading) section is disassembled. perform the following procedures. the main scanning print posi- tion is shifted to the front side by 0. If A' . 3) Make a duplex copy in the normal magnification ratio from the manual paper feed tray. * When the DSPF/RSPF section is disassembled.0mm. Paper transport direction Front surface Back surface 2) Check the copy image center position. ADJ 8 Scan image off-center 5) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key. adjustment The entered value is set.21ǂǂ12 7(67 &/26( 25. and check the image position on the front surface and the back surface of the copy paper.6) until the above condition is 8-A Scan image off-center adjustment satisfied. 1) Make a copy of the adjustment chart (made by yourself) in the * When the scanner (reading) section is replaced. a. * When the EEPROM on the scan control PWB is replaced. Repeat the procedures of 2) .1mm. 3) Enter the SIM 50-12 mode.5") paper in parallel with the paper transport B direction.1$/&(17(52))6(76(783 $˖ ˖2& $˖  %˖ ˖63) 6. (DSPF/RSPF mode) * When the scanner (reading) unit is replaced.0mm Draw a line at the center of the front surface and the back surface (100%) of paper in parallel with the paper transport direction. the adjustment is not required.

'(. ˷̚˹ &˖ ˖63) 6.

7mmm there is no 2. perform the following procedures. need to perform the adjustment. If the adjustment is required. MX-M503N ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 4 – 25 . b If the difference is within the range of 0  2.

4) Enter the SIM 50-12 or 50-6 mode.*.99 50   document off-center ǂǂǂ6. Setting Default Item/Display Content range value (SIM50-12) J OFFSET_SPF2 DSPF back surface 1 .99 50 $˖  %˖ ˖63) 6.'(.1$/&(17(52))6(76(783 &/26( adjustment $˖ ˖2& K SCAN_SPEED_SPF1 DSPF document 1 .08/$7.21ǂǂ12 7(67 25.

'(. front surface ˷̚˹ &˖ ˖63) 6.

* Item C . B: When the adjustment value is increased. * Item A .1mm change (SIM50-6) * The DSPF rear edge image loss setting is provided for  countermeasures against the case when shades are ǂǂǂ6.21ǂǂ12 7(67 &/26( /($'('*($'-8670(179$/8( 63). image loss is increased.H: 1 step = 0. the 2. the scan timing is delayed. magnification ratio adjustment (Sub scan) * Item A.08/$7.H: When the adjustment value is increased.

produced. $˖ ˖6.'( SIM50-6 (RSPF) ˷̚˹ &˖ ˖/($'B('*( 6.'(.'( $˖  %˖ ˖6.

'˖ ˖)5217B5($5 6.'(.

Setting Default Item/Display Content (˖ ˖75$.'(./B('*( 6.

range value )˖ ˖/($'B('*( 6.'(.

*˖ ˖)5217B5($5 6.'(.

/B('*( 6. A SIDE1 Front surface 1 .'(.99 50 +˖ ˖75$.

99 50 (SIDE1) edge image loss center adjustment amount setting A . B: When the adjustment value is increased.99 20 Item Display Content loss (SIDE1) edge image loss range value amount amount setting A OC Document table image off.˖ ˖2))6(7B63) position adjustment -˖ ˖2))6(7B63) . document scan . document scan position adjustment SIM50-12 (CCD) Setting Default C Image LEAD_EDGE Front surface lead 0 .99 20 center adjustment SIDE1 (SIDE1) image loss amount B SPF(SIDE1) SPF front surface image off. loss (SIDE2) edge image loss amount amount setting 1step = 0. 1 .˖ ˖6&$1B63(('B63) (CCD) B SIDE2 Back surface 1 . the image F Image LEAD_EDGE Back surface lead 0 . 1 .99 50 setting center adjustment E TRAIL_EDGE Front surface rear 0 .1mm G setting FRONT_REAR Back surface side 0 .1mm change SIDE2 (SIDE2) edge image loss * The RSPF rear edge image loss setting is provided for amount setting countermeasures against the case when shades are I OFFSET_SPF1 DSPF front surface 1 .99 50 position adjustment document off- (CCD) center adjustment B SIDE2 Back surface 1 .99 30 C SPF(SIDE2) SPF back surface image off.C: When the adjustment value is increased.H: When the adjustment value is increased.99 30 (SIDE2) edge image loss * Item A.99 20 front surface loss (SIDE1) edge image loss magnification ratio amount amount setting adjustment (Sub D setting FRONT_REAR Front surface side 0 .99 20 SIM50-6 (DSPF) SIDE2 (SIDE2) image loss amount setting Setting Default H TRAIL_EDGE Back surface rear 0 . H setting TRAIL_EDGE Back surface rear 0 .99 50 J OFFSET_SPF2 RSPF back surface 1 . G Image FRONT_REAR Back surface side 0 .99 50 setting back surface E TRAIL_EDGE Front surface rear 0 .99 30 Item/Display Content range value (SIDE2) edge image loss A SIDE1 Front surface 1 .99 20 position is shifted to the rear frame side.99 20 scan) SIDE1 (SIDE1) image loss amount L SCAN_SPEED_SPF2 RSPF document 1 . the loss (SIDE2) image loss amount amount setting image loss is increased.99 30 magnification ratio (SIDE1) edge image loss adjustment (Sub amount setting scan) F LEAD_EDGE Back surface lead 0 .99 50 document scan document off- position adjustment center adjustment (CIS) K SCAN_SPEED_SPF1 RSPF document 1 . document off-center adjustment MX-M503N ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 4 – 26 .99 20 * Item A . 1 .99 50 2.99 20 * Item C .99 50 D setting FRONT_REAR Front surface side 0 .99 50 C Image LEAD_EDGE Front surface lead 0 . the scan amount setting timing is delayed.99 50 produced.99 50 amount setting document scan I OFFSET_SPF1 RSPF front surface 1 .H: 1 step = 0.

1) Enter the SIM 50-5 mode.99 66 adjustment correction value (Printer mode) K MULTI COUNT Number of print 1 .99 30 OFFSET SPF1 Front surface mode lead edge image position.99 30 6) Enter an adjustment value with 10-key. CS4 Tray 4 5 * The EEPROM of the PCU PWB has been replaced. adjustment correction value H DENB-CS4 Tray 4 rear edge void area 1 . E DENB-CS1 Tray 1 rear edge void area 1 . CS1 Tray 1 2 * When the LSU is replaced or removed. G DENB-CS3 Tray 3 rear edge void area 1 .5) Select an adjustment mode with the scroll key.17(5.99 50 state.1mm/step) C FRONT/REAR FRONT/REAR void area 1 . copy check can be normally performed. I DENB-LCC LCC rear edge void aria adjustment correction value 1 .99 50 area adjustment correction Repeat the procedures of 2) . 4) Measure the distance from the paper lead edge the adjustment  pattern to the image lead edge. CS2 Tray 2 3 * U2 trouble has occurred.99 50 NOTE: When [CLOSE] key is pressed in this simulation mode.99 50 void area adjustment J DENB-ADU ADU rear edge void aria 1 . SPF(SIDE1) Front surface mode SPF(SIDE2) Back surface mode Setting Default Item/Display Content range value (SIM50-6) A DEN-C Used to adjust the print 1 . When the adjustment correction value system key is pressed.21ǂǂ12 7(67 &/26( /($'('*($'-8670(179$/8( 35. OFFSET SPF2 Back surface mode (PRINTER MODE) B DEN-B Rear edge void area 1 .6) until a satisfactory result is value obtained. CS3 Tray 3 4 * The PCU PWB has been replaced.08/$7.99 50 adjustment correction value ADJ 9 Print lead edge image position. The adjustment pattern is printed. the machine returns to the simula. and check to confirm that it is ǂǂǂ6. 2) Select the set item L with the scroll key. and press [OK] key.99 50 tion mode.5") paper in it. and enter the value (SIM50-12) corresponding to the paper feed tray with A4 (11" x 8. 3) Press [EXECUTE] key. Under this F DENB-CS2 Tray 2 rear edge void area 1 .) D DENB-MFT Manual feed rear edge void 1 . the adjustment correction value machine goes into the normal operation mode. LCC LCC 6 M DUPLEX YES Duplex print Yes 0-1 0 1 (NO) NOTE: This adjustment is performed by the user to increase the NO selection No 1 lead edge void area to greater than the standard value (3mm) in the printer mode.99 20 (When the adjustment value is increased. the print image is adjustment shifted to the rear. adjustment (Change for change in the adjustment value: 0.999 1 This adjustment is needed in the following situations: L PAPER MFT Tray Manual 1-6 1 2 (CS1) selection paper feed * When the registration roller section is disassembled.

21ǂǂ12 7(67 &/26( /($'('*($'-8670(179$/8( 35.(&87( 2.0 2.0mm (. in the standard adjustment value range. $˖ $˖ ˖'(1& Standard adjustment value: 3.&2817 /˖ ˖3$3(5&6 3.17(5.0  2.˖ ˖08/7. 10-key EXECUTE EXECUTE End of print  ǂǂǂ6.08/$7.0mm  %˖ ˖'(1% ˷̚˹ &˖ ˖)52175($5 '˖ ˖'(1%0)7 (˖ ˖'(1%&6 )˖ ˖'(1%&6 *˖ ˖'(1%&6 +˖ ˖'(1%&6 .˖ ˖'(1%/&& -˖ ˖'(1%$'8 .

˖ ˖08/7. (˖ ˖'(1%&6 )˖ ˖'(1%&6 *˖ ˖'(1%&6 +˖ ˖'(1%&6 . MX-M503N ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 4 – 27 . do the following steps. $˖ ˖'(1& $˖  %˖ ˖'(1% ˷̚˹ &˖ ˖)52175($5 '˖ ˖'(1%0)7 If the above requirement is not met.˖ ˖'(1%/&& -˖ ˖'(1%$'8 .&2817 /˖ ˖3$3(5&6 (.(&87( 2.

adjust.21ǂǂ12 7(67 /($'('*($'-8670(179$/8( &/26( (Manual adjustment) $˖  $˖ ˖55&$ %˖ ˖55&%&6 This manual adjustment is used when the automatic adjustment of ˷̚˹ &˖ ˖55&%&6 '˖ ˖55&%/&& SIM 50-28 cannot obtain a satisfactory result. area adjustment edge can be seen. 6) Change the adjustment value. .99 50 scanning correction value O direction DENB-CS1 Tray 1 correction 1 . Setting Default Item/Display Content range value * The PCU PWB has been replaced.5) Select the adjustment target of the paper feed mode adjust. image D RRCB-LCC timing LCC 1 . edge edge reference * The scanner control PWB has been replaced. 2) Enter the SIM 50-1 mode.99 50 the ADJ 3 Print engine image skew. 10-key OK ADJ 10 Copy image position.99 30 adjustment K FRONT/ FRONT/REAR void 1 . OC center adjustment ment M Magnifi.'( adjustment (Document table mode) .˖ ˖)52175($5 /˖ ˖2))6(7B2& Repeat the procedures 4) . 1 .99 20 and that its lead edge is in contact with the document guide value area adjustment plate. SCAN_ SCAN sub scanning 1 . ment item DENC with the scroll key. E RRCB-MFT adjust. NOTE: To adjust the void area. void area *˖ ˖/($' +˖ ˖6.99 50 value value Q DENB-CS3 Tray 3 correction 1 . image  loss.08/$7. be sure to confirm that C RRCB-CS34 ON Desk 1 . '˖ ˖55&%/&& (˖ ˖55&%0)7 When the adjustment value is increased.99 50 below. A Lead RRCA Document lead 0 .  ǂǂǂ6. image loss.99 50 * The EEPROM on the scanner control PWB has been replaced. +˖ ˖6. $˖ $˖ ˖55&$  %˖ ˖55&%&6 When [EXECUTE] key is pressed. position (OC) B ment RRCB-CS12 Resist Standard 1 .6) until the condition of 4) is satisfied.99 50 value MX-M503N ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 4 – 28 .˖ ˖)52175($5 * When the scanner (reading) section is disassembled. the adjustment pattern is ˷̚˹ &˖ ˖55&%&6 printed. the distance is decreased.˖ ˖'(1$ When the set value is changed by 1.'( . 2. * When the scanner (reading) unit is replaced.99 50 magnification ratio. When *˖ ˖/($' the adjustment value is decreased. the distance is changed -˖ ˖'(1% by about 0. ment paper feed 1) Place a scale on the document table as shown in the figure F RRCB-ADU ADU 1 . value motor Tray NOTE: Before executing this adjustment. G Image LEAD Lead edge image 0 . * When the registration roller section is disassembled.˖ ˖'(1$ -˖ ˖'(1% This adjustment is needed in the following situations: . (˖ ˖55&%0)7 )˖ ˖55&%$'8 10-A Copy image position.21ǂǂ12 7(67 &/26( Enter the adjustment value and press the [OK] key or the /($'('*($'-8670(179$/8( [EXECUTE] key. and SIDE to the default values.99 50 pleted normally. * When the LSU is replaced or removed.99 50 adjust.99 50 cation SPEED_OC magnification ratio ratio adjustment (CCD) correction N Sub DENB-MFT Manual feed 1 . change the adjustment values of items B and C. void area adjustments has been com.08/$7. LEAD. 3) Set RRCA.99 30 loss area loss area setting Place a scale so that it is in parallel with the scanning direction H setting SIDE Side image loss 0 .Manual 1 .99 50 print area value P correction DENB-CS2 Tray 2 correction 1 . and void area adjustment ǂǂǂ6.99 30 Place white paper on the document table so that the scale lead adjust. I Void area DENA Lead edge void 1 . the distance from the )˖ ˖55&%$'8 paper lead edge to the image lead edge is increased.99 50 * The EEPROM of the PCU PWB has been replaced. * U2 trouble has occurred.1mm. image position. J ment DENB Rear edge void area 1 .99 20 REAR area adjustment 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150 L Off-center OFFSET_ OC document off. /˖ ˖2))6(7B2& 2.

2) Enter the SIM 53-8 mode.0mm. T DENB-ADU ADU correction 1 . If not. the image loss is mode).1mm.3) until a satisfactory result is SIDE Side image 0 . mode. the below standard state.21$'-8670(17 $872 0$18$/ Copy area Maginification ratio : 400% 1 2 3 4 5mm 10mm  Void area: 3. and press [OK] key. adjustment Perform the procedures of 1) . loss  1.08/$7. increased. image from 3.0mm adjustment NOTE: After execution of this adjustment. * When the scanner (reading) section is replaced.99 50 (DSPF/RSPF mode scanner scan position scanning value adjustment) S direction DENB-LCC LCC correction 1 .21ǂǂ12 7(67 &/26( 63)6&$11. LEAD Image loss Lead edge 0 . and shift from the simulation mode to the copy mode and make a copy in 100% mode and in 200% * When U2 trouble occurs.0mm changed by 0.1mm. De. * When the DSPF/RSPF section is disassembled. Press [CLOSE] key. When the adjustment value is changed by 1. If this adjustment is made improperly. be sure to execute ADJ 10C Copy mode image loss adjustment (DSPF/RSPF When the adjustment value is increased. perform the following procedures. and Paper lead check for any shade on the lead edge section of the copy edge image. When the adjustment value is decreased.0mm 3) Enter an adjustment value with 10-key. the image loss is decreased. * When the scanner (reading) section is disassembled. MX-M503N ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 4 – 29 .1*326. Setting Default Item/Display Content 10-B Document scan position adjustment range value R Sub DENB-CS4 Tray 4 correction 1 . the lead edge * When the DSPF/RSPF unit is replaced. it is adjusted to the standard state.7. If it is not in section of the copy image.0 obtained. 100% Papar lead edge 5mm 10mm Image area 200% 5mm 10mm Shadow image of DSPF 5) Image loss adjustment When the adjustment item of the image loss below is set to the If there is any shade of the document table on the lead edge default value. When the adjustment value of RRCA is proper. Adjustment procedures Scale image 3.99 20 2.0 When the set value is changed by 1.) may be reflected on the lead edge section of the scan image in the Repeat the above procedures until a satisfactory result is DSPF/RSPF (front surface) mode. a. and press [MANUAL] key. the scanner stop position is (Adjust so that the lead edge image from 3. scanning the front surface in the DSPF/RSPF mode. Standard Item/ Adjustment When the set value is increased.0mm position 1) Make a copy in the DSPF/RSPF (front surface) mode. obtained.99 30 3. the scanning position is adjustment image loss  1. 4) Perform the image lead edge reference position adjustment.0mm is not copied in either of 100% and 200% This simulation is to adjust the scanner reading position when copy scale. change these adjustment items. Image loss: 3.   Paper lead edge ǂǂǂ6.0mm is not copied shifted to the specified position and a shade of the document table in either of different copy magnification ratios. change and adjust the RRCA value. the void area is changed by 0.99 50 This adjustment must be performed in the following cases: print area value correction * When the scan control PWB is replaced. or when it is set to a desired value.99 66 value value * When the EEPROM on the scan control PWB is replaced. the distance from the home Content fault adjustment Display range value value position to the DSPF/RSPF scanning position is increased.

10-C Copy mode image loss adjustment (DSPF/RSPF mode)  ǂǂǂ6.08/$7.21ǂǂ12 7(67 &/26( This adjustment must be performed in the following cases: /($'('*($'-8670(179$/8( 63). 2) Enter the SIM 50-6 mode.

'(  %˖ ˖6. ˷̚˹ &˖ ˖/($'B('*( 6. * When the scan control PWB is replaced.'(.'( * When the EEPROM on the scan control PWB is replaced. $˖ $˖ ˖6.

'˖ ˖)5217B5($5 6. * When the scanner (reading) section is disassembled.'(.

'(./B('*( 6. (˖ ˖75$.

)˖ ˖/($'B('*( 6.'(. * When the scanner (reading) unit is replaced.

* When U2 trouble occurs.'(. *˖ ˖)5217B5($5 6.

/B('*( 6.'(. +˖ ˖75$.

99 30 R Front surface FACE (SIDE1) edge image loss amount setting F Image LEAD_EDGE Back surface lead 0 . the following items must have 2. C Image LEAD_EDGE Front surface 0 . been properly adjusted. put marks of the lead edge.99 50 1) Prepare the adjustment chart. * Item A .1mm change * The DSPF rear edge image loss setting is provided for counter- measures against the case when shades are produced.99 20 (SIDE2) edge image loss F amount setting I OFFSET_SPF1 DSPF front 1 . H TRAIL_EDGE Back surface rear 0 . and the rear end as well as the identification (SIDE1) side image loss marks of the front surface and the back surface.H: 1 step = 0. . * When the DSPF/RSPF section is disassembled.99 30 loss (SIDE2) edge image loss L T amount amount setting G setting FRONT_REAR Back surface side 0 . setting setting D SIDE1 FRONT_REAR Front surface 0 . the image loss is increased.99 50 Draw arrows.5") paper and draw arrow marks vertically and loss (SIDE1) lead edge image horizontally on the front and the back surfaces.99 20 the front end. .99 50 front surface magnification Put the position ratio adjustment marks. document scan position The adjustment chart can be made by the following proce- adjustment (CIS) dures. B: When the adjustment value is increased. (Sub scan) F * Item A.99 20 Use A4 (11" x 8.99 50 surface document off-center adjustment L T K SCAN_SPEED_SPF1 DSPF document 1 . ADJ 3C Print engine print area (void area) adjustment (DSPF) ADJ 7C Main scanning direction image magnification ratio adjustment (DSPF/RSPF mode) Setting Default Item Display Content ADJ 7D Sub scanning direction image magnification ratio range value adjustment (DSPF/RSPF mode) A SIDE1 Front surface 1 .99 20 SIDE2 (SIDE2) image loss Put the position amount setting marks. the trail edge. surface document off-center Back surface adjustment R BACK J OFFSET_SPF2 DSPF back 1 .99 50 ADJ 8B Scan image off-center adjustment (DSPF/RSPF mode) document scan ADJ 10B Document scan position adjustment (DSPF/RSPF position mode scanner scan position adjustment) adjustment (CCD) a. Adjustment procedures B SIDE2 Back surface 1 . Draw arrows.˖ ˖2))6(7B63) -˖ ˖2))6(7B63) * When the DSPF/RSPF unit is replaced. * Item C .˖ ˖6&$1B63(('B63) NOTE: To execute this adjustment. amount setting E TRAIL_EDGE Front surface rear 0 . MX-M503N ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 4 – 30 . amount loss amount At the same time.H: When the adjustment value is increased. the scan timing is delayed.

Check L SCAN_SPEED_SPF2 RSPF document 1 .99 30 press [OK] key.1mm/step) Perform the procedures of 1) .5.0mm amount amount setting G setting FRONT_REAR Back surface side 0 . When the system key is pressed. I OFFSET_SPF1 RSPF front surface 1 .3) until a satisfactory result is front surface obtained.) (Change for change in the set value: 0.99 20 SIDE1 Copy image (SIDE1) image loss amount setting E TRAIL_EDGE Front surface rear 0 . the machine goes into the normal operation mode. the machine returns to the simula- tion mode.5. with 10-key. and H TRAIL_EDGE Back surface rear 0 .99 50 document scan position adjustment (CCD) C Image LEAD_EDGE Front surface lead 0 .0mm Setting Default Item/Display Content on the front surface and the back surface. (SIDE1/SIDE2)) on the front surface and the back surface to 2) Enter the adjustment value of TRAIL EDGE (SIDE1/SIDE2) the following values. Under this state.1mm/step) K SCAN_SPEED_SPF1 RSPF document 1 . the rear edge image (When the set value is increased. the print image posi- surface document tion is shifted to the delaying direction for the paper. SIDE1: Front surface lead edge scan position adjustment center adjustment SIDE2: Back surface lead edge scan position adjustment J OFFSET_SPF2 RSPF back 1 . the lead edge image loss is loss is increased. perform the following SIDE2 (SIDE2) image loss amount procedure.1mm/step) (Change for change in the set value: 0.99 50 to confirm that the rear edge image loss is 2.99 20 Image loss loss (SIDE2) edge image loss 3.0 . adjustment (CCD) B SIDE2 Back surface 1 . perform the following 1) Set the lead edge image loss adjustment values (LEAD EDGE procedure.0 1.99 50 (When the adjustment value is increased.1mm change * The RSPF rear edge image loss setting is provided for counter- measures against the case when shades are produced. the image loss is increased. the scan timing is delayed. * Item C . magnification ratio adjustment (Sub Paper rear edge scan) * Item A. Image loss 2. and press [OK] key. Check to confirm that the lead edge image loss is within 3.) off-center adjustment (Change for change in the set value: 0.(RSPF) 2) Make a duplex copy in 100% in the DSPF/RSPF mode. copy check can be normally performed. document scan Paper lead edge The paper lead edge must be aligned with position the image lead edge. The paper lead range value A SIDE1 Front surface 1 . MX-M503N ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 4 – 31 . magnification ratio adjustment (Sub (Rear edge image loss adjustment) scan) 1) Make a duplex copy in 100% in the DSPF/RSPF mode.0mm (Lead edge image loss adjustment) If the above condition is not satisfied.H: When the adjustment value is increased.99 30 (SIDE1) edge image loss amount setting F Image LEAD_EDGE Back surface lead 0 .) increased.0mm on the back surface front surface and the back surface. setting 3) Enter the adjustment value of SIDE1/SIDE2 with 10-key.0 . Copy image NOTE: When [CLOSE] key is pressed in this simulation mode.99 20 If the above condition is not satisfied.2) until a satisfactory result is obtained.99 50 edge must be aligned with the presumed image lead edge. * Item A . (Standard set value) TRAIL EDGE (SIDE 1): LEAD EDGE(SIDE 1): Rear edge image loss adjustment value (Front surface) 20 Lead edge image loss set value (Front surface) TRAIL EDGE (SIDE 2): LEAD EDGE(SIDE 2): Rear edge image loss adjustment value (Back surface) 30 Lead edge image loss set value (Back surface) (When the adjustment value is increased.H: 1 step = 0. (SIDE2) edge image loss Adjust so that the paper lead edge is aligned with the pre- amount setting sumed image lead edge.0  1. B: When the adjustment value is increased.99 50 document off.99 50 Perform the procedures of 2) .99 20 loss (SIDE1) edge image loss amount amount setting D setting FRONT_REAR Front surface side 0 .

If they are dirty. (1) Note before adjustment 1) Check that the table glass.2) until a satisfactory result is The automatic operation is started. however. the front/rear image NOTE: UKOG-0280FCZZ is equivalent to UKOG-0280FCZ1.) NOTE: Since the SIT chart (UKOG-0280FCZZ or UKOG-0280FC 2) Check to confirm that the patches in BK1 and BK2 arrays of Z1) is easily discolored by sunlight (especially ultraviolet the SIT chart (UKOG-0280FCZZ or UKOG-0280FCZ1) are rays) and humidity and temperature. perform the following procedure. 1. (Change for change in the adjustment value: 0. Check 1) Set the SIT chart (UKOG-0280FCZZ or UKOG-0280FCZ1) to to confirm that the image losses on the front frame side and the reference position on the left rear frame side of the docu- the rear frame side are 2.0mm on the front surface and the ment table. 3 mirrors. ment accuracy is lower when compared with the adjustment FRONT/REAR (SIDE 1): method using the SIT chart. replace with new one. If they are scratched or streaked. and the lens (. In this case.0mm Copy image Copy image Paper R Image loss side edge 2. After completion of the adjustment. No.0 2. * When the EEPROM on the scanner control PWB is replaced. the adjust- FRONT/REAR (SIDE 2).0mm If the above condition is not satisfied. back surface. ADJ 11 CCD calibration  ǂǂǂ6. * When the scanner control PWB is replaced. clean them. [EXECUTE] returns to the normal display. Front/Rear image loss adjustment value (Front surface) NOTE: Check to insure that the SIT chart (UKOG-0280FCZZ or FRONT/REAR (SIDE 2): UKOG-0280FCZ1) is in close contact with the document Front/Rear image loss adjustment value (Back surface) table.0 2.21ǂǂ12 7(67 &/26( 6&$11(5&2/25%$/$1&($872$'-8670(17 11-A CCD gamma adjustment (CCD calibration) 6(77+(&+$5721'63)$1'728&+>(. If the SIT chart is not available.02.(&87(  surface are free from dirt and dust.(&87(@ (Document table mode) This adjustment is needed in the following situations: * When the CCD unit is replaced.(Front/rear frame direction image loss adjustment) (2) Adjustment procedures 1) Make a duplex copy in 100% in the DSPF/RSPF mode. * When a U2 trouble is occurred. put it in a bag (such free from dirt and scratches. Paper F Image loss side edge 2.1mm/step) Select [OC] key.) 2) Enter the SIM 63-3 mode. Perform the procedures of 1) . 2. Set the chart so that the lighter density side of the patch is on the left side. [EXECUTE] is highlighted. and press [OK] key. (When the adjustment value is increased. (If there is some dust and dirt. During the adjustment. wipe and clean with alcohol. execute SIM 63-5 to set the 2) Enter the adjustment value of FRONT/REAR (SIDE 1) / CCD gamma to the default. as a dark file) and store in a dark place of low temperature and low humidity. obtained.08/$7. loss is increased. and press [EXECUTE] key. MX-M503N ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 4 – 32 .

) % * 5 '63) (. If there is no page downward.21ǂǂ12 7(67 6&$11(5&2/25%$/$1&($872$'-8670(17 &/26( This adjustment is required in the following cases: 2&  * When the CIS unit is replaced. it is highlighted. the display grays out and the operation is invalid. * When [B] (Blue).08/$7. [B] is selected. of the selected color is displayed. [G] (Green). an active display is shown and the page moves down. and the lens surface. If there is a page under []. and the selected but- Since the SIT chart is easily discolored by sunlight (especially ton is highlighted. If they are dirty. 000*** <<<%%% (1) Note before adjustment 1) Check to insure that there is no dirt or dust on the DSPF scan- ning glass.21ǂǂ12 7(67 &/26( 6&$11(5&2/25%$/$1&($872$'-8670(17 6(77+(&+$57213/$7(1$1'728&+>(.(&87(@ If the SIT chart is not available. MX-M503N ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 4 – 33 . the adjust. grays out and the operation is invalid. execute SIM 63-5 to set the CIS gamma to the default. or [R] (Red) button is selected.08/$7. however.(&87(  ment accuracy is lower when compared with the adjustment method using the SIT chart.08/$7. &&&555 * When the EEPROM on the scanner control PWB is replaced. clean it with alcohol. and the color automatic adjustment execution screen is displayed. the selected button is highlighted and the adjustment value If they are scratched or streaked. In the initial state.(&87( 2&  2) Check to confirm that the patches in BK1 and BK2 arrays of the SIT chart (UKOG-0280FCZZ or UKOG-0280FCZ1) are 3) When a color button is selected. 11-B CIS gamma adjustment (CIS calibration) (DSPF mode)  (DSPF-installed machine only) ǂǂǂ6. the mirror. clean them. NOTE: UKOG-0280FCZZ is equivalent to UKOG-0280FCZ1. the display ture and low humidity. ultraviolet rays) and humidity and temperature.  ǂǂǂ6. 2) Enter the SIM 63-3 mode. (If there is.21ǂǂ12 7(67 &/26( 6&$11(5&2/25%$/$1&($872$'-8670(17 2&    &&&555 000*** <<<%%% (2) Adjustment procedures 1) Set the SIT chart (UKOG-0280FCZZ or UKOG-0280FCZ1) face-down in the DSPF paper feed tray. put it in a bag * If there is a page over []. % * 5 '63) 2&  4) When [DSPF] button is pressed. the adjustment value of the free from dirt and scratches. an active display is shown and the such as a clear file) and store in a dark place of low tempera- page moves up. If there is no page upward. In this case. NOTE: * Only one color button can be selected. (.  ǂǂǂ6. replace with new one.  * When a U2 trouble occurs. selected color is displayed.  * When the scanner control PWB is replaced.

 4) Select [DSPF SHADING].(&87.1* % * 5 (.08/$7.(&87(  MX-M503N ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 4 – 34 . the rear frame until it makes contact with the paper exit roller.21 6+$'.1*(.)   ǂǂǂ6. the display returns to * When [EXECUTE] button is pressed during the automatic the initial screen. displayed. the display returns to the ini- it straight along the guide on the rear frame until the paper tial screen.(&87( 5(68/7  6) After normal completion.1* '63)6+$'. the result of calculation is displayed in the initial screen.08/$7. the display returns to the ence adjustment sheet (UKOG-0330FCZZ) along the guide on sub number entry screen. * When inserting the white reference adjustment sheet.(&87(  % * 5 (.1*'$7$81).(&87.08/$7.  3/($6(&+(&.1* (.21ǂǂ12 7(67 &/26( 2) Close the DSPF paper exit section.7+(&+$57$1'3/$7(1*/$66  ǂǂǂ6. all the error patch numbers are displayed.21ǂǂ12 ǂǂǂ6.21ǂǂ12 &/26( 7(67 6&$11(5&2/25%$/$1&($872$'-8670(17 Guide on the rear frame 6&$11(502725. the automatic adjustment is interrupted.5) Press [EXECUTE] button and it is highlighted and the color * When the operation is completed normally.  ǂǂǂ6. 6&$11(5&2/25%$/$1&($872$'-8670(17 6$035.1*(.21ǂǂ12 7(67 &/26( 7(67 &/26( 6&$11(5&2/25%$/$1&($872$'-8670(17 6&$11(5&2/25%$/$1&($872$'-8670(17 12:&+$573$7&+5($'.1* &203/(7( (. (DSPF-installed machine only) When [CA] key is pressed.08/$7.  ǂǂǂ6. insert When [RESULT] button is pressed. and insert the white refer- [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key is pressed.7 3) Enter the SIM 63-2 mode. When [RESULT] button is pressed. 11-C Shading adjustment (Calibration) * When an error occurs in execution. the following screen is dis.(&87(  * When an error occurs in the automatic adjustment.(&87( 5(68/7  2&6+$'. (The previous value is displayed) detection actuator can be seen through the cut-out section of the white reference adjustment sheet.21ǂǂ12 7(67 &/26( 6+$'. When 1) Open the DSPF paper exit section. (The calculation result of normal completion is adjustment. "COMPLETE" is dis- auto adjustment is executed. the simulation is terminated. played. (DSPF mode) played.61275($'< (.08/$7.

density and gradation adjustment) * The white reference adjustment sheet is transported in the Note that the preliminary jobs before execution of the copy density paper exit direction. a repair. 3) When a repair. be sure to execute DSPF DSPF analog correction level correction. Follow the flowchart of the copy density and gradation adjustment * When [EXECUTE] key is pressed during execution. Patch 2 is slightly copied. servicing conditions. and shading the following jobs. The importance levels of them are shown below. 1) The following items must be adjusted properly.. ADJ 12 Copy quality adjustment Set the copy density level to "Manual 3" in the Text/Printed Photo (Auto printer density and mode (Manual). an inspection. Note for checking the copy mode density To check the density. major cases." is displayed.. [Check with the servicing color test chart (UKOG-0317FCZZ/ UKOG-0317FC11 or UKOG-0326FCZZ/UKOG-0326FC11)] Job Adjustment item list Simulation Check to confirm that it is in the conditions shown below. checked and adjusted when a trouble occurs. 2) When a periodic maintenance is performed. all the picture quality adjustment settings in the user adjustment mode must be set to the default (center). screen. operation is interrupted. the display returns to the sub number entry 4) When an installation. gradation adjustment) In addition. However.5) When [EXECUTE] key is pressed. (Without replacement of a consumable part) <Descriptions of keys> Display Content (2) Copy density and gradation check OC OC analog correction level correction. * When shading is completed normally. or inspection is performed. "SHADING EXECUTING. SHARP gray chart be sure to check to confirm that the related adjustments which SHARP GRAY CHART 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 W will affect the copy density and gradation have been properly completed. (Items which will affect the copy density and gradation but are not required to be adjusted frequently. 6 ADJ CCD ADJ CIS gamma adjustment (CIS 63-3 11 calibration 11B calibration) (DSPF mode) ADJ Shading adjustment 63-2 11C (Calibration) (DSPF mode) MX-M503N ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 4 – 35 . (SIM 44-6) Display Content * Execute the half-tone image correction forcibly. and shading data are obtained during and gradation adjustment depend on the machine status and the transportation. they must be Patch 3 is copied.) than printing. it is highlighted and shading (Relationship between the servicing job contents and the copy is started. * When [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key is pressed during other (When a consumable part is replaced. and shading (Note) SHADING correction data making (Document table mode) Before checking the copy density and gradation. and check INCOMPLETE Incomplete. use the gray test chart (UKOG-0162FCZZ). (1) Note before execution of the copy density and gradation [Check with the gray test chart (UKOG-0162FCZZ)] adjustment In the copy density check with the gray test chart. There are following four. gradation adjustment Before execution of the copy density and gradation adjustment. interruption that it is proper. [EXECUTE] key 1) When installing (as needed) returns to the normal display and "COMPLETED" is dis. or a maintenance is performed. played. check to insure * Requisite conditions before execution of the copy density and the following conditions. * During execution. (SIM 44-26) COMPLETE Normal completion (Method) ERROR Abnormal completion Make a copy of the gray test chart (UKOG-0162FCZZ). the procedures depending on the actual conditions. SHADING correction data making (SPF mode) * Execute the high density image correction (Process correction) <Result display> forcibly.) Patch 1 is not copied. No ADJ Adjust the ADJ Adjust the developing doctor 1 developing 1A gap Serviceman chart (Color patch section) unit ADJ Adjust the developing roller 1B main pole position ADJ Adjusting ADJ Adjust the main charger grid 8-2 2 high voltage 2A voltage values ADJ Adjust the developing bias 8-1 2B voltage ADJ Transfer current and voltage 8-6 2C adjustment Patch 7 is slightly ADJ Scan image focus adjustment copied or not copied.

Are the density and gradation at the NO satisfactory level? YES End Execute manual printer density and gradation adjustment. and auto printer density and sity and gradation adjustment by the serviceman) gradation adjustment This adjustment is needed in the following situations: Flowchart of the auto copy density and gradation adjustment/ auto printer density and gradation adjustment by the serviceman (SIM46-24) * When a consumable part (developer. "OK" is displayed to confirm that the half-tone correction is normally matically. * The scanner control PWB has been replaced. If the balance of the copy density or gradation is lost for some reason. Use SIM 64-5 to print the check pattern. this function does not copy in the Text/Printed Photo mode. Check the printed check pattern for any streaks or unclear copy. and place 5 sheet of white paper on the adjustment pattern sheet. the user can use this adjustment to recover the image Check the result of the copy density and gradation adjustment. (SIM67-25) MX-M503N ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 4 – 36 . however.) correction are displayed. repair and adjustment of the machine can provide normal YES images. and the automatic is automatically performed. quality. (The adjustment pattern is printed. Set the adjustment pattern on the document table. 24 is used. the details of the half-ton user program mode is used. use this method. copy on the printed check pattern. * When the scanner (reading) section is disassembled. and auto printer The adjustment check patterns of the copy mode and the printer density and gradation adjustment by the serviceman (SIM 46. * When the MFP PWB is replaced. c. On the other hand. 3) Set the adjustment pattern sheet on the document table. if there is a fatal problem on the machine. (process control). (The adjustment pattern is scanned. * U2 trouble has occurred. and auto printer den- adjustment.5"R) paper. printer density and gradation adjustment. (SIM46-16) b.) tion adjustment. Note for execution of the auto copy density and gradation adjustment *1: If there is any streak or unclear 1) The print engine section must have been adjusted properly. and press a. check the print engine for any 2) The CCD gamma adjustment must have been adjusted prop- problems. work effectively. and select A3 (11" x 17") or A4R (11" x 8. "Please quit this mode" is displayed. When the half-tone correction (process control) is completed. The auto copy density and gradation adjustment by the user is Cancel SIM 46-24. mode are printed out. and the There are following two modes in the auto copy density and grada. Start * The CCD unit has been replaced. Execute ADJ 12A Auto copy density and gradation adjustment. completed. Adjustment procedure 12-A Auto copy density and gradation (Auto copy density and gradation adjustment. provided to reduce the number of service calls. understood. erly. Press [EXECUTE] key. To perform the adjustment. the automatic copy density and gradation Are the density NO adjustment by the serviceman can be used to obtain normal and gradation at the satisfactory level? picture quality even tough the machine environment is greatly changed. and * When the scanner (reading) unit is replaced. General [EXECUTE] key. and the initial setting of the half tone image correction copy density and gradation adjustment. and check the density. the machine has a fatal problem or when the UKOG-0317FC11 or UKOG-0326FCZZ/UKOG-0326FC11) to make a machine condition is greatly changed. Use the test chart (UKOG-0162FCZZ) or (UKOG-0317FCZZ/ When. Enter the SIM46-24 mode. transfer belt) is replaced. Check the result of the printer density and gradation adjustment. Press [EXECUTE] key to execute the half-ton correction There is no method to execute the automatic density and gra.) SIM 46-24 allows simultaneous execution of the automatic Press [OK] key. To execute the printer density and gradation adjustment auto. the above difference must be fully Execute ADJ 12B Manual copy density and gradation adjustment. adjustment is automatically performed to print the check pattern. OPC drum. 2) Auto copy density and gradation adjustment by the user (The When [RESULT] button is pressed. In addition. (*1) 1) Auto copy density and gradation adjustment. * When the EEPROM on the MFP PWB is replaced. and check the copy density. dation adjustment separately in the copy mode and in the printer mode.) * The EEPROM on the scanner control PWB has been replaced. auto printer density and gradation adjustment.

08/$7.1) Enter the SIM 46-24 mode. According to data of this adjustment.21ǂǂ12 7(67 &/26( (1*. ǂǂǂ6. 5) Press [OK] key on the operation panel. the initial setting of the   half tone image correction is performed.1(+$/)721($872$'-8670(1702'( 5(*8/$5.

21ǂǂ12 7(67 &/26( )257+.).(&87.('7<3(2)$525h56.=(3$3(5 ǂǂǂ6.6$'-8670(17.08/$7.21$1'35.(&87(@72352&21(.177+(7(673$7&+  3/($6(86(63(&. 35(66>(.

(1*.1(+$/)721($872$'-8670(1702'( 5(*8/$5.

A3 (11" x 17") paper is selected.@725(*. Patch A is not copied. If there is no Remark: A4R (11" x 8. played. A B C D E F G H I J K L MN O P Q (Max) Low density High density 4) Press [EXECUTE] key. ING THE NEW TARGET OF HALFTONE PROCON." is dis- cedure 2) on the document table. the initial setting of the half tone image The patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed out. This operation takes several minutes. paper is selected.63$7&+'$7$ (.1(+$/)721($872$'-8670(1702'( 5(*8/$5.08/$7. 7(67 &/26( (1*. Patch C or D is slightly copied.67(57+. "NOW REGISTER- 3) Set the patch image (adjustment pattern) paper printed in pro. The patch density is identical between patches or not reversed. The patch density is changed gradually.507+($'-867('3$7&+$1'35(66>2. within the following specifications.5"R) paper is selected by priority. (A3 (11" x 17") or A4R (11" x 8. The density changing direction must  not be reversed. Place the printed patch image (adjustment pattern) paper on 6) Check the copy gradation and density. the document table so that the thin lines on the paper are on (Method 1) the left side. ǂǂǂ6. During the operation. &21).5"R) paper.21ǂǂ12 Patch C or D is slightly copied. correction is started. After pressing [OK] key.(&87( 2) Press [EXECUTE] key. The print density must be changed gradually from the lighter level to the darker level.5"R) 2.) A4R (11" x 8. Place 5 sheets of white paper on the printed patch Check to insure that the printed copy check patch image is image (adjustment pattern) paper.

) If the automatic adjustment cannot obtain satisfactory copy density and gradation. adjustment pattern for the printer is not printed. (One for each) Wait until the operation panel shown in procedure 5) is displayed. and the copy check patch image and the printer check patch image are printed.'(21'2&80(17*/$66 (Method 2) Use the gray test chart (UKOG-0162FCZZ) or the servicing color test chart (UKOG-0317FCZZ/UKOG-0317FC11 or UKOG-0326FCZZ/UKOG-0326FC11) in the Text/Photo mode (Manual) to check the copy density and gradation.*+7$5($$7/()76. /.(&87( The copy density and gradation adjustment and the printer NOTE: For the U model where no printer option is installed.(&87(@ Patch A must not be copied. MX-M503N ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 4 – 37 . (.17('7(673$7&+21'2&80(17*/$667+(135(66>(. 3/($6(3/$&(35. the density and gradation adjustment are automatically performed. use ADJ 12B manual adjustment (SIM 46-16). (Refer to the item of the copy density and gradation check.

Q (Max) * When the EEPROM on the MFP PWB is replaced.6+ Start Execute ADJ 12B Manual copy density and gradation adjustment.1($872$'-8670(17 Manual copy density and gradation adjustment procedure flowchart 728&+>(. printed.(&87(@7+(1 (SIM 46-16) +$/)721('(16. * When the scanner (reading) section is replaced.  c.2167$57 253/($6(386+&$. and then execute this adjustment for better efficiency. Note for the copy density and gradation adjustment 8) Press [EXECUTE] key to execute the half-tone correction (pro- (Manual adjustment) cess control). and select A3 (11" x 17") or A4R (11" x 8. (The adjustment check pattern is mally completed. RU1*. a. pattern. 12-B Manual copy density and gradation Check to insure that the printed printer check patch image is within the following specifications. * When the scanner (reading) section is disassembled. (*1) Enter the SIM 46-16 mode.1. "Please quit this mode" is displayed. Adjustment procedure ǂǂǂ6. P R INT E R C A L IB RAT ION * The CCD unit has been replaced. The density changing direction must not be reversed. level to the darker level. * When a consumable part (developer. Press [EXECUTE] key.  ǂǂǂ6. Patch A or B is slightly copied. Patch A or B is slightly copied.) (.7) Check the printer density and gradation.21ǂǂ12 Are the density NO 7(67 &/26( at the satisfactory (1*. Select a target adjustment level with the scroll key.21ǂǂ12 7(67 &/26( (1*. 1) The print engine section must have been properly adjusted. b. transfer belt) is The patch density is changed gradually. the details of the half-tone Check the density and gradation of the adjustment check correction are displayed. * The EEPROM on the scanner control PWB has been replaced. A B C D E F G H I J K L MN O P * U2 trouble has occurred.5"R) paper.602'( YES 2.(&87( Check the density and gradation of the adjustment check pattern. (The adjustment check pattern is printed. General The manual copy density and gradation adjustment (manual adjustment) is used when the automatic adjustment previously stated cannot obtain the specified result or a fine adjustment is The print density must be changed gradually from the lighter required and the user requests for customization.08/$7.77+.6352&('85( 3/($6(48.) When [RESULT] button is pressed.(&87. Enter the adjustment value with 10 key. Execute the automatic color balance adjustment in advance.1($872$'-8670(17 level? &203/(7(7+. * When the MFP PWB is replaced. replaced.08/$7. "OK" is displayed to confirm that the half-tone correction is nor- Press [EXECUTE] key. OPC drum. Low density High density * The scanner control PWB has been replaced.7<&255(&7(. When the half-tone correction (process control) is completed. adjustment This adjustment is needed in the following situations: The patch density is identical between patches or not reversed.(<72).

If satisfactory density is not obtained with the adjustment. MX-M503N ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 4 – 38 . (*1) Use the test chart (UKOG-0162FCZZ) or servicing color test chart (UKOG-0317FCZZ/UKOG-0317FC11 or UKOG-0326FCZZ/UKOG-0326FC11) to make a copy in the Text/Printed Photo mode. Perform the initial setting of the half tone image correction. check the print engine for any problems. 5(68/7 5(75< Display Content Are the density NO at the satisfactory COMPLETE Normal completion level? ERROR BLACK SENSOR Black sensor abnormality YES ADJUSTMENT [K] Half-tone correction [K] abnormality End OTHER Other errors *1: 9) Cancel the simulation. and check the density. Cancel SIM 46-16. (SIM 44-21) Check the copy color balance and density adjustment result with the test chart.

1) Enter the SIM46-16 mode.21ǂǂ12 7(67 &/26( (Point) value range (1*.08/$7. 4) Select the point to be adjusted with the scroll key.  Density level Adjustment Item/Display Default ǂǂǂ6.1(*5$<%$/$1&(0$18$/$'-8670(17>$// %:.

17 G POINT7 Point 7 245 .755 500 /˖ ˖32.17 )˖ ˖32.08/$7.(&87( 2.1(*5$<%$/$1&(0$18$/$'-8670(17>$// %:.755 500 10-key EXECUTE M POINT13 Point 13 245 .17 .21ǂǂ12 7(67 &/26( Q POINT17 Point 17 245 .17 I POINT9 Point 9 245 .17 B POINT2 Point 2 245 .17 C POINT3 Point 3 245 .755 500 .17 E POINT5 Point 5 245 .17 H POINT8 Point 8 245 .755 500 (˖ ˖32.755 500 EXECUTE N POINT14 Point 14 245 .755 500 P POINT16 Point 16 245 .755 500 L POINT12 Point 12 245 .17 D POINT4 Point 4 245 .755 500 -˖ ˖32.17 J POINT10 Point 10 245 .755 500 *˖ ˖32.@3* $˖ ˖32.˖ ˖32.˖ ˖32.17 A POINT1 Point 1 245 .755 500 (.755 500 or self print end O POINT15 Point 15 245 .755 500 +˖ ˖32.755 500 $˖  %˖ ˖32.755 500 '˖ ˖32.17 F POINT6 Point 6 245 . K POINT11 Point 11 245 .755 500 (1*.755 500  ǂǂǂ6.755 500 ˷̚˹ &˖ ˖32.

17 decrease the density. use the arrow key to adjust all the 2) Press [EXECUTE] key.5"R) paper.17 5) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key. This is an efficient A4R (11" x 8. the color balance is adjusted on the request from the user. To .755. When the overall density is low. The density changing direction must It takes several minutes to complete the operation. ǂǂǂ6. however.21ǂǂ12 7(67 &/26( +$/)721(352&2167$1'$5'9$/8(5(*.5"R) adjustment values of A . (Execute the initial setting of the half tone image correction.2167$57 A B C D E F G H I J K L MN O P Q (Max) Low density High density (. there is no need to set to the standard color bal- ance stated above.67(5 728&+>(.5) until the condition of 3) is satis- /˖ ˖32.17 To increase the density.17 set to 500.17 . or when the density is high and patch A is copied. tern. "COMPLETE" is displayed. operation is started.(&87(@7+(1(.17 Repeat procedures of 2) . (A3 (11" x 17") or A4R (11" x 8.Q (MAX) to a same level collectively.08/$7. adjust each patch density individually. A4R (11" x 8. (Refer to the item of the copy density and gradation 3) Check that the following specification is satisfied or the density check.(&87( The print density must be changed gradually from the lighter level to the darker level.17 When SIM 46-24 is used to execute the automatic density and (˖ ˖32. Patch A must not be copied. execute the following procedures.˖ ˖32.(&87. When [EXECUTE] key is pressed. it is highlighted and the The patch density is changed gradually. $˖  %˖ ˖32. ˷̚˹ &˖ ˖32. increase the adjustment value.17 fied.) and gradation is satisfactory. *˖ ˖32. If the above conditions are not satisfied. decrease the adjustment value. When. 6) Check the density and gradation of the adjustment check pat- The adjustment check pattern is printed.17 The adjustment value can be set in the range of 245 . all the set values of this simulation are )˖ ˖32. MX-M503N ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 4 – 39 .@3* $˖ ˖32. If there is no way of adjustment. (. Patch C or D is slightly copied. A3 (11" x 17") paper is selected.5"R) paper is selected by priority.   Patch C or D is slightly copied. paper is selected.17 '˖ ˖32. pletion of the operation. After com- not be reversed. Patch A is not copied.) The patch density is identical between patches or not reversed.(&87( 2. 7) Execute SIM 44-21.17 gradation adjustment.17 +˖ ˖32.˖ ˖32. -˖ ˖32.) Then.

08/$7.08/$7.32685($'-8670(17 %:.   ǂǂǂ6.21ǂǂ12 7(67 &/26( +$/)721(352&2167$1'$5'9$/8(5(*.21ǂǂ12 7(67 &/26( ǂǂǂ6. (Normal end (Auto transition)) 1) Enter the SIM 46-2 mode.67(5 (.

67(5  5(68/7 ǂǂǂ6.32685($'-8670(17 %:.*+ 2.>&23<@ 5(68/7 $˖ ˖$872 $˖  %˖ ˖$872 &203/(7( ˷̚˹ &˖ ˖7(.73+272 )˖ ˖35.08/$7.(&87( /2: +.7 '˖ ˖7(. (Abnormal end (Auto transition)) 10-key OK  ǂǂǂ6.17('3+272 (˖ ˖7(.21ǂǂ12 7(67 &/26( (.735.08/$7.21ǂǂ12 7(67 &/26( +$/)721(352&2167$1'$5'9$/8(5(*.17('3+272 *˖ ˖3+272*5$3+ +˖ ˖0$3 5(68/7 (.

99 50 or UKOG-0326FCZZ/UKOG-0326FC11) and a user’s docu- PHOTO HIGH 1 . Normally obtained.73+272 )˖ ˖35. $˖ ˖$872 $˖  %˖ ˖$872 ˷̚˹ &˖ ˖7(. (Refer to the HIGH 1 . G PHOTOGRAPH Photograph LOW 1 . the simulation is canceled.99 50 fied level.99 50 executed. normal copy mode and changing the adjustment value and checking the adjustment result until a satisfactory result is The density is adjusted in each copy mode individually. decrease the adjustment value. This adjustment is required to memory the data as the refer- 2) Select the copy mode to be adjusted with the scroll key.735. execute this adjustment. MX-M503N ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 4 – 40 . ence data for half-tone correction. When the adjustment value is decreased.99 50 Troubleshoot the cause. the copy * When there is necessity to change the density gradient of the density is decreased.99 50 servicing color test chart (UKOG-0317FCZZ/UKOG-0317FC11 D TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed Photo LOW 1 . nately. Switch the simulation mode and the normal copy mode alter- * U2 trouble has occurred. A AUTO1 Auto 1 LOW 1 . be sure to execute this adjust.(&87( /2: +. and try all the procedures of the print image adjustment H MAP Map LOW 1 . select "HIGH" This adjustment is needed in the following situations: mode and change the adjustment value.99 50 ment (Automatic)) is executed.99 50 8) Make a copy of the gray test chart (UKOG-0162FCZZ) or the HIGH 1 . and repair or perform proper treat. HIGH 1 .99 50 from the beginning. this adjustment is automatically B AUTO2 Auto 2 LOW 1 . When there is a request from the user. Immediately after execution of ADJ 12B (Copy density and Setting Default Item/Display Content gradation adjustment (Manual)). When adjust- (Normally unnecessary to adjust) ing the copy density on the high density part.99 50 C TEXT Text LOW 1 .99 50 (Manual).*+ After completion of the operation. To decrease the density. 4) Press [CLOSE] key in this simulation mode to jump to the nor- * When there is necessity to change all copy density by each the mal copy mode. When the adjustment value is increased. HIGH 1 . HIGH 1 . 2. select "LOW" mode and change the adjustment value.99 50 When ADJ 12A (Copy/printer density and gradation adjust. there may be another cause.17('3+272 *˖ ˖3+272*5$3+ +˖ ˖0$3 5(68/7 (. (Overall density adjustment) When adjusting the copy density on the low density part. increase the adjustment value.) F PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo LOW 1 . Repeat switching the adjustment mode (SIM 46-2) and the * When the EEPROM on the MFP PWB is replaced. copy by each the copy mode individually. * When the MFP PWB is replaced. * When there is necessity to change copy density of the low den.99 50 ment according to necessity in the Text/Printed Photo mode E TEXT/PHOTO Text/Photograph LOW 1 . range value ment. To increase the density.99 50 If the copy density and gradation are not adjusted to the speci.99 50 ments. HIGH 1 .99 50 12-C Copy density in each copy mode 3) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key. the copy density is sity and high density part at each copy mode individually.7 '˖ ˖7(.>&23<@ (5525. and check the adjustment result again. Make a copy and check the adjustment result copy mode individually. increased.17('3+272 (˖ ˖7(. and adjust and check the adjustment result.99 50 item of the copy density and gradation check. individual adjustments are not required. HIGH 1 .

ǂǂǂ6.755 500 This is to adjust the density in each copy mode.08/$7.17 ˷̚˹ &˖ ˖32. the adjustment pattern is '˖ ˖32.755 500 ǂǂǂ6. Normally individual E POINT5 Point 5 245 . )˖ ˖32.17 (˖ ˖32.17 /˖ ˖32.755 500 adjustments are not required.17 cally to make a copy and check it.1(*5$<%$/$1&(0$18$/$'-8670(17 $872 $872 7(.21ǂǂ12 7(67 &/26( (1*.17 document.1(*5$<%$/$1&(0$18$/$'-8670(17>$872@ $˖ ˖32.17 +˖ ˖32.17 . . This adjustment is needed in the following situations: * When there is a necessity to change the density and gradation in Adjustment Item/Display Density level (Point) Default value value range each copy mode individually. 12-D Density and gradation adjustment in each 3) Select the density level (point) to be adjusted with the scroll copy mode (Normally not required) key.755 500 4) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key.17 +˖ ˖32.08/$7.755 500 * U2 trouble has occurred.755 500 P POINT16 Point 16 245 .08/$7. B POINT2 Point 2 245 .17 This adjustment is required in the following cases.17 '˖ ˖32.21ǂǂ12 7(67 &/26( Use for the reproducibility adjustment of document background (1*.17 A4R (11" x 8. '3.(&87( 2. $˖  %˖ ˖32. When there is a desire to reproduce the low density )˖ ˖32. . A POINT1 Point 1 245 . When the adjustment value is decreased.17 $˖  %˖ ˖32.17 The density at each density level (point) can be checked by . . When the adjustment value is increased.17 A4R (11" x 8.17 When [EXECUTE] key is pressed.˖ ˖32.17 '˖ ˖32. A3 (11" x 17") paper is selected. it is more practi- /˖ ˖32. '3.755 500 N POINT14 Point 14 245 . all the density levels (points) from the low density point $˖ ˖32. & 0 '3.17 image of the document.7 7(.21ǂǂ12 7(67 &/26( K POINT11 Point 11 245 . '3.755 500 * When the MFP PWB is replaced. This adjustment is executed when F POINT6 Point 6 245 . 10-key 12-E Document background density OK reproducibility adjustment in the auto copy mode (Normally unnecessary to adjust)  ǂǂǂ6.17 -˖ ˖32.1(*5$<%$/$1&(0$18$/$'-8670(17>$872@ That is. ˷̚˹ &˖ ˖32.755 500 7(.17 .17 * U2 trouble has occurred.755 500 * When the EEPROM on the MFP PWB is replaced. -˖ ˖32. D POINT4 Point 4 245 .755 500  J POINT10 Point 10 245 .73573+272 L POINT12 Point 12 245 .17 )˖ ˖32. the density is (.17 $˖  %˖ ˖32. the densities are collectively  adjusted.17 printed out.755 500 1) Enter the SIM 46-10 mode. If there is no *˖ ˖32.755 500 Q POINT17 Point 17 245 . (.(&87(  increased.17 density in auto copy mode. +˖ ˖32. C POINT3 Point 3 245 . the den- $872 sity is decreased.17 . < (.˖ ˖32.˖ ˖32.755 500 H POINT8 Point 8 245 . I POINT9 Point 9 245 . 2) Select the copy mode to be adjusted with the mode key. G POINT7 Point 7 245 .17 -˖ ˖32. However.1(*5$<%$/$1&(0$18$/$'-8670(17>$872@ $˖ ˖32.17 referring to this adjustment pattern.08/$7.(&87( 2.17 *˖ ˖32. < (.17 to the high density point can be adjusted collectively.5"R) paper is selected by priority.755 500 (1*.755 500 O POINT15 Point 15 245 .17 *˖ ˖32.73+272 35.21ǂǂ12 7(67 &/26( (1*. & 0 '3.5"R) paper.17 * When the MFP PWB is replaced.(&87( 2.17 * When there is a desire not to reproduce the background of the (˖ ˖32.17('3+272 3+272 0$3 M POINT13 Point 13 245 . When the arrow key is pressed. [SYSTEM EXECUTE EXECUTE SETTINGS] key or end of print  ǂǂǂ6. * When there is request from the user.17 /˖ ˖32.17 * When the EEPROM on the MFP PWB is replaced.17 (˖ ˖32.755 500 there is a request from the user.17 . ˷̚˹ &˖ ˖32.˖ ˖32.˖ ˖32. MX-M503N ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 4 – 41 .˖ ˖32. '3.

21ǂǂ12 7(67 /.216(77. 12-F Color document reproducibility adjustment  in the copy mode (Normally unnecessary to ǂǂǂ6.1* &/26( adjust) (N model only) $˖ $˖ ˖&23<˖2& Use to adjust the reproducibility of the red image and the yellow  %˖ ˖&23<˖'63)˄6.1) Enter the SIM 46-32 mode.72)$(5($&7.'(.0.08/$7.

'(. ˷̚˹ &˖ ˖&23<˖'63)˄6.

image when copying a color document that includes the red/yellow '˖ ˖6&$1˖2& images.'(. (˖ ˖6&$1˖'63)˄6.

)˖ ˖6&$1˖'63)˄6.'(. This adjustment is required in the following cases.

*˖ ˖)$.'(.˖2& * When there is desire to change reproducibility of yellow/red +˖ ˖)$.˖'63)˄6.

˖'63)˄6.˖ ˖)$. image in case of making a color copy of the color document in .'(.

1* ˷̚˹ $˖ ˖&23<˖2& $˖  %˖ ˖&23<˖'63)˄6.21ǂǂ12 7(67 &/26( % :. 10-key 1) Enter the SIM 46-37 mode.08/$7.21ǂǂ12 7(67 &/26( $˖  %˖ ˖*5DWLR /.72)$(5($&7. OK  ǂǂǂ6. * When the MFP PWB is replaced. * When the EEPROM on the MFP PWB is replaced.216(77. copy mode.0$*(&5($7($'-8670(17%5DWLR  $˖ ˖55DWLR ǂǂǂ6. * U2 trouble has occurred.0. 2.08/$7.'(.

'(. ˷̚˹ &˖ ˖&23<˖'63)˄6.

'˖ ˖6&$1˖2& (˖ ˖6&$1˖'63)˄6.'(.

'(. )˖ ˖6&$1˖'63)˄6.

*˖ ˖)$.'(.˖'63)˄6.˖2& +˖ ˖)$.

.˖ ˖)$.'(.˖'63)˄6.

(&87( (SIDE2) (for DSPF back surface) YES (RSPF) Setting Default  Item/Display Content range value ǂǂǂ6.250 196 %˖ ˷̚˹ C SCAN: OC Scanner mode (OC) 1 .(&87( 10-key DEFAULT 2.250 196 H FAX: DSPF FAX mode 1 .0$*(&5($7($'-8670(17%5DWLR A COPY: OC Copy mode (OC) 1 .250 196 EXECUTE NO B COPY: DSPF Copy mode 1 . reproducibility of the back- ground and the low density image is decreased.21ǂǂ12 2) Select the adjusting mode "COPY: OC".(&87( MX-M503N ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 4 – 42 . "COPY: DSPF/RSPF" 7(67 &/26( % :.250 196 E FAX: OC FAX mode (OC) 1 .250 196 D SCAN: RSPF Scanner mode (RSPF) 1 .250 196 ǂǂǂ6.250 196 $˖ ˖55DWLR $˖  ˖*5DWLR B COPY: RSPF Copy mode (RSPF) 1 .250 196 $˖ $˖  %˖ ˖*5DWLR E SCAN: DSPF Scanner mode 1 .250 196 (SIDE2) (for DSPF back surface) G FAX: OC FAX mode (for OC) 1 .250 196 $5(<28685(" '()$8/7 <(6 12 (.(&87( Item/Display Content range value A COPY: OC Copy mode (for OC) 1 .21ǂǂ12 7(67 &/26( % :.250 196 (SIDE1) (for DSPF front surface) I FAX: DSPF FAX mode 1 .0$*(&5($7($'-8670(17%5DWLR ˖55DWLR D SCAN: OC Scanner mode (for OC) 1 .0$*(&5($7($'-8670(17%5DWLR with the scroll key.08/$7.21ǂǂ12 &/26( 7(67 (SIDE2) (for DSPF back surface) % :. $˖ $˖ ˖55DWLR  %˖ ˖*5DWLR 3) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key.250 196 F FAX: RSPF FAX mode (RSPF) 1 .08/$7.  ǂǂǂ6. When the adjustment value is decreased. '()$8/7 $5(<28685(" <(6 12 (.250 196 '()$8/7 $5(<28685(" <(6 12 (.08/$7.250 196 (SIDE1) (for DSPF front surface)  C COPY: DSPF Copy mode 1 . ˷̚˹ When the adjustment value is increased. reproducibility of the background and the low density image is increased. (DSPF) Setting Default '()$8/7 $5(<28685(" <(6 12 (.250 196 ˷̚˹ (SIDE1) (for DSPF front surface) F SCAN: DSPF Scanner mode 1 .

Adjustment procedures (Front surface copy density adjustment) Item/Display Content Setting range Default value A R-Ratio Gray making setting (R) 0 .2) Select the mode to be adjusted with the scroll key. ǂǂǂ6. a.1000 697  3) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key.1000 303 1) Enter the SIM 46-9 mode.32685($'-8670(17 63).21ǂǂ12 7(67 &/26( (.08/$7. B G-Ratio Gray making setting (G) 0 .

'($˖/2: ˷̚˹ &˖ ˖)$. the density is increased.'($˖+. When (˖ ˖6&$16.'($˖/2: When the adjustment value of the adjustment item A is '˖ ˖&23<6. the copy density of yellow images is increased.08/$7.*+ increased. $˖ ˖&23<6.*+ the adjustment value is decreased. the values are set to the ini.'($˖+.32685($'-8670(17 63). check OC the copy. the density in also decreased. If a satisfactory result is not obtained. the copy density of red images is decreased. When [DEFAULT] key is pressed.'($˖/2: $˖ tial values (Default). When the adjustment value is decreased. 4) Press [OK] key. 5) Make a copy in text/printed photo copy mode (manual).'($˖+.  ǂǂǂ6.  %˖ ˖6&$16. OK Repeat the above procedures until a satisfactory result is obtained.21ǂǂ12 12-G Copy density and gradation adjustment 7(67 &/26( (. )˖ ˖)$.*+ When the adjustment value of the adjustment item B is increased.6.6. return to the SIM 46-37 10-key mode and change the adjustment value. 2& '63) 2.

2& '63) 2.99 47 * When the DSPF CIS unit is replaced. * When the copy density differs on the front surface and on the back surface in the DSPF mode.99 47 SIDEA: exposure adjustment LOW (Low density side) C FAX SIDEA: DSPF FAX mode 1 . A OC COPY DSPF copy mode 1 . * When the DSPF unit is replaced.'($˖+.99 52 HIGH exposure adjustment (High density) MX-M503N ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 4 – 43 . * When the copy density differs in the DSPF mode and in the doc- ument table mode. * When the copy density in the DSPF mode is too low or too high.99 47 LOW exposure adjustment (Low density side) D COPY DSPF copy mode 1 . however.'($˖/2: low density area and the high density area) ˷̚˹ &˖ ˖)$. )˖ ˖)$. Item Button Display Content Setting Default range value * When the DSPF unit is disassembled.'($˖+.*+ It is normally not necessary to perform this adjustment. In the fol.99 52 SIDEA: exposure adjustment HIGH (High density side) F FAX SIDEA: DSPF FAX mode 1 .99 52 SIDEA: exposure adjustment HIGH (High density side) E SCAN DSPF scanner mode 1 .*+ (˖ ˖6&$16. LOW (Low density side) B SCAN DSPF scanner mode 1 .'($˖+. SIDEA: exposure adjustment * When U2 trouble occurs.*+ lowing cases.6. (DSPF mode) (Individual adjustment of the $˖  $˖ ˖&23<6.'($˖/2: %˖ ˖6&$16. this adjustment must be performed.6.'($˖/2: (In the case of DSPF) '˖ ˖&23<6.

99 47 C FAX SIDEA: DSPF FAX mode 1 .99 50 SIDEB: R R 7) Make a copy and check the copy density.21ǂǂ12 7(67 &/26( (. D COPY DSPF copy mode 1 .99 47 A OC COPY DSPF copy mode 1 .99 50 E SCAN DSPF scanner mode 1 .99 50 F FAX SIDEA: DSPF FAX mode 1 . enter a greater number. (High density) 6) Press [CLOSE] key to exit the simulation mode." E SCAN DSPF scanner mode 1 . H BALANCE DSPF color balance 1 .99 50 D COPY DSPF copy mode 1 .99 50 To adjust the density in the low density area.99 52 SIDEB: exposure adjustment SIDEA: exposure adjustment HIGH (High density side) HIGH (High density side) E SCAN DSPF scanner mode 1 .99 50 SIDEB: exposure adjustment SIDEB: B B LOW (Low density side) 2) Press [OC] key to select the front surface copy density adjust. HIGH (High density side) select "COPY SIDE A HIGH.99 47 B SCAN DSPF scanner mode 1 . 2) Press [DSPF] key to select the back surface copy density  adjustment mode. To decrease F FAX SIDEB: DSPF FAX mode 1 . LOW exposure adjustment (Low density side) 3) Select an adjustment mode with the scroll key. enter a smaller number.08/$7.99 47 LOW exposure adjustment LOW exposure adjustment (Low density side) (Low density side) D COPY DSPF copy mode 1 . C FAX SIDEB: DSPF FAX mode 1 .99 52 HIGH exposure adjustment HIGH exposure adjustment (High density) (High density) G BALANCE DSPF color balance 1 .99 50 SIDEB: exposure adjustment 4) Enter an adjustment value with 10-key." To adjust the density in the high density area. select "COPY SIDEB: exposure adjustment SIDE A LOW. ǂǂǂ6.99 47 SIDEB: exposure adjustment SIDEA: exposure adjustment LOW (Low density side) LOW (Low density side) B SCAN DSPF scanner mode 1 . SIDEB: G G (Back surface copy density adjustment) I BALANCE DSPF color balance 1 . G DSPF BALANCE DSPF color balance 1 .99 50 the density.32685($'-8670(17 63).99 50 SIDEB: B B 1) Enter the SIM46-9 mode.99 47 SIDEB: exposure adjustment SIDEA: exposure adjustment LOW (Low density side) LOW (Low density side) C FAX SIDEB: DSPF FAX mode 1 .99 50 LOW (Low density side) SIDEB: G G B SCAN DSPF scanner mode 1 .99 47 I BALANCE DSPF color balance 1 .99 47 SIDEB: R R SIDEB: exposure adjustment H BALANCE DSPF color balance 1 . HIGH exposure adjustment 5) Press [OK] key.99 47 ment mode. HIGH (High density side) To increase the density. Setting Default Item Button Display Content Setting Default range value Item Button Display Content range value A DSPF COPY DSPF copy mode 1 .99 50 A DSPF COPY DSPF copy mode 1 .99 50 Repeat the above procedures until a satisfactory result is obtained.99 52 SIDEB: exposure adjustment SIDEA: exposure adjustment HIGH (High density side) HIGH (High density side) F FAX SIDEB: DSPF FAX mode 1 .

DSPF 7) Make a copy. 6) Press [CLOSE] key to exit the simulation mode.08/$7. To increase the density. '˖ ˖&23<6.'($˖+.*+ select "COPY SIDE B HIGH. 2& '63) 2." To adjust the density in the high density area.'($˖+. Repeat the above procedures until a satisfactory result is obtained.6." )˖ ˖)$.6. 5) Press [OK] key.'($˖/2: SIDE B LOW. select "COPY ˷̚˹ &˖ ˖)$. enter a smaller number. $˖ ˖&23<6.'($˖/2: $˖  %˖ ˖6&$16. To decrease the density. 10-key OK  ǂǂǂ6.'($˖/2: To adjust the density in the low density area. enter a greater number.'($˖+. 3) Select an adjustment mode with the scroll key.32685($'-8670(17 63).*+ 4) Enter an adjustment value with 10-key. and check the copy density.21ǂǂ12 7(67 &/26( (.*+ (˖ ˖6&$16.

'(%˖5 +˖ ˖%$/$1&(6.'(%˖% 2& '63) 2.˖ ˖%$/$1&(6.6.*+ (˖ ˖6&$16.*+ )˖ ˖)$.'(%˖+.'(%˖/2: $˖  %˖ ˖6&$16.'(%˖* .'(%˖+.*+ *˖ ˖%$/$1&(6. $˖ ˖&23<6.'(%˖/2: '˖ ˖&23<6.'(%˖+. MX-M503N ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 4 – 44 .6.'(%˖/2: ˷̚˹ &˖ ˖)$.

This adjustment is to set Enable/Disable of the above user opera- * When the RSPF unit is replaced. In the fol. This adjustment is required in the following cases. (Front surface copy density adjustment) When set to enable.  ǂǂǂ6.12-H Copy density and gradation adjustment 12-I Automatic copy and printer density and (RSPF mode) (Individual adjustment of the gradation adjustment by the user low density area and the high density area) (Setting of ENABLE/DISABLE of the (In the case of RSPF) automatic copy density and gradation It is normally not necessary to perform this adjustment. tion with SIM 26-53. operation procedures must be fully 1) Enter the SIM 46-9 mode. adjustment of the copy and the printer density and gradation. adjustment. the user can execute the automatic ument table mode. In the user program mode. and the adjustment) lowing cases. 7(67 &/26( (.08/$7. General * When the copy density differs in the RSPF mode and in the doc. NOTE: This setting must be set to ENABLE only when the user’s * When U2 trouble occurs.32685($'-8670(17 63). this adjustment must be performed. * When the copy density in the RSPF mode is too low or too high.21ǂǂ12 * U2 trouble has occurred. Adjustment procedures ational ability is judged enough to execute the adjustment. understanding on the automatic adjustment of the copy and the printer density and gradation as well as the user’s oper- a. a. however. * When the RSPF unit is disassembled. explained to the user.

Setting procedure 1) Enter the SIM 26-53 mode.21 $˖ ˖ <(612.08/$7. $˖  %˖ ˖6&$1˖/2: * When the PCU PWB is replaced.%5$7. $˖ ˖&23<˖/2: * When the EEPROM on the MFP PWB is replaced. * When the MFP PWB is replaced.*+ * When the EEPROM of the PCU PWB is replaced.1*2)$8720$7. 10-key OK  ǂǂǂ6. ˷̚˹ &˖ ˖)$.&*5$<&$/. b.˖/2: '˖ ˖&23<˖+.21ǂǂ12 7(67 &/26( (1$%/. 2.

32685($'-8670(17 63).21ǂǂ12 7(67 &/26( ˷̚˹ (.08/$7.  $˖  ǂǂǂ6.

$˖ ˖&23<˖/2: $˖  %˖ ˖6&$1˖/2: ˷̚˹ &˖ ˖)$.˖/2: '˖ ˖&23<˖+. 2) Select an adjustment mode with the scroll key.%5$7. To adjust the density in the low density area.&*5$<&$/.21 adjustment (Low density side) $˖ ˖ <(612." To adjust the density in the high density area." OK Setting Default Item Display Content range value  ǂǂǂ6. select 10-key "COPY HIGH.1*2)$8720$7. 2.99 48 7(67 (1$%/.21ǂǂ12 &/26( A COPY: LOW RSPF copy mode exposure 1 .08/$7.*+ 2. select "COPY LOW.

4) Press [OK] key. 6) Make a copy and check the copy density. F FAX: HIGH RSPF FAX mode exposure 1 .99 53 adjustment (High density side) E SCAN: HIGH RSPF scanner mode 1 . B SCAN: LOW RSPF scanner mode 1 . MX-M503N ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 4 – 45 .99 53 adjustment (High density) 3) Enter an adjustment value with 10-key. To decrease the density. 5) Press [CLOSE] key to exit the simulation mode.99 48 $˖  exposure adjustment ˷̚˹ (Low density side) C FAX: LOW RSPF FAX mode exposure 1 .99 48 adjustment (Low density side) D COPY: HIGH RSPF copy mode exposure 1 . To increase the density. enter a greater number. enter a smaller number.99 53 exposure adjustment (High density side) 2. Repeat the above procedures until a satisfactory result is obtained.

After completion of the adjustment. (Method 1) When disabling. the menu of the automatic adjust- ment of the user copy color balance and density is not displayed in the user program mode.5"R (Method 2) paper. zation. Set the patch image so that the light density area is on the left side.5"R) paper. Execute the automatic adjustment of ADJ 12A in advance. set to "0" (NO). If there is no A4R (11" x 8. place 5 sheets of white paper on the above patch The patch density is identical between patches or not reversed. A B C D E F G H I J K L MN O P Q (Max) Low density High density 6) Press [EXECUTE] key. A3 (11" x 17") paper is selected.2) Select ENABLE or DISABLE with 10-key. set to "1" Execute SIM 64-5 to print the print test pattern. When this is set to DISABLE.) At that time. P R INT E R C A L IB RAT ION Thin line Patch A or B is slightly copied. The density changing direction must not be reversed. (When the adjustment pattern is printed on A4R or 11" x 8. Set each set value to the default and press [EXECUTE] key. print test pattern is printed. When enabling. and * Execute the high density image correction (Process correction) then execute this adjustment for better efficiency. forcibly. The density changing direction must not be adjustment pattern patch faces in the sub scanning direction. 5) Set the patch image (adjustment pattern) printed in procedure 4) on the document table. The patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed out. the display returns to the original operation screen. document table. or when a (Note) fine adjustment is required. The copy and the printer density and gradation adjustment is automatically executed. (Automatic adjustment of the copy and the printer density and gra- dation) Remark: 1) Enter the system setting mode. be sure to exe. 4) Press [EXECUTE] key. or when the user requests for customi- Before checking the printer density and gradation. reversed. (SIM 44-6) * The half-tone image correction is forcibly executed. A4R (11" x 8. The print density must be changed gradually from the lighter level to the darker level. 2) Enter the copy setting mode. (1) Note before execution of the printer density and gradation a. cute the following procedures in advance. ADJ 13 Printer quality adjustment Patch A or B is slightly copied. The 3) Press [OK] key. this adjustment is executed manually. place the adjustment pattern paper vertically on the Execute SIM 67-25 to print the adjustment check pattern. image (adjustment pattern). 3) Press the auto calibration key. (SIM 44-26) MX-M503N ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 4 – 46 . General adjustment When the printer density and gradation are not within the specified (2) Printer density and gradation check range in the previous automatic adjustment of ADJ 12A. this This adjustment is needed in the following situations: adjustment is not required. (Yes). (Printer density and gradation 13-A Manual printer density and gradation adjustment) adjustment NOTE: For the U model where no printer function is provided. The patch density is changed gradually. * When the copy density and gradation adjustment is required.5"R) paper is selected by priority. The print density must be changed gradually from the lighter level Place the adjustment pattern on the document table so that the to the darker level.

08/$7.17 '˖ ˖32. check the print engine for any problems.b.21ǂǂ12 Check the printer density and gradation adjustment result.17 A4R (11" x 8.21ǂǂ12 7(67 &/26( Enter the adjustment value with 10-key.1(*5$<%$/$1&(0$18$/$'-8670(173* $˖ ˖32.17 satisfactory level? -˖ ˖32.17 pattern.17 )˖ ˖32.21ǂǂ12 7(67 &/26( 35.5"R) paper. .1(*5$<%$/$1&(0$18$/$'-8670(173* $˖ ˖32.17 )˖ ˖32.17 Press [EXECUTE] key.17 and gradation at the NO +˖ ˖32.17 '˖ ˖32.˖ ˖32. Manual printer density and gradation adjustment procedure flowchart  (SIM 67-25) ǂǂǂ6. 7(67 &/26( 35.(&87( 2. 35. *˖ ˖32. End *1: If satisfactory density is not obtained with the adjustment.17 Execute ADJ 13A Manual printer density and gradation adjustment.˖ ˖32.  ǂǂǂ6.17 *˖ ˖32.17 .17 at the satisfactory /˖ ˖32.) ˷̚˹ &˖ ˖32.17 (.17 (˖ ˖32.17 Are the density *˖ ˖32.17 Check the density and gradation of the adjustment check (˖ ˖32.17 Use SIM 64-5 to print the check pattern.17 .17 level? (.˖ ˖32.17(5(1*.17 $˖  %˖ ˖32. Press [EXECUTE] key.17 $˖  %˖ ˖32. (The adjustment pattern is printed.17 (*1) +˖ ˖32.) Check the density and gradation of the adjustment check 10-key pattern.17 YES (. YES EXECUTE EXECUTE Cancel SIM 67-25. Adjustment procedure 1) Enter the SIM 67-25 mode.17 and check the printer density. )˖ ˖32.17 +˖ ˖32.˖ ˖32.17 -˖ ˖32. or self print end  ǂǂǂ6.(&87( 2.17 Are the density NO .17 (˖ ˖32.08/$7.17 Enter the SIM 67-25 mode. MX-M503N ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 4 – 47 . (The adjustment pattern is printed.08/$7. ˷̚˹ &˖ ˖32.17 . $˖  %˖ ˖32.17(5(1*.17 '˖ ˖32.17 Start ˷̚˹ &˖ ˖32. OK Select a target adjustment density level with the scroll key.17 .17 /˖ ˖32. and select A3 (11" x 17") or -˖ ˖32.˖ ˖32.17 /˖ ˖32.17(5(1*.˖ ˖32.1(*5$<%$/$1&(0$18$/$'-8670(173* $˖ ˖32.(&87( 2.

If there is no  ǂǂǂ6.2) Press [EXECUTE] key. paper is selected.08/$7. (A3 (11" x 17") or A4R (11" x 8.) A4R (11" x 8.5"R) paper.32685(02'(6(783 %:$(. A3 (11" x 17") paper is selected.21ǂǂ12 7(67 &/26( A4R (11" x 8.5"R) paper is selected by priority.5"R) 1) Enter the SIM 46-19 mode. (.

P R INT E R C A L IB RAT ION  Patch A or B is slightly copied.) way of adjustment. $(B:. No relation- ship to PRESCAN MODE Operation in auto copy mode: ADJ 14 Automatic setting of exposure When the density of the document of the read area is light. use the arrow key to adjust all the decides the output image density according to the density adjustment values of A .255 (1 . For contents of each setting item. AE_STOP_SCAN Auto B/W exposure REALTIME/STOP STOP Patch A or B is slightly copied. * When the MFP PWB is replaced. 5) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key. The patch density is changed gradually. $(B6723B6&$1 ˖ 5($/7. the density of that part. all the STOP: set values of this simulation are set to 50. decides the output image density according to decrease the density. ˖ 2)) 21 and the gradation are satisfactory. however. MX-M503N ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 4 – 48 . decrease the adjustment value. adjust each patch density individually. A B C D E F G H I J K L MN O P 2) Set REALTIME or STOP to adjustment item AE STOP COPY. Stop (for scanner) When.Q (MAX) to a same level collectively. there is no need to set to the standard setting NORMAL density and gradation stated above. The density changing direction must Stop (for FAX) not be reversed. When a copy with correct density is not obtained by type of docu- ment. refer to below. and patch A is copied. (leading edge of document) x 100 mm (width).5) until the condition of 3) is satis. Use for setting the condition of read operation (Exposure) for docu- ment density in auto copy mode. change the setting. output copy. stant at whole area. AE WIDTH FULL: 6) Cancel SIM 67-25. Reads the density of 3 . Change the setting value of "AE WIDTH" item to "FULL" or "PART". MODE2 MODE2 mode AE_STOP_COPY Auto B/W exposure REALTIME/STOP STOP Stop (for copy) The print density must be changed gradually from the lighter AE_STOP_FAX Auto B/W exposure ON/OFF ON level to the darker level./7(5 ˖ 62)7 1250$/ 6+$53 If not. * When the EEPROM on the MFP PWB is replaced. * When a copy with correct density is not obtained in auto mode. the density and the gradation are adjusted on AE_FILTER Auto exposure filter SOFT NORMAL the request by the user. Default Item/Display Content Set value value AE_MODE Auto exposure MODE1. execute the following procedures. scan.7 mm The print test pattern is printed. SHARP AE_WIDTH AE exposure width FULL/PART FULL 4) Select the adjustment point with the scroll key. mode operating conditions in output image density is increased by control.99). When the density of the document of the read area is dark.) fied. This is an efficient may be not constant at whole area. and FAX image density is decreased by control. MODE2: Normal gamma When SIM 46-24 is used to adjust the automatic density. (The output image density is con- Repeat procedures of 2) . Document density reading area in auto mode is 3 . To document.0( 6723 35(6&$1 $(B). * U2 trouble has occurred. AE WIDTH PART: Set each set value to the default and press [EXECUTE] key. NOTE: MODE1: High gamma (Improves the image contrast) The adjustment value is set in the range of 0 .'7+ ˖ )8// 3$57 The patch density is identical between patches or not reversed. Document density reading area in auto mode is 3 . $(B02'( ˖ The adjustment check pattern is printed.7 mm area from leading edge of To increase the density. No relation- 7) Use SIM 64-5 to print the print test pattern and check the print ship to PRESCAN MODE density and gradation.0( 02'( 6723 35(6&$1 3) Check that the following specification is satisfied or the density $(B6723B)$.7 mm (leading edge of document) x Document width. of each part of the document. in Q (Max) Low density High density some cases. (The output image density Then. This adjustment is required in the following cases. increase the adjustment value. or when the density is high Reads the density of width of the document one by one. REALTIME: When the overall density is low. $(B6723B&23< ˖ 02'( 5($/7.

21$'-8670(17 (.21ǂǂ12 3 to 7mm 7(67 &/26( %<3$6675$<$'-8670(17 0$.08/$7.326.(&87( EXECUTE Document table mode  ǂǂǂ6.21ǂǂ12 7(67 &/26( DSPF mode %<3$6675$<$'-8670(17 3 $.(&87(@7267$57 AE WIDTH = FULL (.(&87.7.08/$7.326.21$'-8670(17 35(66>(.21ǂǂ12 7(67 &/26( 3 to 7mm %<3$6675$<$'-8670(17 0$.7.1* 100mm AE WIDTH = PART (.(&87(  ǂǂǂ6.08/$7. 1) Enter the SIM 40-2 mode. Document table/DSPF mode  ǂǂǂ6.

(&87(@7267$57 3 to 7mm 100mm AE WIDTH = PART (. * The EEPROM of the PCU PWB has been replaced. * The PCU PWB has been replaced.7.(&87( EXECUTE Repeat the above procedure to adjust the A4R width MIN POSITION.(&87( * The manual paper feed tray unit has been replaced.21$'-8670(17 35(66>(.08/$7. MX-M503N ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 4 – 49 . * U2 trouble has occurred.21ǂǂ12 7(67 &/26( %<3$6675$<$'-8670(17 &203/(7( ADJ 15 Paper size detection adjustment 15-A Manual paper feed tray paper width sensor adjustment This adjustment is needed in the following situations: * The manual paper feed tray section has been disassembled. (. Document density detection area  ǂǂǂ6.326.

display. 6) Open the DSPF/RSPF paper feed guide to the width for the A5R size. * The EEPROM on the scanner PWB has been replaced. 3) Press [EXECUTE] key. 8) Open the DSPF/RSPF paper feed guide to the minimum width The minimum width position detection level of the manual position. paper feed guide is recognized. MX-M503N ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 4 – 50 . [EXECUTE] key is highlighted. * The DSPF/RSPF paper feed tray unit has been replaced. Then it returns to the normal display.(&87(@7267$57 3) Press [EXECUTE] key. 7) Press [EXECUTE] key. The maximum width detection level is recognized. Set the manual paper feed guide to the width for the A4R size. 4) Open the DSPF/RSPF paper feed guide to the width for the A4R size. 8) Open the manual paper feed guide to the minimum width posi- tion. Then it returns to the normal display. position. When the operation is completed normally. 6) Set the manual paper feed guide to the width for the A4R size. * When a U2 trouble occurs. The maximum width position detection level of the manual paper feed guide is recognized.08/$7. 15-B DSPF/RSPF paper feed tray paper width sensor adjustment This adjustment is needed in the following situations: * The DSPF/RSPF paper feed tray section has been disassem- bled. If the above operation is not completed normally.21ǂǂ12 7(67 &/26( 63)75$<$'-8670(17 75$<92/0$. Then it returns to the normal (. [EXECUTE] key is highlighted.2) Open the manual paper feed guide to the maximum width posi- tion. * The scanner PWB has been replaced. The A4R width detection level is recognized. Then it returns to the normal The A5R width detection level is recognized. 7) Press [EXECUTE] key. "ERROR" is displayed. 1) Enter the SIM 53-6 mode. 5) Press [EXECUTE] key. 5) Press [EXECUTE] key. 9) Press [EXECUTE] key. The A4 size width position detection level of the manual paper 2) Open the DSPF/RSPF paper feed guide to the maximum width feed guide is recognized.75$<$'-8670(17 35(66>(. the above data are saved to the memory and "COMPLETE" is displayed.  ǂǂǂ6.(&87( display. [EXECUTE] key is highlighted. [EXECUTE] key is highlighted. 4) Set the manual paper feed guide to the A4 size.

) 2) Execute the sensor adjustment without document.21ǂǂ12 7(67 &/26( Adjustment 3'6(1625&+(&. 16-A Document size sensor detection point adjustment 1) Enter the SIM 41-1 mode. 3) Place A3 (11" x 17") paper on the document table and press [EXECUTE] key.08/$7. failed 2&6: 3' 3' 3' 3' 3' 3' 3' Adjustment completed EXECUTE  Loosen the original cover switch actuator adjustment screw and slide the actuator position so that the display OCSW is returned to the normal display when the height of the arm unit top from the table glass is 32  0.9) Press [EXECUTE] key. ADJ 16 Document size detection adjustment (Document table mode) This adjustment is needed in the following situations: * When the original size sensor section has been disassembled.5mm by slowly tilting the doc- ument detection arm unit in the arrow direction and adjust. sensor * When each of the above operations has been completed. "DOCUMENT PHOTO 32+ -0. If the adjustment is completed normally.5mm SENSOR LEVEL IS ADJUSTED" is displayed. the "ERROR" message appears. 16-B Adjust the sensitivity of the original size The minimum width detection level is recognized. without placing a document on the table glass.   ǂǂǂ6. the doc- ument detection function may malfunction. 1) Enter the SIM 41-2 mode. * When the EEPROM on the scanner control PWB is replaced. EXECUTE * When the scanner control PWB is replaced. press [EXECUTE] key. ations has failed. * When the original size sensor section has been replaced. when any of the oper. With the document cover open. (If the ON timing of the original cover switch is shifted. MX-M503N ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 4 – 51 . * When U2 trouble has occurred. the "COMPLETE" message appears.

&( 1) Enter the SIM 65-1 mode. image loss. Check to confirm that there is no shift between the display frame and the detection position when the touch panel is pressed. 3) Select the paper feed tray with paper in it with the key button.(&87(  image off-center.17ǂ$'- 5(68/7 '$7$  2) Select [BK-MAG ADJ] with the key button. $872.21$'-8670(176(59. and void area adjust- ment (Manual adjustment) (Menu in SIM 50-28 mode) Item/Display Content OC ADJ Image loss off-center sub scanning direction image magnification ratio adjustment (Document table mode) BK-MAG ADJ Main scanning direction image magnification ratio adjustment SPF ADJ Image loss off-center sub scanning direction image magnification ratio adjustment (DSPF mode) SETUP/PRINT Print lead edge adjustment. * When pressing the touch panel. image off-center (each ADJ paper feed tray. never use a sharp tip (such as a needle or a pin). 2) Precisely press the cross mark points (4 positions).&( &/26( In case of an error. 7(67 $872. When the cross mark is pressed precisely. (Automatic adjustment) 5) Set the adjustment pattern on the document table.ADJ 17 Touch panel coordinate setting 18-A Print image main scanning direction image magnification ratio automatic adjustment This adjustment is needed in the following situations: (Document table mode) * The operation panel has been replaced. It takes less time to use this adjustment than to use the NOTE: Fit the adjustment pattern correctly with the document following manual adjustments. %. * ADJ 3B Print engine image magnification ratio adjustment (Main scanning direction) * ADJ 3C Print engine print area (void area) adjustment * ADJ 3D Print engine image off-center adjustment * ADJ 7 Scan image magnification ratio adjustment (Manual adjustment) * ADJ 10 Copy image position. 2&ǂ$'. a buzzer sounds (Any paper size will do. image 4) Press [EXECUTE] key.21ǂǂ12 7(67 &/26( * The EEPROM on the scanner control PWB has been replaced. magnification ratio adjustment The color patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed out.08/$7. (Any direc- tion) The following adjustment items can be executed automatically with SIM 50-28. * U2 trouble has occurred.21ǂǂ12 play returns to the simulation sub number entry screen. guide.  ǂǂǂ6.7.) and the display is reversed.0$*(326.0$*(326.08/$7. 1) Enter the SIM50-28 mode.21$'-8670(176(59. * The scanner control PWB has been replaced. 6(78335.7.0$*ǂ$'- 63)ǂ$'. ADJ 18 Image lead edge position. When all the four points are pressed and the touch panel adjustment is completed. the display returns to the entry screen 0)7 &6 &6 again.  ǂǂǂ6. duplex mode) adjustment RESULT Adjustment result display DATA Display of data used when an adjustment is executed MX-M503N ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 4 – 52 . (. the dis.

&( guide.0$*(326.6) Press [EXECUTE] key. 6) Set the adjustment pattern on the document table.08/$7.21ǂǂ12 7(67 &/26( ǂǂǂ6.7.(&87( The following item is automatically adjustment.   ǂǂǂ6.(&87.7.21ǂǂ12  NOTE: Fit the adjustment pattern correctly with the document 7(67 &/26( $872. 4) Select a paper feed tray to be adjusted.0$*(326.(&87(  * Print image main scanning direction image magnification ratio 5) Press [EXECUTE] key.21$'-8670(176(59.0$* . (Any direc- tion) ǂǂǂ6.21$'-8670(176(59. The adjustment result becomes valid. 7) Press [OK] key.&( 12:(.21$'-8670(176(59. (.21ǂǂ12 7(67 &/26( $872. %.08/$7. The color patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed out.&( $872.1* 0)7 &6 &6 $'8 &6 &6 /&& (.0$*(326.7.08/$7.

7.21$'-8670(176(59.17ǂ$'- 5(68/7 '$7$  (Note) By pressing [LEAD] or [OFFSET] button.7.  ǂǂǂ6. * Print image lead edge image position adjustment * Print image off-center adjustment 8) Press [OK] key.&( 2&ǂ$'- 63)ǂ$'- %. %.21$'-8670(176(59.0$*(326. The adjustment result becomes valid.21ǂǂ12 7(67 &/26( $872. 18-C Copy lead edge image reference position 3) Select [ALL] with the key button.7.  ǂǂǂ6. 6(78335.08/$7.17ǂ$'- 7) Press [EXECUTE] key.0$*ǂ$'- 63)ǂ$'.21$'-8670(176(59.17 5(6&$1 5(75< '$7$ 2. image off-center. sub scanning direction image magnification ratio ǂǂǂ6. Perform procedures 4) to 7) for each paper feed tray.  2) Select [SETUP/PRINT] ADJ with the key button.&( 2&ǂ$'.&( /($' 2))6(7 (Document table mode) $// 1) Enter the SIM50-28 mode. MX-M503N ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 4 – 53 .0$*ǂ$'- 6(78335. the following items can be executed individually.21ǂǂ12 7(67 &/26( $872.0$*(326. adjustment.08/$7.0$*(326. 18-B Image off-center automatic adjustment (Each paper feed tray) 1) Enter the SIM50-28 mode. both of the above two items are executed simultaneously. 5(35. 5(68/7 '$7$ The following item is automatically adjustment. * [LEAD]: Print image lead edge image position adjustment * [OFFSET]: Print image off-center adjustment  When [ALL] is selected.21ǂǂ12 7(67  &/26( automatic adjustment $872.08/$7.

18-D Copy image off-center.'( 6.0$*(326.21&203/(7( $872.7. and the machine starts self-print of DSPF/RSPF adjustment patterns.21$'-8670(176(59.21$'-8670(176(59. sub scanning direction image magnification ratio SIDE2: DSPF/RSPF adjustment for the back side automatic adjustment ALL: DSPF/RSPF adjustment for both the front and back sides 4) Select one of the cassettes that can be used to print DSPF/ RSPF adjustment patterns.2) Select [OC ADJ] with the key button. image SIDE1: DSPF/RSPF adjustment for the front side off-center.21ǂǂ12 7(67 &/26( $872.21ǂǂ12 7(67 &/26( $872. 7) Press [OK] key. The adjustment result becomes valid.0$*ǂ$'- 63)ǂ$'. * The screen shows a message indicating that the machine is self-printing DSPF/RSPF adjustment patterns.  ǂǂǂ6.'(  $// ǂǂǂ6.&( 12:(. sub scanning direction image 5) Set the adjustment pattern on the document table. %. Select [ALL] with the key button. image lead edge The color patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed out.08/$7.0$*(326.&( 6.0$*(326.08/$7.7. guide.08/$7.7.)  ǂǂǂ6. The following item is automatically adjustment. 3) Select the paper feed tray with paper in it with the key button. (Multiple selection is not allowed. (Any paper size will do. position. 6(78335.0$*(326. the next screen appears where you can start DSPF/RSPF adjustments.7.7.&( 3/($6(386+&$.21$'-8670(176(59.08/$7.(&87(  4) Press [EXECUTE] key.08/$7.1*  3) Proceed to one of the three screens for selecting the cassette (.(< 0)7 &6 &6  (.(&87.17ǂ$'- 5(68/7 '$7$  2) Press the [SPF ADJ] button.0$*(326. 7(67 $872.(&87( used to print DSPF/RSPF adjustment patterns by selecting the corresponding button.) 5) Press the [EXECUTE] button.21$'-8670(176(59. When self-print finishes.&( 7(67 &/26( 6. * Copy lead edge image reference position adjustment.08/$7. MX-M503N ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 4 – 54 .21ǂǂ12  7(67 &/26( ǂǂǂ6.  ǂǂǂ6.&( 2&ǂ$'.21ǂǂ12 $872.21$'-8670(176(59. magnification ratio automatic adjustment (Any direction) (DSPF/RSPF mode) NOTE: Fit the adjustment pattern correctly with the document 1) Enter the SIM50-28 mode.21ǂǂ12 &/26( 6) Press [EXECUTE] key.

the next screen appears where you can view the results of the adjustments. * To have the machine start re-reading the DSPF/RSPF adjustment patterns (front and back sides). 7) Press the [EXECUTE] button. Normally there is no need to perform this adjustment. DSPF/RSPF adjustment patterns (for the back side). DSPF/RSPF adjustment patterns again. you can return to the cassette selection screen and have the machine self-print DSPF/RSPF adjustment patterns (for the front and back sides) again. Change the actual fixing position accord- 9) Press the [EXECUTE] button. * By pressing the [REPRINT] button. ADJ 19 Fusing paper guide position After the machine has finished calculating the adjustment adjustment amount for the front side. • DSPF/RSPF original leading edge adjustment (back side) • DSPF/RSPF original off-center adjustment (back side) • DSPF/RSPF sub-scan magnification ratio adjustment (back side) 10) The adjustment result screen appears. In the follow- ment patterns (for the back side). you can return to the cassette selection screen and have the machine self-print DSPF/RSPF adjustment patterns again. * When wrinkles are generated on paper. reading and calculating DSPF/RSPF adjustment patterns * To return to the result screen. and the machine starts loading ing to the condition. reading DSPF/RSPF adjustment patterns (for the back side). The standard fixing position is one scale lower than the center of the marking scale. change the position * The screen shows a message indicating that the machine is in the arrow direction B. • DSPF/RSPF sub-scan magnification ratio adjustment (front 1) Loosen the fusing paper guide fixing screws which are on two side) position in the front/rear frame direction. shift the paper guide in the arrow direction A or B. perform this adjustment. press the [DATA] button. * By pressing the [REPRINT] button. press the [OK] button. After the machine has finished calculating the adjustment amount for the back side. and the machine starts reading DSPF/RSPF adjustment patterns (for the front side). * When wrinkles are made on paper in the fusing section. press the [BACK] button. 11) To save the adjustment values into EEPROM and RAM and * The screen shows a message indicating that the machine is return to the top menu.6) DSPF/RSPF adjustment patterns are loaded into the DSPF/ <Adjustment item list> RSPF. the back side) after it has read the patterns for the back side. This screen shows the current values along with the previous values in parentheses. press the [RES- CAN] button. The machine starts calculating the adjustment amount (for the front side) after it has read the patterns for the front side. MX-M503N ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 4 – 55 . * To display the data used for adjustment. * When an image deflection or an image blur is generated in the paper rear edge section. (for the front side). 8) DSPF/RSPF adjustment patterns are loaded into the DSPF/ 2) Use the fusing paper guide position scale as the reference to RSPF. ing cases. A B * By pressing the [REPRINT] button. • DSPF/RSPF original leading edge adjustment (front side) * When an image deflection or an image blur is generated in the • DSPF/RSPF original off-center adjustment (front side) paper rear edge section. press the [RETRY] button. change the position in the The machine starts calculating the adjustment amount (for arrow direction A. you can return to the * To return to the top menu without saving the adjustment val- cassette selection screen and have the machine self-print ues into EEPROM and RAM. <Adjustment item list> * When a paper jam occurs in the fusing section. the next screen appears where you can have the machine start reading DSPF/RSPF adjust.

operation. turn OFF/ON the main power source. (Note for the simulation mode) Do not turn OFF the power switch on the operation panel when the machine is in the simulation mode. A. 4) Select an item with the scroll key and the item key. press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key. setting. counters. MX-M503N SIMULATION 5 – 1 .[5] SIMULATION MX-M503N Service Manual 1. * Canceling the simulation mode to return to the normal mode 1) Press [CA] key. Basic operation (1) Starting the simulation * Entering the simulation mode 1) Copy mode key ON  Program key ON  Asterisk (*) key ON  CLEAR key ON  Asterisk (*) key ON  Ready for input of a main code of simulation 2) Entering a main code with the 10-key  START key ON. Press [START] key or [EXECUTE] key to start the simu- lation operation. setting. to display the machine operating status. General (Including basic operations) The simulation mode has the following functions. and make various setups and adjustments speedily for improving the serviceability of the machine. 3) Entering a sub code with the 10-key  START key ON. data check. The operating procedures and displays depend on the design of the operation panel of the machine. clear. If the power switch should be turned OFF in the simulation mode. 7) Various (adjustments. Or select a main code with the SIM key on the touch panel. identify the trouble position and causes in an earlier stage. 1) Various adjustments 2) Setting of the specifications and functions 3) Canceling troubles 4) Operation check 5) Counters check. clear 6) Machine operating conditions (operation hysteresis). a malfunction may be resulted. etc. When canceling the current simulation mode to change the main code and the sub code. 5) The machine enters the mode corresponding to the selected item. In this case.) data transport.

the 10-key. YES Press the EXECUTE button Data clear ? and OK button. NO If there is no item. YES Press the EXECUTE button Operation check ? and OK button. YES Is it the same simulation main code? YES In the power OFF/ON type Standby for entry of SIM <Exclusion type> simulation. printing type. MX-M503N SIMULATION 5 – 2 . Enter the new setting and Press the EXECUTE button adjustment values. item with the scroll key to perform another and the item key. NO The display is made according to the selected some and the item. START (Copy mode) Press the Program key. and OK button. OFF/ON Is there a sub code ? sub code You have to exit messages is simulation mode Press the SYSTEM displayed by the NO before entering into SETTINGS key SYSTEM Enter SIM sub code with this mode for self YES SETTINGS key. Press the asterisk (*) key. The main code of SIM is displayed. NO Press the START button. NO Do you YES Operation is made according want to end the Press the clear all key. to the selected mode and item. Press the clear key. change) ? (Other modes) The display is made according to the selected mode and the item. Standby for entry of Press the SYSTEM SIM code. Press the asterisk (*) key. NO The selected mode and the item are cleared. YES Adjustments NO Operation is made according or setting (counter data to the selected mode and the item. Do you NO want to change the content ? The changed content YES is stored. SETTINGS key Enter the main code of SIM with the 10-key. Select the mode and the Do you want NO Press the START button. simulation ? The simulation mode is canceled. simulation ? YES Press the EXECUTE button Operating conditions check ? and OK button.

and control circuit. 2 Used to display the number of total mis-feed and the number of troubles. 11 Used to display the use frequency of send/receive of FAX. 17 . 2 Used to check the operations of each fan and its control circuit. 3 2 Used to check the operations of the sensors and the detectors in the finisher and the control Finisher circuit. Finisher 10 Used to adjust the finisher. 23 2 Used to output the trouble history list of paper jam and mis-feed. 6 Used to print information on various settings. Scanner (reading) 2 Used to check the sensors in the scanner (reading) section and the related circuits. Others 7 1 Used to set the operating conditions of aging. Finisher 4 2 Used to check the paper feed section (Desk/LCC) sensors and detectors and their control Paper feed. 3 Used to check the paper feed section (Desk/LCC) loads and their control circuits. 3 Used to check the operation of the load in the finisher and the control circuit. H4. Paper feed. Process 19 Used to display various counter values related to scan . and scanning (reading). Paper feed. Paper feed. Fusing 15 .2. paper reverse/transport solenoids) and the control circuits. and versions.image send. DV unit. Automatic document feeder 2 Used to check the operations of the sensors and the detectors in the document feed unit Automatic document feeder section and the control circuits. paper reverse/transport 5 1 Used to check the operation of the display. Used to cancel the self-diag "U2" trouble. 9 Used to display the print quantity of each paper feed section. List of simulation codes Main Sub Functions Section 1 1 Used to check the operation of the scanner (reading) unit and the control circuit. Fusing 12 The document reading number of sheets setting (for aging operation) Automatic document feeder 8 1 Used to check and adjust the operations of the developing voltage in each print mode and the Toner supply. Fusing 3 Used to check the operation of the scanner lamp and the control circuit. paper reverse/transport circuits. 6 Used to check and adjust the operation of the transport voltage and the control circuit. MFP (ICU) PWB 14 .) FAX unit (TEL/LIU. 90 Used to output the various set data lists. 2 Used to check and adjust the operation of the main charger grid voltage in each printer mode Photo-conductor and the control circuit. LCD in the operation panel. 10 1 Used to check the operations of the toner supply mechanism (toner clutch) and the related Toner supply. MX-M503N SIMULATION 5 – 3 . Scanner (reading) 6 1 Used to check the operations of the load in the paper transport system (clutches and Paper feed. H5" trouble. 22 1 Used to display the print count value of each section and the operation mode. paper reverse/transport section) and the control circuit. 13 Used to display the use quantity of the process section (OPC drum. adjustments. counters. Scanner (reading) 2 1 Used to check the operations of the automatic document feed unit and the control circuit. 8 Used to display the warm-up time. 3 Used to check the operations of the load in the paper reverse section (duplex section) and its Duplex control circuit. the DSPF/RSPF. toner cartridge). 13 . Used to cancel the self-diag "U6-09" trouble. 8 Used to display the number of operations (the counter value) of the finisher. 6 Used to set the operating intermittent aging cycle. (Only when FAX is installed. paper reverse/transport transport section. paper reverse/transport 10 Used to display the system configuration (options and internal hardware). FAX control PWB) 12 Used to display the mis-feed position of the DSPF/RSPF and the number of mis-feed at the Automatic document feeder position. 3 Used to display the mis-feed position and the number of mis-feed at the position. paper reverse/transport 5 Used to check the operation of the paper transport clutch for the paper feed tray unit. Transfer 17 Used to check and adjust the operation of the separation bias voltage and the control circuit. Used to cancel the self-diag "H3. Paper feed. paper reverse/transport 21 1 Used to set the maintenance cycle. Operation unit (Operation/Display Control PWB) 2 Used to check the operation of the heater lamp and the control circuit. developing circuit. 5 Used to display the ROM version of each unit (section). LCC 16 . 9 2 Used to check the operation of the sensors and detectors in the switchback section (duplex Paper feed. controls. Used to cancel the self-diag "PF" trouble. Scanner 5 Used to check the operation of the scanner (reading) unit and the control circuit. developing control circuit. 3 Used to check the operations of the loads in the automatic document feed unit and the control Automatic document feeder circuit. 80 Used to output the operation data of paper feed and paper transport in the paper feed/ Paper feed. 4 Used to display the trouble (self diag) history. Used to cancel the self-diag "U1" trouble.

Auditor 5 Used to set the count mode in A3 (11" x 17") print. 65 Used to set the limit of the staple process. 10 Used to set the trial mode of the network scanner. the card scan. (FSS function) 5 Used to set the machine tag No. 5 Used to clear the developer counter. 6 Used to set the specifications of the destination. 18 Used to set Disable/Enable of the toner save mode operation. and the trouble counter. 31 Used to initialize the service mode (Web page) password. (Only when FAX is installed) FAX unit (TEL/LIU. Paper feed. alert call out. (HDD-installed machine only) Others 40 2 Manual paper feed tray paper width sensor adjustment. Paper exit section 2 Used to set the paper type and the weight type. Others 3 Used to check the operations of the document size sensor and the control circuit. the printer counters of the transfer unit and the fusing unit. 38 Used to set "Print continue" or "Print stop" when the maintenance timing is reached or the consumable part life is over. Others 2 Used to adjust the document size sensor detection level. 7 Used to clear the OPC drum counter.Main Sub Functions Section 24 1 Used to clear the jam counter. Paper feed. 74 Used to set the OSA trial mode. density adjustment) in the copy mode. 78 Used to set the password of the remote operation panel mode. 2 Used to clear the number of use (the number of prints) of each paper feed section. FAX control PWB) 15 Used to clear the counters related to the scan mode and the image send. developing detection level. 33 1 Used to check the operations of the card reader sensor and the control circuit.) 30 Used to set the operation mode corresponding to the CE mark (Europe safety standards). 2 Used to check the operations of the sensors and the detectors in the paper feed section and Paper feed. (FSS function) 11 Used to check the serial communication retry number and the scanner gain adjustment retry number history. paper reverse/transport 7 Used to set the adjustment value of the manual paper feed tray paper width sensor. (FSS function) 9 Used to set the paper transport time recording YES/NO threshold value and shading gain adjustment retry number. 52 Used to set whether non-printed paper (insertion paper. and to display the toner density Toner supply. Others 2 Used to delete the ID (IDM) information of card. and the A3 wide copy mode. 27 1 Used to set non-detection of communication error (U7-00) with RIC. 35 Used to set the trouble history display mode. Paper feed. (For the Japan and the UK versions. (FSS function) 7 Used to set of the enable. paper reverse/transport 3 Used to set the specifications of the auditor. 4 Used to clear the maintenance counter. Photoconductor 9 Used clear the printer mode print counter and the self print mode print counter. 10 Used to clear the FAX counter. 2 Used to make the initial setting of toner density when replacing developer. Toner supply. 25 1 Used to check the operations of the developing section. 30 1 Used to check the operations of the sensors and the detectors in other than the paper feed Paper feed. 41 Used to set Enable/Disable of the magnification ratio automatic select function (AMS) in the center binding mode. 49 Used to set the print speed of postcards mode. 53 Used to set Inhibit/Allow of the user auto calibration (gradation. paper reverse/transport 41 1 Used to check the operations of the document size sensor and the control circuit. developing (Automatic adjustment) 26 1 Used to set the paper exit operation from the right side. paper reverse/transport section and the control circuits. 30 Used to initialize the administrator password. (FSS function) 10 Used to clear the trouble prediction history information. (FSS Function) 13 Used to check the history of paper transport time between sensors. (FSS function) 12 Used to check the high-density and the half-tone process control error history. developing 6 Used to clear the copy counter. (FSS function) 6 Used to set of the manual service call. the continuous enlargement copy. and the scan (reading) unit counter. Paper feed. Others MX-M503N SIMULATION 5 – 4 . (FSS function) 2 Used to set the sender's registration number and the HOST server telephone number. DSPF/RSPF. 69 Used to set the operating conditions for toner near end. paper reverse/transport 3 Used to clear the finisher. Toner supply. 73 Used to adjust the image loss (shade removal amount) in the poster. (FSS function) 14 Used to set the FSS function connection test mode. paper reverse/transport the control circuits. cover paper) is counted up or not. (FSS function) 4 Used to set the initial call and toner order auto send. 50 Used to set the operation specifications and functions.

Fusing 4 Used to set the fusing temperature 2 in each operation mode. 5 Used to correction the scan image magnification ratio (in the sub scanning direction). Process 2 Used to adjust the sensitivity of the image density sensor. 8 Used to adjust the image send mode color balance RGB. 24 Used to set the correction of the temperature adjustment value of SIM 43-1 and 43-4. 24 Copy and printer density adjustment (Auto adjustment) 32 Used to adjust the reproducibility of the document background density in the automatic copy mode. (N model only) 64 Used to set the image process mode in each copy mode. 48 Used to set the output resolution in each copy mode. Scanner 6 Used to adjust the rotation speed of each motor. (N model only) 5 Used to install and update the watermark data stored in the HDD. Process 24 Used to display the correction target and the correction level in the half tone process control Process operation. Process 22 Used to display the toner patch density level in the half tone process control operation. 16 Used to adjust the copy density manually. image send mode). MX-M503N SIMULATION 5 – 5 . gray. Process 4 Used to set the conditions of the high density process control operation. 52 Used to set the gamma default for the copy mode heavy paper and the image process mode. Process 37 Used to set the development bias correction level in the continuous printing operation. (N model only) 5 Used to adjust the density in the image send mode (monochrome mode). 40 Used to adjust the FAX send image density. (Fine) 43 Used to adjust the FAX send image density. 19 Used to set the operating conditions of document density scanning (copy. Fusing 31 Used to check the operation of the fusing web cleaning motor. 23 Used to set the environment correction under high temperature and high humidity (H/H) for Fusing the fusing temperature setting (SIM 43-4) in each paper mode. 90 Used to set the process operation of high-compression PDF images.Main Sub Functions Section 43 1 Used to make the fusing reference temperature setting 1 in each operation mode. 3 Used to install and update the Operation Manual data stored in the HDD. image send mode). (N model only) 39 Used to adjust the sharpness of FAX send images. 47 Used to set the compression rate of copy and scan images (JPEG). 4 Used to adjust the density in the image send mode (color mode). Toner supply. (600dpi). 22 Used to set the environment correction under low temperature and low humidity (L/L) for the Fusing fusing temperature setting (SIM 43-4) in each paper mode. Toner supply. Fusing 44 1 Used to set each correction operation function in the image forming (process) section. Process 28 Used to set the process control execution conditions. Process 9 Used to display the result data of the high density process control operation. developing 21 Used to register the target value of the half-tone process control. (N model only) 48 1 Used to adjust the scan image magnification ratio (in the main scanning direction and the sub Scanner scanning direction). image send mode) 10 Used to adjust the copy density (in each copy mode). Process 6 Used to execute the high density process control forcibly. 21 Used to set the environment correction under high temperature and high humidity (H/H) for Fusing the fusing temperature setting (SIM 43-1) in each paper mode.) 61 Used to adjust the area separation recognition level in the image send mode (color. Process 12 Used to display the operation data of the high density process control and the image density Process sensor. (Collective adjustment of all the modes) 41 Used to adjust the FAX send image density. Process 27 Used to clear the correction data of the half tone process control. 16 Used to display the toner density control data. Process 29 Used to set the operating conditions of the process control during a job. 25 Used to set the calculating conditions of the correction value for the half tone process control. developing 46 2 Used to adjust the copy density in each monochrome copy mode. (Super Fine) 44 Used to adjust the FAX send image density. (N model only) 9 Used to adjust the SPF mode scan image density (copy. (N model only) 63 Used to adjust the density in the low density area of a scan image. (Ultra fine) 45 Used to adjust the FAX send image density. (N model only) 51 Used to adjust the gamma for the copy mode heavy paper mode and the image process mode (manual adjustment). Fusing 32 Used to set various items related to the forcible operation of web cleaning when job end. 14 Used to display the output level of the temperature and humidity sensor. Fusing 20 Used to set the environmental correction under low temperature and low humidity (L/L) for the Fusing fusing temperature setting (SIM 43-1) in each paper mode. Process 26 Used to execute the half tone process control compulsory. Scanner 23 Used to set the density correction of copy high density section (High density tone gap supported). 37 Used to adjust the reproducibility of the scan image color document (copy. (Normal) 42 Used to adjust the FAX send image density. (The set values of SIM46-51 are set to the default values. 49 1 Used to perform the firmware update. auto exposure mode).

and HDD (including user authentication data and address data) to the USB memory. (The adjustment is made separately for each scan mode. (Self print) * This simulation functions only for the machines which are provided with the printer function. 33 Used to adjust the gamma and the density in each printer screen. (HDD-installed machine) HDD 12 Used to set Enable/Disable of auto format in a hard disk trouble. Scanner 64 2 Test print. 7 Used to adjust the copy image position and the image loss (DSPF/RSPF mode) (simple adjustment). (Used to repair the PWB. (SOFT SW) 56 1 Used to transport data between HDD . (only the operation manual and watermark area) HDD 63 1 Used to display the shading correction result. image off-center. and image magnification ratio. Scanner 2 Used to perform shading. (PRINTER MODE) 6 Used to adjust the copy image position and the image loss (DSPF/RSPF mode). (HDD-installed machine) HDD 60 1 Used to check the operations (read/write) of the MFP PWB memory. (Excluding the system area and the operation manual area) HDD 10 Used to delete the job log data. Scanner 5 Used to perform the scanner (CCD/CIS) color balance and gamma default setting. Scanner 3 Used to perform scanner (CCD/CIS) color balance and gamma auto adjustment. HDD * If no HDD is installed. Operation unit (Operation/Display control PWB) 67 17 Printer controller reset 25 Printer density adjustment (Manual adjustment) * This simulation functions only for the machines which are provided with the printer option function. HDD 3 Used to check read/write of the hard disk (all areas). SRAM. image loss adjustment 2 Used to adjust the copy image position and the image loss (simple adjustment). HDD 8 Used to format the hard disk. (SOFT SW) 3 Used to set the specifications of the controller operation. (Self print) (PCL) 6 Printer test print. Operation unit (Operation/Display control PWB) 2 Used to display the touch panel (LCD display section) detection coordinates. 31 Used to clear the printer calibration value (Half-tone process control data). void area. 10 Used to adjust the image off-center position. (HDD-installed machine) 3 Used to backup the document filing data to the USB memory. 2 Used to check read/write of the hard disk (partial).) 27 Used to perform the image loss adjustment of scanned images in the FAX or image send mode. 5 Used to adjust the print lead edge image position. Operation unit (Operation/Display control PWB) 5 Used to check the operation panel key input.Main Sub Functions Section 50 1 Copy image position. (Self print) (PS) 65 1 Used to adjust the touch panel (LCD display section) detection coordinates. (The adjustment is made separately for each paper feed section. (SOFT SW) 2 Used to set the specifications of the scanner control operation. 7 Used to adjust the DSPF/RSPF document size width sensor. HDD 7 Used to print the hard disk self diagnostics error log. 5 Printer test print. 34 Used to set the density correction in the printer high density section. MFP (ICU) PWB 61 1 Used to check the LSU polygon motor rotation and laser detection. 55 1 Used to set the specifications of the engine control operations. LSU 3 Used to set the laser power LSU 62 1 Used to execute the hard disk format (except operation manual area). 53 6 Used to adjust the detection level of the DSPF/RSPF document width. MFP (ICU) PWB 2 Used to set the specifications of the MFP PWB on-board SDRAM. paper reverse/transport DSPF/RSPF resist roller. Automatic document feeder 8 Used to adjust the document lead edge reference and the DSPF/RSPF mode document scan Automatic document feeder position. 28 Used to automatically adjust the image loss. Scanner 4 Used to display the SIT chart patch density. (Support for the high density section tone gap) 70 MFP PWB SRAM data clear MFP (ICU) PWB MX-M503N SIMULATION 5 – 6 .) (HDD-installed machine) 2 Used to backup the data in the EEPROM. * This simulation functions only for the machines which are provided with the printer option function.) 12 Used to perform the scan image off-center position adjustment. HDD 6 Used to perform the self diagnostics of the hard disk. HDD 13 Used to format the hard disk. (HDD-installed machine) HDD 11 Used to delete the document filing data. 51 2 Used to adjust the contact pressure (deflection amount) on paper by the main unit and the Paper feed. (Self print) (Monochrome mode) 4 Printer test print.MFP PWB SRAM/EEPROM. the MFP Flash memory is formatted. (HDD-installed machine) HDD 4 Used to backup the JOB log data to the USB memory.

0mm/s) 7(67 &/26( 6&$11(5&+(&.0mm/s)  600DPI 600DPI (173.0mm/s) 1200DPI 1200DPI (86. '3. tion. (operation speed). and paper exit   ǂǂǂ6.0mm/s) 300DPI Scanning is once performed at the speed corresponding to the 400DPI 400DPI (259.5mm/s) (346.0mm/s) 300DPI 400DPI 400DPI (259.08/$7. the operation is terminated.08/$7. MHPS When [EXECUTE] key is pressed. 2) Press [EXECUTE] key. (reading) unit and the control circuit.5mm/s) 2&6&$1 ˖ 300DPI '3.0mm/s) 600DPI 600DPI (173. [DSPF] Item/Display Operation mode Default value (SINGLE) 300DPI 300DPI (346. Section Scanner (reading) Scanning is repeated at the speed corresponding to the scan Operation/Procedure resolution (operation speed). 1) Select the operation mode and the speed with the touch panel When "MHPS" is highlighted.3.0mm/s) scan resolution (operation speed). OC SCAN 300DPI 300DPI (346.0mm/s)   ǂǂǂ6.   ǂǂǂ6. '3.(&87(  (. the scanner unit is in the home posi.5mm/s) (346. '3. 2&6&$1 ˖ 300DPI '3. 2) Press [EXECUTE] key. 600DPI 600DPI (173.5mm/s) (346.(&87( 2 2-1 1-2 Purpose Operation test/check Purpose Operation test/check Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the auto- Function (Purpose) Used to check the sensors in the scanner matic document feed unit and the control (reading) section and the related circuits.0mm/s) (DOUBLE) 300DPI 300DPI (346. Item/Display Operation mode Default value 2) Press [EXECUTE] key. panel key. '3.5mm/s) Item/Display Operation mode Default value OC SCAN 300DPI 300DPI (346. The DSPF/RSPF repeats paper feed. key. the operation is terminated.0mm/s) 300DPI 400DPI 400DPI (259.21ǂǂ12 600DPI 600DPI (173. Section Scanner Section Automatic document feeder Operation/Procedure Operation/Procedure The operating status of the sensor is displayed. transport.5mm/s) (346. circuit.21ǂǂ12 7(67 &/26( 6&$11(5&+(&. 1-1 Section Scanner (reading) Purpose Operation test/check Operation/Procedure Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the scanner 1) Select the operation speed with the touch panel key.0mm/s) MX-M503N SIMULATION 5 – 7 . (. 1200DPI 1200DPI (86. Details of simulation 1-5 Purpose Operation test/check 1 Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the scanner (reading) unit and the control circuit. 1) Select the operation resolution (scan speed) with the touch When [EXECUTE] key is pressed.08/$7.21ǂǂ12 7(67 &/26( operations at the speed corresponding to the scan resolution 6&$11(56(1625&+(&.0mm/s) 300DPI 400DPI 400DPI (259.

08/$7. SPFFAN DSPF fan motor The code names of the sensors and the detectors which are active STMPS Stamp solenoid are highlighted. Section Automatic document feeder [DSPF-installed model] Operation/Procedure SPUM DSPF paper feed motor SPFM DSPF transport motor The operating conditions of the sensors and detectors are dis- SRRC DSPF resist roller clutch played. Purpose Operation test/check Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the loads in the automatic document feed unit and the control circuit. SPED1 DSPF/RSPF document detector 1 6380 63)0 SPPD1 DSPF/RSPF document pass detector 1 655& 63))$1 (Paper entry detection) 67036 SPPD2 DSPF/RSPF document pass detector 2 (Resist roller front document transport detection) SPPD3 DSPF/RSPF document pass detector 3 (Document scanning front document transport detection) SPPD5 DSPF/RSPF document pass detector 5 (DSPF: Document transport detection) (RSPF: Document transport detection/Document reverse rear document transport detection) (. the operation is terminated. '3. [DSPF]  ǂǂǂ6. (Displayed only when the finish stamp is installed. sors and the detectors in the document When [EXECUTE] key is pressed.5mm/s) 63)6(1625&+(&.5mm/s) 300DPI ǂǂǂ6.21ǂǂ12 SCOV DSPF/RSPF cover open/close detector 7(67 &/26( 63)287387&+(&.21ǂǂ12 7(67 &/26( 63)$*.(&87( Section Automatic document feeder Operation/Procedure 1) Select a target item of the operation check with the touch panel 2-2 key. feed unit section and the control circuits.5mm/s) (259.08/$7.5mm/s) 63/6 63/6 67038 (double face)) 600DPI 600DPI (173. '3.21ǂǂ12 7(67 &/26( 63)6&$1 ˖ 300DPI '3.08/$7. Purpose Operation test/check 2) Press [EXECUTE] key.21ǂǂ12 7(67 &/26( 2-3 63)$*. '3.(&87(  SPOD DSPF paper exit detector (Only the DSPF) [RSPF-installed model] SPLS1 DSPF/RSPF document length detector 1 (Short) SPLS2 DSPF/RSPF document length detector (Long) SPUM RSPF paper feed motor STMPU DSPF/RSPF stamp unit installation detector SPFM_F RSPF paper feed reverse motor (normal rotation) SWD_LEN DSPF/RSPF guide plate position (Unit: 0.ǂǂǂǂǂǂǂǂǂǂǂ6:'B/(1 6('B$' (single face)) 600DPI 600DPI (173.0 mm/s)    ǂǂǂ6.5mm/s) 300DPI 633' 633' 633' 633' (DOUBLE 400DPI 400DPI (259.0 mm/s) 66(7 62&' 6&29 63(' SPF SCAN 300DPI 300DPI (259.08/$7.1mm) SPFM_R RSPF paper feed reverse motor (reverse rotation) SWD_AD DSPF/RSPF document detection volume output AD value SRRC RSPF resist roller clutch SRVC RSPF reverse clutch SPRS RSPF pressure release solenoid STMPS Finish stamp solenoid (Displayed only when the finish stamp is installed.1*  ǂǂǂ6.08/$7.5mm/s) (259.1*/( '28%/( (. Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the sen.(&87(  [RSPF] [RSPF] Item/Display Operation mode Default value  SPF SCAN 300DPI 300DPI (259.1* 63)6&$1 ˖ '3.) SSET DSPF/RSPF installation detector SOCD DSPF/RSPF open/close detector  ǂǂǂ6. 6.) MX-M503N SIMULATION 5 – 8 .21ǂǂ12 7(67 &/26( (SINGLE 400DPI 400DPI (259. 63)6(1625&+(&.ǂǂǂǂǂǂǂǂǂǂǂ6:'B/(1 6('B$' 66(7 62&' 6&29 63(' 633' 633' 633' 633' 632' 63/6 63/6 67038 SINGLE '28%/( (. The selected load performs the operation.

FDTPD EMPS Delivery tray paper detector  FPLD FSLD Paper surface detector ǂǂǂ6. FFL FFANLK Fan lock signal Section Finisher FDRHS FNHPD Delivery roller home position sensor Operation/Procedure FPPD3 FSPOD Paper transport detector 3 FSATPD FSDTPD Saddle paper alignment tray paper detector The operating conditions of the sensors and detectors are dis- FSSSW2 FSJPD Stapler safety switch 2 played.(&87(   FTLLD FLLD Tray lower limit detector FTLMRS FLE Tray lift motor rotation sensor FSHS FSHPD Staple home position sensor FSSHPS FSTHPD Stapler shift home position sensor 3 FSED FSLS FSD FSPD Staple empty detector Staple lead edge sensor FTPS FMLD Tray position sensor 3-2 FCD1 FFDD Cover detector 1 FCD2 FCD Cover detector 2 Purpose Operation test/check FSSW1 FFDDW Safety switch 1 Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the sen. FPHHD FPHHPD Paper hold home position sensor The code names of the sensors and the detectors which are active FSAPHS FSJHPD Saddle alignment plate home position sensor are highlighted.08/$7. FCD FJSW Finisher connection detector sors and the detectors in the finisher and FSSSW1 FSSSW Staple safety switch the control circuit. FSPGHS FAHPD Saddle paper guide home position sensor <Inner finisher> FSRHS FSR3HPD Saddle roller home position sensor FPDD FGED Delivery detector FED Entry port paper detection (Status detection "1") FSSHS FSSHPD Saddle staple home position sensor FBED Tray paper detection FSSES FSSD Saddle staple sensor FULD Tray upper limit detection FSSCS FSSDSW Saddle staple cover sensor FMLLD Tray intermediate lower limit detection FSSSHS FSSTHPD Finisher saddle stapler shift home position FLLD Tray lower limit detection sensor FSLD1 Paper surface detection 1 FPMRS FPMCK Punch motor rotation sensor FSLD2 Paper surface detection 2 FPD FPUC Punch unit detection (connector) FRLD Roller up/down detection FPCHPS FPHPD Punch home position sensor FBRD Belt separation detection FPDFS FPDD Punch dust sensor FFJHPD Alignment HP detection front FPHPS FPSHPD Punch unit home position sensor FRJHPD Alignment HP detection rear FPTS FPTD Punch timing sensor FJPD Alignment guide position detection FPES1 FPSD1 Punch paper edge sensor 1 FSTPD Staple tray paper detection FPES2 FPSD2 Punch paper edge sensor 2 FSHPD Staple drive HP detection FPES3 FPSD3 Punch paper edge sensor 3 FSTHPD Staple shift HP detection FPES4 FPSD4 Punch paper edge sensor 4 FSD Staple empty detection FPPS FPPD Punch paper position sensor FSTD Staple lead edge position detection FDSW Door open detection <4K finisher> FFANLK Fan motor lock detection FJPID Interface transport unit entry port detection FPRPD Punch rear position detection (Status detection "1") FJPOD Interface transport unit exit port detection FPUC Punch unit connection detection FJPDD Interface transport unit cover detection FPHPD Punch HP detection FED Entry port paper detection FPSHPD Punch side resist HP detection FAED1 Tray 1 area detection 1 FPPD1 Punch paper surface detection 1 FAED2 Tray 1 area detection 2 FPPD2 Punch paper surface detection 2 FAED3 Tray 1 area detection 3 FPPD3 Punch paper surface detection 3 FFJHPD Alignment plate HP detection front FPPD4 Punch paper surface detection 4 FRJHPD Alignment plate HP detection rear FPPD5 Punch paper surface detection 5 FBED1 Tray 1 paper detection FPPD6 Punch paper surface detection 6 FBED2 Tray 2 paper detection FPDD Punch dust detection FCCD Tray approach detection FPPEND Punch paper rear edge detection FSLD1 Tray 1 paper surface detection FPDES1 Punch destination detection 1 FPDD1 Discharged paper detection FPDES2 Punch destination detection 2 FSLD2 Tray 2 paper surface detection <Saddle stitch finisher> FASHPD Rear edge assist HP detection FSWHPD Oscillation guide HP detection PDPPD1 FJPID Paper pass paper transport detector 1 FSWOPD Oscillation guide open detection PDPPD2 FJPOD Paper pass paper transport detector 2 FSTPD Staple tray paper detection PDCS FJPDD Paper pass cover Open/Close sensor FSHPD Staple drive HP detection FPPD1 FED Paper delivery detector 1 FSTHPD Staple shift HP detection FPAPHS_F FFJHPD Paper alignment plate home position sensor F FSD Staple empty detection FPAPHS_R FRJHPD Paper alignment plate home position sensor R FSTD Needle lead edge position detection FATPD FAD Paper alignment tray paper detector FFANLK Fan motor lock detection FGHPS FGHPD Gripper home position sensor FSJOGD Stapler alignment interference detection MX-M503N SIMULATION 5 – 9 .21ǂǂ12 7(67 &/26( FPPD2 FFPD Paper transport detector 2 63)287387&+(&. 6380 63)0 FSPHS FFHPD Saddle plate home position sensor 655& 63))$1 FSTPD FFED Saddle exit tray paper detector 67036 FSMRS FFE Saddle motor rotation sensor FTULD FULD Tray upper limit detector (.

1) Select the item to be operation checked with the touch panel 3'3*6 3'370 3'&) )370 key.21ǂǂ12 7(67 &/26( Operation/Procedure ). 㩷 )6'0 )6370 )63$0 )630 When [EXECUTE] key is pressed.08/$7. Section Finisher   ǂǂǂ6.16(1625&+(&. 㩷 )660 )60 )7/0 )370 The selected load performs the operation.1/2$'&+(&.21ǂǂ12 7(67 &/26( FAM Bundle paper exit motor ). the operation is terminated. 㩷 )'5/0 )*0 )3$0) )3$05 2) Press [EXECUTE] key. 3'33' 3'33' 3'&6 )33' FFJM Alignment motor front )3$3+6B) )3$3+6B5 )$73' )*+36 FRJM Alignment motor rear )'73' )3/' )33' )63+6 )673' )6056 )78/' FSM Staple shift motor )7//' )7/056 )6+6 )66+36 )6(' FTLM1 Tray 1 lift motor )6/6 )736 )&' )&' FTLM2 Tray 2 lift motor )66: )&' )666: ))/ )'5+6 )33' )6$73' )666: FFSM Staple motor )3++' )6$3+6 )63*+6 )65+6 FSWM Oscillation motor )3'' )66&6 )66+6 )66(6 FASM Rear edge assist motor )666+6 FINRRS Inlet port roller separation solenoid FBRRS Buffer roller separation solenoid  FFDRRS Paper exit roller separation solenoid FBES Buffer rear edge holding solenoid FSHC Shutter open/close clutch 3-3 FAORC Bundle exit lower roller clutch Purpose Operation test/check FPNM Punch motor FPSM Punch horizontal resist motor Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the load in the finisher and the control circuit. 㩷 )6'60 )3+6 )3+6 <Inner finisher> 㩷 FINRPS Entry port reverse pass solenoid 㩷 FSLS Paper surface detection solenoid (. FSAD Staple safety SW <Saddle stitch finisher> FSHTD Shutter open detection PDPGS FINRPS Paper pass paper gate solenoid FCD Upper door open detection PDPTM FJPM Paper pass paper transport motor FFDD Front cover open detection PDCF FJFM Paper pass cooling fan F24V 24V output interruption detection FPTM1 FFM Paper transport motor 1 FPSW1 PUSHSW1 detection FDRLM FNM Finisher paper exit roller lift motor FPSW2 PUSHSW2 detection FGM FGM Gripper motor FPSW3 PUSHSW3 detection FPAM-F FFJM Paper alignment motor F FAED21 Tray 2 area detection 1 FPAM-R FRJM Paper alignment motor R FAED22 Tray 2 area detection 2 FSSM FSM Stapler shift motor FAED23 Tray 2 area detection 3 FSM FFSM Staple motor FDSW1 DIPSW1 detection FPTM2 FLM Paper transport motor 2 FDSW2 DIPSW2 detection FSDM FFM2 Saddle motor FDSW3 DIPSW3 detection FSPTM FTM Saddle paper transport motor FDSW4 DIPSW4 detection FSPAM FSR3M Saddle paper alignment motor FDSW5 DIPSW5 detection FSPM FSJM Saddle positioning motor FDSW6 DIPSW6 detection FSDSM FPPM Saddle staple motor FDSW7 DIPSW7 detection FPHS1 FSSM Paper holding solenoid 1 FDSW8 DIPSW8 detection FPHS2 FPHS Paper holding solenoid 2 FPE Punch motor lock detection FTLM FPS Tray lift motor FPUC Punch unit connection detection FPM FPNM Punch motor FPHPD Punch HP detection FPSM FPSM Punch shift motor FPSHPD Punch horizontal resist HP detection FPFDD Punch front door open detection <4K finisher is installed> FPDD Punch dust detection FINRPS Interface paper gate solenoid FPUDSW Punch upper cover open detection SW FJPM Interface transport motor FJFM Interface transport fan motor   FFM Entry port transport motor ǂǂǂ6.(&87(  FPDS Paddle solenoid FBRS Belt separation solenoid FRM Registration motor FSWM Oscillation motor FAM Bundle exit paper exit motor FFJM Alignment motor front FRJM Alignment motor rear FSM Staple shift motor FFSM Staple motor FTLM Tray lift motor FFANM Fan motor FPNM Punch motor FPSM Punch side resist motor M X -M 503N SIM U LATIO N 5 – 10 .08/$7.

60 50 adjustment MX-M503N SIMULATION 5 – 11 .18 10 to an extreme level.20 10 adjustment (center position adjustment (front) of two positions binding) B STAPLE REAR Staple binding position 94 . (one position at the rear) D STAPLE Staple binding position 68 .58 50 D PUNCH Punch center 30 .75 50 ǂǂǂ6. adjustment (two positions The code names of the sensors and the detectors which are active in pitch) are highlighted. ST_POS adjustment N GRIPPER_POS Gripper exit position 35 .7.132 100 <4K finisher> FRONT adjustment Default (one position in front) Item Display Item Set range value E STAPLE BOTH Staple binding position 68 .55 50 Function (Purpose) Used to check the paper feed section FRONT R adjustment (one position in (Desk/LCC) sensors and detectors and front) (When the paper their control circuits.6+(5$'-8670(17 B FOLDING Saddle folding position 25 .˖ ˖381&+&(17(5 width is greater than /˖ ˖381&++2/( 232mm) 2. the adjustment value of this simulation is set range value A FRONT Alignment position 2 .106 100 G PUNCH Punch center positioning 37 .1*326. Setting Default Item/Display Content If. K PUNCH Punch center adjustment 35 .52 50 <Saddle stitch finisher> adjustment Setting Default Item/Display Content range value   A SADDLE Saddle stitch position 25 .75 50 $˖ $˖ ˖6$''/(326.0mm) adjustment (rear) In general.65 50 )˖ ˖67$3/(5($55 *˖ ˖67$3/()5217 adjustment (Rear) +˖ ˖67$3/()52175 E STAPLE REAR Staple binding position 25 . width is 232mm or less) Section Paper feed.132 100 adjustment (one adjustment (staple pitch of position at the rear) two positions binding) C STAPLE FRONT Staple binding position 94 .21  %˖ ˖)2/'.) folding position adjustment can be executed in the system <Inner finisher> setting menu.˖ ˖67$3/(%27+ adjustment (one position at -˖ ˖67$3/(3.70 50 (paper transport direction) CENTER adjustment E PUNCH HOLE Punch hole position 46 .132 100 A FRONT ADJUST Alignment position 0 . Setting Default 3-10 Item/Display Content range value Purpose Adjustment M SADDLE_ADJU Saddle alignment position 35 .65 50 CENTER L PUNCH HOLE Punch hole position 30 .63 50 adjustment (one CENTER sensor position in front) H PUNCH HOLE Punch hole adjustment 42 .7&+ the rear) (When the paper .18 10 setting 5.7. the above trouble will not occur. The saddle binding position adjustment and the saddle 3) Press [OK] key.65 50 Section Finisher adjustment Operation/Procedure 1) Select an adjustment target item with [] [] key on the touch NOTE: "A: SADDLE POSITION (Saddle binding position adjust- panel. paper reverse/transport I STAPLE BOTH Staple binding position 45 . However.08/$7. therefore.21 POSITION adjustment ˷̚˹ &˖ ˖)5217$'-867 C FRONT Paper alignment position 35 .106 100 F STAPLE PITCH Staple binding position 68 .62 50 played. (Adjustment range in the system B REAR ADJUST Alignment position 2 . when the saddle binding position and the sad- C STAPLE REAR Staple binding position 68 .75 50 R adjustment (one position at the rear) (When the paper width is 232mm or less) 4 G STAPLE Staple binding position 25 . the adjustments in the system set- ting are based on the adjustment value of this simulation.75 50 FRONT adjustment (one position in front) (When the paper 4-2 width is greater than Purpose Operation test/check 232mm) H STAPLE Staple binding position 25 . F STAPLE REAR Staple binding position 45 . ment)" and "B: FOLDING POSITION (Saddle folding posi- tion adjustment" 2) Enter the set value with 10-key. (The set value is saved. the adjustment range in the system ADJUST adjustment (front) setting may be narrowed.21ǂǂ12 7(67 &/26( POSITION adjustment ).1.55 50 Operation/Procedure adjustment (two positions at the center) The operating conditions of the sensors and detectors are dis- J STAPLE PITCH Staple binding position 35 .65 50 '˖ ˖5($5$'-867 ADJUST adjustment (Front) (˖ ˖67$3/(5($5 D REAR ADJUST Paper alignment position 35 .132 100 dle folding positions are adjusted to the center by this simu- adjustment lation.65 50 Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the finisher.75 50 .

(&87(  <A4 LCC> LPFD LCC transport sensor 4-5 LUD LCC tray upper limit sensor Purpose Operation test/check LDD LCC tray lower limit sensor LPED LCC tray paper empty sensor Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the paper LCD LCC tray insertion detection transport clutch for the paper feed tray unit. Checking is started.08/$7.21ǂǂ12 7(67 &/26( '(6.<Desk> <A4 LCC> DCSI1 Desk 1 installation detection LPFM LCC transport motor DPFD1 Desk 1 transport detection LLM LCC lift motor DLUD1 Desk 1 upper limit detection LPFC LCC paper feed clutch DPED1 Desk 1 paper empty detection LPFS LCC paper feed solenoid DCSPD1 Desk 1 remaining paper quantity detection LTRC LCC transport clutch DCSS11 Desk 1 rear edge detection 1 DCSS12 Desk 1 rear edge detection 2 㩷  DCSS13 Desk 1 rear edge detection 3 ǂǂǂ6. The selected load performs the operation. button Content DTRC Desk transport clutch LTRC LCC transport clutch    ǂǂǂ6. the button is not   ǂǂǂ6. paper reverse/transport Operation/Procedure 1) Select the load item that is required to operation check with the touch panel key. Section Paper feed./&&6<1&521. When it is abnormal. '&6. When it is abnormal.08/$7. paper reverse/transport LRE LCC lift motor encoder sensor Operation/Procedure L24VM LCC24V power monitor [Check the ON operation] LLSW LCC upper limit SW LTOD LCC main unit connection detection Press the clutch button of the target of the ON operation check. the operation is terminated. the highlighted display is maintained. 7(67 '6.*1$/&+(&. When [EXECUTE] key is pressed. 2) Press [EXECUTE] key. '3)' '/8' '3(' '&63' '&66 '&66 When the operation is normal. '&66 '&6./&&/2$'&+(&.=. '3)' '/8' '3(' [Check the OFF operation] '&63' '&66 '&66 '&66 Press the highlighted button which is ON.21ǂǂ12 7(67 &/26( DCSS14 Desk 1 rear edge detection 4 㩷 '6. '3)0 '/80 '38& '/80 DCSI2 Desk 2 installation detection DPFD2 Desk 2 transport detection '38& '75& DLUD2 Desk 2 upper limit detection DPED2 Desk 2 paper empty detection DCSPD2 Desk 2 remaining paper quantity detection DCSS21 Desk 2 rear edge detection 1 DCSS22 Desk 2 rear edge detection 2 DCSS23 Desk 2 rear edge detection 3 DCSS24 Desk 2 rear edge detection 4 DSW_DSK Desk transport cover open/close detection (./&&6(1625&+(&.1*6. 4-3 '75& ˖'75&2)) /75& ˖/75&2)) Purpose Operation test/check Function (Purpose) Used to check the paper feed section (Desk/LCC) loads and their control circuits. <Desk> DPFM Desk main motor DLUM1 Desk 1 lift-up motor DPUC1 Desk 1 paper feed clutch DLUM2 Desk 2 lift-up motor DPUC2 Desk 2 paper feed clutch DTRC Desk transport clutch MX-M503N SIMULATION 5 – 12 .08/$7. When the operation is normal. the button on the display is highlighted.21ǂǂ12 &/26( highlighted. LDSW LCC upper open/close detection SW Section Paper feed. returns to the normal display. the highlighted button on the display '&66 '&66 '6:B'6.

5 ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67

&/26(
+($7(5/$03/2$'6(783
+/B80 +/B86

5-1 +/B8:

Purpose Operation test/check
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the display,
LCD in the operation panel, and control cir-
cuit.
Section Operation unit
(Operation/Display Control PWB)
Operation/Procedure (;(&87( 

The LCD is changed as shown below.
The contrast changes every 2sec from the current level to MAX 
MIN  the current level. During this period, each LED is lighted. 5-3
The LCD display contrast change and the LED lighting status are Purpose Operation test/check
checked.
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the scanner
lamp and the control circuit.
ǂǂNO.05-01
ǂǂǂSIMULATION
7(67
Section Scanner (reading)
Operation/Procedure
1) Select the item to be operation checked with the touch panel
key.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The scanner lamp lights up for 10 sec.
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated.

Display Content
OC COPY LAMP OC scanner lamp
DSPF COPY LAMP DSPF scanner lamp (DSPF-installed model only)

[DSPF-installed model]

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
&23</$03&+(&.
2&&23</$03 '63)&23</$03

(;(&87( 

[RSPF-installed model]
5-2
Purpose Operation test/check 
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the heater 7(67 &/26(
&23</$03&+(&.
lamp and the control circuit.
2&&23</$03
Section Fusing
Operation/Procedure
1) Select the item to be operation checked with the touch panel
(;(&87(  
key.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The selected heater lamp repeats ON/OFF operations 10
times at the interval of 500ms.
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated.
Heater lamp operation check method:
Remove the rear cabinet, open the PWB holder, and the heater
lamp lighting status can be checked from the clearance between
the frames.

HL_UM Main heater lamp (HL MAIN)
HL_US Sub heater lamp (HL SUB)
HL_UW Warm-up heater lamp (HL UW)

MX-M503N SIMULATION 5 – 13

Load operation check method:
6 The load operation is checked by the operation sound. However,
there are some loads which cannot be checked with the operation
sound.
6-1
Purpose Operation test/check Item/Display Content
POFM12 Paper exit cooling fan motor 12
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the load in
OZFM Ozone fan motor
the paper transport system (clutches and
PSFM Power cooling fan motor
solenoids) and the control circuits.
LSUFM LSU cooling fan motor
Section Paper feed, paper reverse/transport RDCFM Suction fan motor
Operation/Procedure POFM3 Paper exit cooling fan motor 3
1) Select the item to be operation checked with the touch panel MFP FAN (CPUFM) Controller fan motor
key.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. 
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
The selected load performs the operation. 7(67
)$1/2$'6(783
&/26(

When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated. 32)0 2=)0
36)0 /68)0
Load operation check method: 5'&)0 32)0

The load operation is checked by the operation sound. However, 0)3)$1 &38)0

there are some loads which cannot be checked with the operation
sound.

Section Item/Display Content
Transport/ PFM Transport motor
process RRM Registration motor
POMF Paper exit motor (normal rotation) $// (;(&87( 

POMR Paper exit motor (reverse rotation)
FUM Fusing motor
CPFM Tray paper feed motor
OSM
CPFC
Shifter motor
Tray vertical transport clutch 1
7
CPFC2 Tray vertical transport clutch 2
PSPS Separation solenoid 7-1
Paper feed CLUM1 Tray 1 lift-up motor Purpose Setting
CPUC1 Tray 1 paper feed clutch
Function (Purpose) Used to set the operating conditions of
CLUM2 Tray 2 lift-up motor
aging.
CPUC2 Tray 2 paper feed clutch
MPUC Manual paper feed clutch Section
MPFS Manual feed take-up solenoid Operation/Procedure
MPGS Manual paper feed gate solenoid 1) Select the target to be set with the touch panel key.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
 The machine is rebooted in the aging mode.
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
)(('287387&+(&. The aging operation condition set by this mode is maintained here-
3)0 550 320) 3205
after unless the power is turned off or the setting is changed.
)80 &3)0 260 &3)&

&3)& 3636 &/80 &38&
AGING Aging operation setup
INTERVAL Intermittent setup
&/80 &38& 038& 03)6
MISFEED DISABLE JAM detection enable/disable setup
03*6
FUSING DISABLE Fusing operation enable/disable setup
WARMUP DISABLE Warm-up skip setup
DV CHECK DISABLE DV unit detection enable/disable setup
SHADING DISABLE Shading disable setup
(;(&87( 
CCD GAIN FREE No setting of the CCD gain adjustment



ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
6-2 $*,1*7(676(77,1*

Purpose Operation test/check
$*,1* ,17(59$/
0,6)(('ǂ',6$%/( )86,1*ǂ',6$%/(

Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of each fan :$5083ǂ',6$%/( '9ǂ&+(&.ǂ',6$%/(
6+$',1*ǂ',6$%/( &&'ǂ*$,1ǂ)5((
and its control circuit.
Section Others
Operation/Procedure
1) Select the item to be operation checked with the touch panel
key.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
(;(&87(
The selected load performs the operation. 

When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated.
Press [ALL] key to select all the fans collectively.

MX-M503N SIMULATION 5 – 14

7-6 7-12
Purpose Setting Purpose Operation test/check
Function (Purpose) Used to set the operating intermittent aging Function (Purpose) The document reading number of sheets
cycle. setting (for aging operation)
Section Section Automatic document feeder
Operation/Procedure Operation/Procedure
1) Enter the intermittent aging operation cycle (unit: sec) with 10- 1) Set document reading quantity with 10-key.
key. (Setting range: 0 - 255)
2) Press [OK] key. 2) Press [OK] key. The set value is saved.
The time entered in procedure 1) is set. The aging operation condition set by this mode is maintained here-
* The interval time that can be set is 1 to 900 (sec). after unless the power is turned off or the setting is changed.
The aging operation condition set by this mode is maintained here-
after unless the power is turned off or the setting is changed. 

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
25,*,1$/66(77,1*
 $˖ ˖25,*,1$/6
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( $˖ 
,17(59$/$*,1*&<&/(7,0(6(783
˷̚˹
$˖ ˖&<&/(ǂ7,0(˄6(&˅
$˖ 
˷̚˹

2.

2.

8
7-8
Purpose Information display/print 8-1
Function (Purpose) Used to display the warm-up time.
Purpose Adjustment
Section Fusing
Function (Purpose) Used to check and adjust the operations of
Operation/Procedure the developing voltage in each print mode
Press [EXECUTE] key. and the control circuit.
Counting of the warm-up time is started and the time required for Section Toner supply, developing
warm-up is displayed Operation/Procedure
* Interruption of counting by pressing [EXECUTE] key is inhibited. 1) Enter the setting value with 10-key.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key.


ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( The entered voltage is outputted for 30 sec and the set value is
:$50837,0(',63/$<6(77,1*
6(&21'6
saved.
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed during outputting, the opera-
tion is terminated.

Setting Default
Item/Display Content
range value
A DVB_K K developing bias set value 0-700 496


ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
(;(&87( '96(77,1*$1'287387
$˖ ˖'9%B.
$˖ 
˷̚˹

0,''/( /2: (;(&87( 2.

MX-M503N SIMULATION 5 – 15

8-2 Setting Default
Item/Display Content
range value
Purpose Adjustment
A GB_K K charging/grid bias set value 0 - 850 650
Function (Purpose) Used to check and adjust the operation of
the main charger grid voltage in each
printer mode and the control circuit. 
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(

Section Photo-conductor 0+9*5,'6(77,1*$1'287387
$˖ ˖*%B.
Operation/Procedure $˖ 
1) Enter the setting value with 10-key. ˷̚˹

2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The entered voltage is outputted for 30 sec and the set value is
saved.
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed during outputting, the opera-
tion is terminated.

0,''/( /2: (;(&87( 2.

8-6
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to check and adjust the operation of
the transport voltage and the control circuit.
Section Transfer
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a target item to be adjusted with [] [] key.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
Enter the default value specified on the following list.
3) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The set value is saved and the voltage corresponding to the
set value is output for 30 sec.
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed during outputting, the opera-
tion is terminated.

Setting Default value
Item/Display Content
range 28/36 CPM model 45/50 CPM model
A TC PLAIN BW SPX Transfer current Black/White Standard Front surface 0 - 255 113 129
B TC PLAIN BW DPX paper modeBack surface 0 - 255 113 129
C TC HEAVY BW SPX Heavy paper Front surface 0 - 255 113 129
D TC HEAVY BW DPX mode Back surface 0 - 255 113 129
E TC OHP BW OHP mode 0 - 255 113 129
F TC ENVELOPE BW Envelope mode 0 - 255 113 129
G TC CLEANING Transfer cleaning Cleaning in the normal operation mode 0 - 255 161 161
H TC CLEANING PROCON bias voltage Cleaning in the process control mode 0 - 255 161 161
I TC ADSORPTION Transfer current between paper 0 - 255 113 129


ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
7+96(77,1*$1'287387
$˖ ˖7&3/$,1%:63;
$˖  %˖ ˖7&3/$,1%:'3;

˷̚˹ &˖ ˖7&+($9<%:63;
'˖ ˖7&+($9<%:'3;
(˖ ˖7&2+3%:

)˖ ˖7&(19(/23(%:
*˖ ˖7&&/($1,1*

+˖ ˖7&&/($1,1*352&21

,˖ ˖7&$'62537,21

(;(&87( 2.

MX-M503N SIMULATION 5 – 16

8-17 9-3
Purpose Adjustment Purpose Operation test/check
Function (Purpose) Used to check and adjust the operation of Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the load in
the separation bias voltage and the control the paper reverse section (duplex section)
circuit. and its control circuit.
Section Section Duplex
Operation/Procedure Operation/Procedure
1) Select a target item to be adjusted with [] [] key. 1) Select the item to be operation checked with the touch panel
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. key.
Enter the default value specified on the following list. 2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
3) Press [EXECUTE] key. The selected load performs the operation.
The set value is saved and the voltage corresponding to the When [EXECUTE] key is pressed during operation, the opera-
set value is output for 30 sec. tion is terminated.
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed during outputting, the opera-
ADUM_L ADU motor lower
tion is terminated.
ADUM_U ADU motor upper
Setting Default ADUGS ADU gate solenoid
Item/Display Content
range value
A PLV (FACE) Separation bias output 0 - 255 170 
(Front surface) ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(

B PLV (BACK) Separation bias output 0 - 255 170 $'8/2$'&+(&.
㪘㪘㪘㪘㪘㪘㪘㪘㪘㪘㪘
$'80B/ $'80B8 $'8*6
(Back surface)


ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
7+9$&6(77,1*$1'287387
$˖ ˖3/9 )$&(

$˖  %˖ ˖3/9 %$&.

˷̚˹

(;(&87( 

10
(;(&87( 2.

10-1
Purpose Operation test/check
9 Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the toner
supply mechanism (toner clutch) and the
9-2 related circuit.
Purpose Operation test/check Section Toner supply, developing
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the sensors Operation/Procedure
and detectors in the switchback section 1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
(duplex section) and the control circuit. The selected load operation is performed for 10 sec.
Section Paper feed, paper reverse/transport When [EXECUTE] key is pressed during operation, the opera-
Operation/Procedure tion is terminated.
The operating conditions of the sensors and detectors are dis- NOTE: This simulation must be executed without installing the
played. toner cartridges.
The code names of the sensors and the detectors which are active If this simulation is executed with the toner cartridges
are highlighted. installed, toner will be forcibly supplied to the developing
unit, resulting in over toner.
DSW_ADU ADU transport open/close detection
APPD1 ADU transport detection 1
If this simulation is erroneously executed with the toner car-
APPD2 ADU transport detection 2
tridge installed, the over toner state may be canceled by
making several background copies.

 
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
$'86(1625&+(&. 721(5&/87&+$&7,9$7,21
'6:B$'8 $33' $33'
7'6& 710B& 710B0 710B<



(;(&87(


MX-M503N SIMULATION 5 – 17

2) Press [YES] key to execute cancellation of the trouble. Section $5(<28685(" Operation/Procedure <(6 12 (. H4.(&87(   ǂǂǂ6.21 13-- Purpose Cancel Function (Purpose) Used to cancel the self-diag "U1" trouble.21 27+(5. H5" trouble.21ǂǂ12 7(67 87528%/(&$1&(//$7. 13 ǂǂǂ6.08/$7.21ǂǂ12 7(67   &/26( /&&7528%/(&$1&(//$7. Section Fusing Operation/Procedure 1) Press [EXECUTE] key.08/$7.21 &/26( 14-- Purpose Cancel Function (Purpose) Used to cancel the self-diag "H3. 2) Press [YES] key to execute cancellation of the trouble.  14 ǂǂǂ6. $5(<28685(" <(6 12 (.21 16 16-- Purpose Cancel Function (Purpose) Used to cancel the self-diag "U2" trouble. 2) Press [YES] key to execute cancellation of the trouble. $5(<28685(" <(6 12 (.21ǂǂ12 7(67 &/26( 7528%/(&$1&(//$7.21ǂǂ12 7(67 &/26( 87528%/(&$1&(//$7.(&87(  ǂǂǂ6. Section MFP (ICU) PWB Operation/Procedure 1) Press [EXECUTE] key.08/$7.08/$7.(&87( 1) Press [EXECUTE] key.

2) Press [YES] key to execute cancellation of the trouble. Section Paper feed. 17 17-- Purpose Cancel Function (Purpose) Used to cancel the self-diag "PF" trouble. paper reverse/transport Operation/Procedure $5(<28685(" <(6 12 (. MX-M503N SIMULATION 5 – 18 .08/$7.21 15-- Purpose Cancel Function (Purpose) Used to cancel the self-diag "U6-09" trou- ble.21ǂǂ12 7(67 &/26( 3)7528%/(&$1&(//$7. Section LCC Operation/Procedure 1) Press [EXECUTE] key. $5(<28685(" <(6 12 (.   15 ǂǂǂ6.(&87( 1) Press [EXECUTE] key.(&87( 2) Press [YES] key to execute cancellation of the trouble.

SEND cleaning send 65535 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.100 COUNTER counter 1 . 8 Section other counter Operation/Procedure Maintenance MAINTENANCE Maintenance 0 Max.08/$7.740 Item/Display Content Setting range value DAY web unit A MAINTENANCE Maintenance 0 : Default 150K*1/ Drum life DRUM LIFE (K) Accumulated 0 0 .21ǂǂ12 7(67 &/26( &2817(5'. (The set value is saved. 8 Purpose Setting filing document filing print counter Function (Purpose) Used to set the maintenance cycle.100 *1: 28 CPM model *2: 36/45/50 CPM model life meter number of (%) (1% developer unit) Default value rotations (K) Item 28 CPM model 36/45/50 CPM model Group A Group B Group A Group B  A 100 150 150 200 ǂǂǂ6. 8 counter ALL counter (Total) 1) Select a target item of setting with [] [] key on the touch Fuser unit FUSER WEB Fuser web 0 0- panel. Display 21 Target Display Content Default range/ counter value No. 8 UNIT counter Default FUSER WEB Use day of fuser 0 0 . counter 3) Press [OK] key. Other OTHER (BW) Black and white 0 Max.300: 1K . of digits 21-1 Document DOC FIL (BW) Black and white 0 Max.) FUSER WEB Fuser web print 0 Max.300K 200K*2 meter number of drum (%) (1% (TOTAL) (Total) 999 : Free rotations (K) unit) Developer DEVE LIFE (K) Accumulated 0 0 .63/$< 727$/287 %:.

 Group Destination 727$/ %:.

 Group A Japan – – – – 727$/ &2/.

S.A. Canada Inch AB_B Europe &23< %:. Group B U.

 35.17 %:.

/ %:. U. AB_A China – '2&). AUS.K.

ǂ 27+(5 %:.

21ǂǂ12 7(67 &/26( )86(5:(%81.17(1$1&(ǂ&2817(5˄727$/˅ $˖ '580/. 0$.7 0$.08/$7.17(1$1&(&<&/(6(783 )86(5:(%'$< $˖ ˖0$.17(1$1&($//   )86(5:(%6(1' ǂǂǂ6.)( .

  %˖ '(9(/.)( .

8 quantity (BW) quantity of black and white Total use TOTAL (BW) Total use 0 Max. Section Operation/Procedure The paper jam. of digits Total output TOTAL OUT Total output 0 Max.21ǂǂ12 7(67 &/26( -$07528%/(&2817(5'. 2. trouble counter value is displayed.63/$< Section 0$&+. 8  quantity quantity of black and white Copy COPY (BW) Black and white 0 Max.08/$7. 8 copy counter Print PRINT (BW) Black and white 0 Max. 22 Item/Display Content MACHINE JAM Machine JAM counter RSPF/DSPF JAM SPFJAM counter 22-1 TROUBLE Trouble counter Purpose Information display Function (Purpose) Used to display the print count value of  each section and the operation mode. 8 print counter MX-M503N SIMULATION 5 – 19 . ǂǂǂ6. ˷̚˹  22-2 Purpose Information display Function (Purpose) Used to display the number of total mis- feed and the number of troubles.1(-$0 Operation/Procedure 563)'63)-$0 7528%/( Display Target Default range/ Display Content counter value No.

) ACRE (MAIN) ACRE (Main section) (N model only) ACRE (DATA) ACRE (Data section) (N model only)   ǂǂǂ6.&8 0$.08/$7.63/$< &/26( [N model] 33'B1&3)'B60)775$< 33'B1&3)'B633'B1'3)'B1   /&&33'B35.21ǂǂ12 7(67 -$0+.'3)'B1/&& ǂǂǂ6.22-3 Item/Display Content FINISHER Finisher Purpose Information display PUNCH Punch unit Function (Purpose) Used to display the mis-feed position and NIC NIC the number of mis-feed at the position.1.21ǂǂ12 &/26( 7(67 32'B633'B35. POWER-CON Power controller Section E-MANUAL Operation manual (HDD storage) WATER MARK Watermark (HDD storage) Operation/Procedure ESCP ESCP font ROM The paper jam and mis-feed history is displayed from the latest one PDL PDL font ROM up to 50 items.75$<)3''B6 61 )'230)7 .6725<'$7$'. (The old ones are deleted sequentially.08/$7.

& .&8 %227. 1.

1.& :$7(50$5. 3&8 (6&3 6&8 3'/ 63) $&5( 0$. 32:(5&21 /$1*8$*( (0$18$/ *5$3+.

 )$. 0$.1.

121( $&5( '$7$.

1. 0$. )$.

1.  Section ǂǂǂ6.08/$7.121(  '(6.&8 0$.21ǂǂ12 7(67 &/26( 61 Operation/Procedure .6+(5 22-4 381&+  Purpose Information display [U model] Function (Purpose) Used to display the trouble (self diag) his- tory.1.121( /&& ).

.&8 %227. 6&8 The trouble history is displayed from the latest one up to 30 items.

 )$. 0$.1.

1.) /$1*8$*( )$.121( (The old ones are deleted sequentially. 0$.

121( 3&8     ǂǂǂ6.63/$< ())/ 22-6 )/)) )/)) ))+( Purpose Information print 8)/( Function (Purpose) Used to print information on various set- tings. adjustments.08/$7.) $˖ ˖'$7$3$77(51 $˖ ICU (MAIN) ICU (Main section)  ˷̚˹ ICU (BOOT) ICU (Boot section) LANGUAGE Language support data version GRAPHIC Graphic data for LCD PCU PCU SCU SCU SPF DSPF/RSPF FAX1 (MAIN) FAX 1-Line (Main section) DESK Desk unit (.08/$7. mode Section A DATA PATTERN 1 Firmware version.1702'( &/26( are "X" and "Y" respectively. 22-5 (Memory trouble. Section Operation/Procedure  * When installing or servicing. counters. etc. 1). use this simulation to 2) Press [EXECUTE] key to start printing the list selected in step check the ROM version. counter data.(&87( 2. etc. and versions.21ǂǂ12 S/N Serial No. and upgrade the version if necessary. Purpose Information display Function (Purpose) Used to display the ROM version of each Print list Item/Display Print content unit (section). controls.& '(6. When there is any trouble in the software. this simulation is executed to print the adjustment data and set data for use in the next servicing. (The codes for November and December 7(67 '$7$35. LCC Side LCC MX-M503N SIMULATION 5 – 20 . PWB replacement.21ǂǂ12 7(67 &/26( 7528%/(&2'('$7$'. Item/Display Content  ǂǂǂ6.) 1) Select the print list mode with 10-key. 2 — Operation/Procedure 3 Data related to the process control The ROM version of the installed unit in each section is displayed.121( *5$3+.

63/$< 75$< Function (Purpose) Used to display the number of operations 75$< (the counter value) of the finisher. paper reverse/transport PS MX-PKX1 PS expansion kit XPS MX-PUX1 XPS expansion kit Operation/Procedure SECURITY MX-FR14U Data security kit The counter values related to paper feed are displayed.) [N model]  ǂǂǂ6.0( LCC MX-LCX1 A4 Large capacity tray (side LCC) PUNCHER MX-PNX1A Punch module  MX-PNX1B MX-PNX1C [RSPF-installed model] MX-PNX1D MX-PNX5A  MX-PNX5B ǂǂǂ6.21ǂǂ12 7(67 &/26( MX-PNX5C 25*67$3/(&2817(5'. and the scanner /&& related counters are displayed. STANDARD drive Section Paper feed. HP_ON Number of scanner HP detection OC LAMP TIME Total lighting time of the lamp in OC section Section (* hour * minutes) Operation/Procedure DSPF LAMP TIME Total lighting time of the lamp in DSPF section The system configuration is displayed. (* hour * minutes) (DSPF-installed model only) (The model names of the installed devices and options are dis- [DSPF-installed model] played.63/$< MX-PNX5D 63) 6$''/(67$3/(5 MX-PNX6A 6&$1 6$''/(9)2/' MX-PNX6B 67$3/(5 &29(5 MX-PNX6C 381&+(5 +3B21 MX-PNX6D   67$03 2&/$037.22-8   ǂǂǂ6. $'8 SPF Document feed quantity  SCAN Number of times of scan STAPLER Staple counter PUNCHER Puncher counter STAMP Stamp counter 22-10 SADDLE STAPLER Saddle staple counter Purpose Information display SADDLE V FOLD Saddle finisher V fold counter Function (Purpose) Used to display the system configuration COVER Cover open/close counter (options and internal hardware).21ǂǂ12 7(67 &/26( Device Model name Content 25*67$3/(&2817(5'. the DSPF.21ǂǂ12 Purpose Information display 7(67 &/26( 3$3(5)(('&2817(5'. (commercial version) (For the machine with HDD TRAY1 Tray 1 paper feed counter installed) TRAY2 Tray 2 paper feed counter MX-FR15U Data security kit TRAY3 Tray 3 paper feed counter (Authentication version) TRAY4 Tray 4 paper feed counter (For the machine without HDD MFT TOTAL Manual paper feed counter (Total) installed) MFT HEAVY Manual paper feed counter (Heavy paper) MX-FR14 Data security kit MFT OHP Manual paper feed counter (OHP) (Authentication version) MFT ENV Manual paper feed counter (Envelope) (For the machine with HDD installed) LCC Side LCC paper feed counter (A4 LCC) AIM MX-AMX1 Application integration module ADU ADU paper feed counter (Paper reverse section) SDRAM (SYS) *****MB SDRAM capacity MX-M503N SIMULATION 5 – 21 . the 75$< DSPF/RSPF.08/$7.08/$7. and scanning (reading).0( FINISHER MX-FNX9 Inner finisher MX-FN10 Saddle stitch finisher (1K) MX-FN11 Finisher (4K) 22-9 FAX1 MX-FXX2 Facsimile expansion kit NETWORK MX-NSX1/ Network scanner expansion kit Purpose Information display SCANNER STANDARD Function (Purpose) Used to display the print quantity of each PRINTER MX-PB11/ Printer expansion kit with hard paper feed section. 75$< 0)7727$/ Section 0)7+($9< Operation/Procedure 0)72+3 0)7(19 The counter values of the finisher.08/$7.0( MX-DEX9 Stand/2x500 sheet paper drawer '63)/$037.63/$< 63) MACHINE MX-M283N Main unit 6&$1 MX-M363N 67$3/(5 MX-M453N 381&+(5 MX-M503N 67$03 6$''/(67$3/(5 SPF STANDARD Auto document feeder 6$''/(9)2/' STAMP AR-SU1 Finish stamp &29(5 DESK MX-DEX8 Stand/1x500 sheet paper drawer +3B21 2&/$037.

1(6<67(0 67$03 $568 6(&85. Device Model name Content Device Model name Content SDRAM (ICU) *****MB SDRAM capacity AIM MX-AMX1 Application integration module HDD *****MB Hard disk capacity SDRAM (SYS) *****MB SDRAM capacity NIC STANDARD NIC SDRAM (ICU) *****MB SDRAM capacity BARCODE AR-PF1 Bar code font HDD *****MB Hard disk capacity INTERNET-FAX MX-FWX1 Internet Fax expansion kit NIC STANDARD NIC ACM (*) MX-AMX2 Application communication BARCODE AR-PF1 Bar code font ("STANDARD" for module INTERNET-FAX MX-FWX1 Internet Fax expansion kit North America) ACM (*) MX-AMX2 Application communication EAM (*) MX-AMX3 External account module ("STANDARD" for module ACRE MX-EBX3 Enhanced compression kit North America) (ACRE) EAM (*) MX-AMX3 External account module ACRE NONE Enhanced compression kit (*): Displayed in the OSA model only. 63)67$1'$5' ). ǂǂǂ6.$0.)58 0$&+.1(6<67(0 &/26(  0$&+..1(0.08/$7.08/$7. 0$&+.21ǂǂ12 7(67 0$&+.1.7< 0.36 0.'(.0 0. /&& 0.31./&.01 36 0.38.$ '(6.6+(50.)1. 0.08 381&+(50. $. (ACRE)   ǂǂǂ6. 6'5$0 6<6.3.1( 0.21ǂǂ12 7(67 &/26( 63) 67$1'$5' .

0..31.$ 6'5$0 . ˆˆˆˆˆ0% 67$03$568 )$.&8. 381&+(5 0.).

 121( %$5&2'( $53) )$.1. )$.6+(5 0.ǂ6&$11(5 0. 1(7:25. +'' ˆˆˆˆˆ0% )$.& 67$1'$5' /&&0.17(5 0./&.17(51(7)$.):. 1.'(..3% $&0 . ˆˆˆˆˆ0% '(6.16. )$.)/.0. 0. 35.0(025< $500 )217 121( +$1'6(7 121( .)1. ).0.0(025<$500   )$.). 0.

 0. 22-11 ($0 .$0.

) (commercial version) * For the list of the jam codes.) MACHINE MX-M363U Main unit MX-M453U Section FAX unit (TEL/LIU. installed) MX-M503N SIMULATION 5 – 22 .21ǂǂ12 7(67 &/26( MX-PNX6A )$.&2817(5'. Refer to "Paper JAM code list" in (For the machine with HDD [6] SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE.9('ǂ7. FAX control PWB) MX-M503U Operation/Procedure SPF STANDARD Reversing single pass feeder The values of the FAX send counter and the FAX receive counter STAMP AR-SU1 Finish stamp are displayed. Device Model name Content (Only when FAX is installed.$0.63/$< )$.  Purpose Information display [U model] Function (Purpose) Used to display the use frequency of send/ receive of FAX.9(' MX-PNX6D 6(1'ǂ.ǂ6(1' MX-PNX6C )$. MX-FR15U Data security kit Section Automatic document feeder (Authentication version) (For the machine without HDD Operation/Procedure installed) The paper jam and mis-feed history is displayed from the latest one MX-FR14 Data security kit up to 50 items. (The old ones are deleted sequentially.0$*(6 6(1'ǂ7.08/$7.0( FINISHER MX-FNX9 Inner finisher 5(&(.ǂ5(&(.ǂ287387 MX-PNX6B )$. DESK MX-DEX8 Stand/1x500 sheet paper drawer MX-DEX9 Stand/2x500 sheet paper drawer FAX OUTPUT FAX print quantity counter (for line 1) LCC MX-LCX1 A4 Large capacity tray (side LCC) FAX SEND FAX send counter PUNCHER MX-PNX1A Punch module FAX RECEIVED FAX receive counter MX-PNX1B SEND IMAGES FAX send quantity counter (for line 1) MX-PNX1C SEND TIME FAX send time MX-PNX1D RECEIVED TIME FAX receive time MX-PNX5A ACR SEND Number of carrier prefix adding communications MX-PNX5B MX-PNX5C  MX-PNX5D ǂǂǂ6.0( MX-FN10 Saddle stitch finisher (1K) $&5ǂ6(1' MX-FN11 Finisher (4K) FAX1 MX-FXX2 Facsimile expansion kit NETWORK MX-NSX1 Network scanner expansion kit SCANNER PRINTER MX-PB10 Printer expansion kit  MX-PB11 Printer expansion kit with hard drive PS MX-PKX1 PS expansion kit 22-12 XPS MX-PUX1 XPS expansion kit Purpose Information display SECURITY MX-FR14U Data security kit (commercial version) Function (Purpose) Used to display the mis-feed position of the (For the machine with HDD DSPF/RSPF and the number of mis-feed at installed) the position. 0.

6725<'$7$'.21ǂǂ12 7(67 &/26( 1(7:25.ǂ    Address registration INDIVIDUAL LIST '(9(5$1*(.9( Function (Purpose) Used to display the use quantity of the pro. toner 0$. SETTINGS LIST (SECURITY) ADMIN.image send.287387 Purpose Information display .08/$7.6(1'287387 .  MEMORY BOX LIST 721(57851. DEVE DAY K Number of day that used developer (Day) K 3) Press [EXECUTE] key to start self print of the list. SETTINGS LIST (PRINT) ADMIN. . TONER MOTOR K Toner motor print counter (K) TONER TURN K Toner motor accumulated rotation time (sec) (K) All setting list ALL CUSTOM SETTING LIST Printer test page PCL SYMBOL SET LIST PCL INTERNAL FONT LIST   ǂǂǂ6.63/$< 1(76&125*B%: 1(76&125*B&/ 22-13 . To network INBOUND ROUTING LIST Transfer table list NET SCN ORG_B/W Network scanner document read quantity To administrator DOCUMENT ADMIN LIST counter (B/W scan job) Transfer list NET SCN ORG_CL Network scanner document read quantity Web setting list WEB SETTING LIST counter (Color scan job) (N model only) Meta data set list METADATA SET LIST INTERNET FAX Number of internet FAX output OUTPUT * When the data list print of system setting is inhibition in DSK INTERNET FAX SEND Number of internet FAX sending page model.17(51(7)$.  PS EXTENDED FONT LIST '580'$<. SETTINGS LIST (COPY) ADMIN.17(51(7)$. SETTINGS LIST (DOC FILING) Purpose Information display ADMIN. OUTPUT MX-M503N SIMULATION 5 – 23 . DV unit.  ALL SENDING ADDRESS LIST Document filing list DOCUMENT FILING FOLDER LIST  System setting list ADMIN.'*('.08/$7./&2817(5 )73&2817(5 cartridge). SETTINGS LIST (IMAGE SEND) 22-19 ADMIN. 60%6(1' Section Process 86%&17 75.21ǂǂ12 7(67 &/26( RECEIVE 63)-$0+.21ǂǂ12 7(67 &/26( PCL EXTENDED FONT LIST 352&(66&$575.$/02'(B% & Operation/Procedure 6&$172+''B%: 6&$172+''B&/  The rotating time and the print quantity of the process section are  displayed. SETTINGS LIST (COMMON) Function (Purpose) Used to display various counter values ALL ADMINISTRATOR SETTINGS LIST related to scan .  list (*) GROUP LIST '(9('$<.5(&(.6(1' cess section (OPC drum.  PROGRAM LIST 721(502725.  '5805$1*(.  '(9(7851. DEVE TURN K Developer cartridge accumulated rotation time (K) 2) Select the print target with the keys on the touch panel.17(51(7)$.17(51(7)$.ǂ   NIC PAGE '(9(&75*.08/$7.  PS KANJI FONT LIST '5807851.6&$11(5&2817(5'.63/$< PS FONT LIST '580&75*. INTERNET FAX Number of internet FAX receive   ǂǂǂ6. this setting is invalid. DRUM DAY K Number of day that used drum (Day) K Section DEVE CTRG K Developer cartridge print counter (K) Operation/Procedure DEVE RANGE K Developer cartridge accumulated traveling distance (cm) (K) 1) Change the display with [] [] key. Receive YES/NO ANTI JUNK FAX NUMBER LIST Section number table Operation/Procedure Receive rejection/ ANTI JUNK MAIL/DOMAIN NAME LIST allow address Used to display the counter value related to the network scanner domain table Change the display with [] [] key. DRUM CTRG K Drum cartridge print counter (K) 22-90 DRUM RANGE K Drum cartridge accumulated traveling distance (cm) (K) Purpose Information print DRUM TURN K Drum cartridge accumulated rotation time (K) Function (Purpose) Used to output the various set data lists.63/$< INTERNET FAX SEND Number of internet FAX send     MAIL COUNTER Number of times of E-MAIL send   FTP COUNTER Number of FTP send   SMB SEND Number of SMB send   USB CNT Number of times of USB storage     TRIAL MODE_B&C Trial mode counter (B/W & COLOR scan job)   SCAN TO HDD_B/W SCAN TO HDD record quantity (B/W)   SCAN TO HDD_CL SCAN TO HDD record quantity (COLOR)   (N model only)        ǂǂǂ6.

17 '$7$35.08/$7.08/$7.   ǂǂǂ6.1702'( 3$3(5)(('.21ǂǂ12 &/26( 7(67 /.21ǂǂ12 7(67 &/26( ǂǂǂ6.6735.

)217/.0(/. $//&867206(77.67 3$3(5)(('7.&3$*( .67 3&/.1*)2/'(5/.67 352*5$0/.1*6/./.67 1.7(1'(')217/./.67 $//6(1'.67 *5283/.1'.1*/.16(77.17(51$/)217/.67 3&/6<0%2/6(7/.$1-.7(1'(')217/.67 36(.1*$''5(66/.67 '2&80(17).67 $'0.67 3&/(.67 0(025<%2.67 36.9.'8$//.67 &23<.67 36)217/.

$'0.16(77.67 35.17.1*6/.

1*6/. $'0.0$*(6(1'.16(77.67 .

1*.67 '2&)./.1*6/.16(77. $'0.

67 6(&85. $'0.7<.1*6/.16(77.

$'0.67 &20021.1*6/.16(77.

(&87(  (. The target counter is cleared.21ǂǂ12 7(67 &/26( The target counter is cleared.67 (. ble counter. paper reverse/transport The timing list of paper feed and paper transport operations of the Operation/Procedure latest job (copy or print) on the final paper is printed.67 $17. 2) Press [EXECUTE] key. $//$'0.67 . 2) Press [EXECUTE] key. 1) Select the item to be cleared with the touch panel key.67 $17. 1) Select the item to be cleared with the touch panel key.Detection operation or load operation name) TRAY1 Tray 1 paper feed counter STANDARD Standard value (ms) TRAY2 Tray 2 paper feed counter CURRENT (*1) Operation timing (ms) of the latest job on the TRAY3 Tray 3 paper feed counter final paper TRAY4 Tray 4 paper feed counter PREVIOUS (*1) Operation timing (ms) of the second latest job MFT TOTAL Manual paper feed counter (Total) on the final paper MFT HEAVY Manual paper feed counter (Heavy paper) MAXIMUM (*1) Max.1*6/.17 MACHINE Machine JAM counter SPF DSPF/RSPF JAM counter TROUBLE Trouble counter   ǂǂǂ6. and the trou- paper jam and mis-feed. Section Paper feed. SECTION Operation content (Trigger name . The trouble history of paper jams and mis-feed is printed.1*/. sor and the detectors and the operation timing also differ. operation timing (ms) of all the jobs MFT ENV Manual paper feed counter (Envelope) *1: The value without unit on the left side of each item on the list LCC Side LCC paper feed counter (A4 LCC) has no relation to the operation timing.(&87(@7235. in the paper feed and transport section.0$. Since the paper feed and paper transport routes differ depending on the used paper feed tray and the print operation mode.675$7256(77. It is not used in the market. the sen.11$0(/.(&87( 23-80 Purpose Information print Function (Purpose) Used to output the operation data of paper feed and paper transport in the paper feed/ $5(<28685(" <(6 12 (.)$. 3) Press [YES] key. ADU ADU paper feed counter MX-M503N SIMULATION 5 – 24 .1( 63) 7528%/( (.21ǂǂ12 7(67 &/26( -$07528%/(&2817(5'$7$&/($5 0$&+. Section Section Operation/Procedure Operation/Procedure Press [EXECUTE] key to execute print.1%281'5287. the timing list of paper feed and Purpose Data clear/Reset paper transport is outputted.-81. paper reverse/transport Operation/Procedure 24-2 When [EXECUTE] key is pressed. -$07528%/('$7$35.180%(5/.   ǂǂǂ6.(&87( transport section.08/$7.(&87(  23 24 23-2 24-1 Purpose Information print Purpose Data clear/Reset Function (Purpose) Used to output the trouble history list of Function (Purpose) Used to clear the jam counter.08/$7.1702'( 35(66>(.  Section Paper feed.177+(-$07528%/(35./'20$. operation timing (ms) of all the jobs MFT OHP Manual paper feed counter (OHP) MINIMUM (*1) Min. 3) Press [YES] key. Function (Purpose) Used to clear the number of use (the num- Used to print the operations timing list of the sensors and detectors ber of prints) of each paper feed section.-81.1.

 Section ǂǂǂ6.21ǂǂ12 7(67 3$3(5)(('&2817(5&/($5 &/26( Purpose Data clear/Reset 75$< 75$< 75$< 75$< Function (Purpose) Used to clear the maintenance counter.7 / (. $5(<28685(" <(6 12 (.21ǂǂ12 7(67 &/26( 0$. MAINTENANCE ALL Maintenance counter (Total) 24-3 FUSER WEB SEND Fuser web send counter FUSER WEB Fuser web print counter Purpose Data clear/Reset FUSER WEB DAY Fuser web unit use day Function (Purpose) Used to clear the finisher. and the scan (reading) unit counter.08/$7.   24-4 ǂǂǂ6. the 0)7727$/ 0)7+($9< 0)72+3 0)7(19 printer counters of the transfer unit and the /&& $'8 fusing unit. 2) Press [EXECUTE] key. 3) Press [YES] key.17(1$1&($// )86(5:(%6(1' )86(5:(% )86(5:(%'$< 1) Select the item to be cleared with the touch panel key.08/$7.(&87(  The target counter is cleared. )86(581. Section Operation/Procedure 1) Select the item to be cleared with the touch panel key.17(1$1&(&2817(5&/($5 Operation/Procedure 0$. DSPF/RSPF.

)86(5'$< 8.

)86(5'$< / (.

2) Press [EXECUTE] key. ǂ

3) Press [YES] key.
The target counter is cleared.

SPF DSPF/RSPF document feed counter
SCAN Scan counter
STAPLER Staple counter
$5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(
PUNCHER Puncher counter 

STAMP Stamp counter
SADDLE STAPLER Saddle staple counter
SADDLE V FOLD Saddle finisher V fold counter
24-5
COVER Cover open/close counter
HP_ON HP detection count Purpose Data clear/Reset
OC LAMP TIME OC section lamp total lighting time Function (Purpose) Used to clear the developer counter.
DSPF LAMP TIME DSPF section lamp total lighting time Section Toner supply, developing
(DSPF-installed model only)
Operation/Procedure
[DSPF-installed model] 1) Select the item to be cleared with the touch panel key.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key.


ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( 3) Press [YES] key.
25*287387&2817(5'$7$&/($5
63) 6&$1 67$3/(5 381&+(5
The target counter is cleared.
67$03 6$''/(67$3/(5 6$''/(9)2/' &29(5
NOTE: When SIM25-2 is executed, this counter is also cleared
automatically.
+3B21 2&/$037,0( '63)/$037,0(

Developer cartridge print counter (K)
Developer cartridge accumulated traveling distance (cm) (K)
Number of day that used developer (Day) K


ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
$5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(  '(9(/23(5&2817(5'$7$&/($5
. & 0 <

[RSPF-installed model]


ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
25*287387&2817(5'$7$&/($5
63) 6&$1 67$3/(5 381&+(5

67$03 6$''/(67$3/(5 6$''/(9)2/' &29(5
+3B21 2&/$037,0(

$5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87( 
$5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(  

MX-M503N SIMULATION 5 – 25

24-6 24-9
Purpose Data clear/Reset Purpose Data clear/Reset
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the copy counter. Function (Purpose) Used clear the printer mode print counter
Section and the self print mode print counter.
Operation/Procedure Section
1) Select the item to be cleared with the touch panel key. Operation/Procedure
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. 1) Select the item to be cleared with the touch panel key.
3) Press [YES] key. 2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The target counter is cleared. 3) Press [YES] key.
The target counter is cleared.
COPY BW Copy counter (B/W)
PRINT BW Print counter (B/W)

 OTHER BW Other counter (B/W)
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
&23<&2817(5'$7$&/($5
&23<%: &23<&2/ 6,1*/(&2/25 &2/25 
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
35,1727+(5&2817(5&/($5
35,17%: 27+(5%:

$5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87( 

$5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87( 

24-7
Purpose Data clear/Reset
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the OPC drum counter. 24-10

Section Photoconductor Purpose Data clear/Reset
Operation/Procedure Function (Purpose) Used to clear the FAX counter.
(Only when FAX is installed)
1) Select the item to be cleared with the touch panel key.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. Section FAX unit (TEL/LIU, FAX control PWB)
3) Press [YES] key. Operation/Procedure
The target counter is cleared. 1) Select the item to be cleared with the touch panel key.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
Drum cartridge print counter (K) 3) Press [YES] key.
Drum cartridge accumulated traveling distance (cm) (K)
The target counter is cleared.
Number of day that used drum (Day) K
FAX OUTPUT FAX Print quantity counter (for line 1)

 FAX SEND FAX send counter
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( FAX RECEIVED FAX receive counter
'580&75*&2817(5&/($5
. & 0 < SEND IMAGES FAX send quantity counter (for line 1)
SEND TIME FAX send time
RECEIVED TIME FAX receive time
ACR SEND Number of carrier prefix adding communications


ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
)$;&2817(5'$7$&/($5
)$;ǂ287387 )$;ǂ6(1' )$;ǂ5(&(,9(' 6(1'ǂ,0$*(6

6(1'ǂ7,0( 5(&(,9('ǂ7,0( $&5ǂ6(1'
$5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87( 

$5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87( 

MX-M503N SIMULATION 5 – 26

24-15 24-31
Purpose Data clear/Reset Purpose Data clear/Reset
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the counters related to the Function (Purpose) Used to initialize the service mode (Web
scan mode and the image send. page) password.
Section Section
Operation/Procedure Operation/Procedure
1) Select the item to be cleared with the touch panel key. 1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. 2) Press [YES] key.
3) Press [YES] key. The service mode password is initialized.
The target counter is cleared. If the password of Web page is forgotten, execute this simulation to
set the password to "service" (default).
NET SCN ORG_B/W Network scanner document read quantity
counter (B/W scan job) 

NET SCN ORG_CL Network scanner document read quantity ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(

counter (COLOR scan job) (N model only) 6(59,&(3$66:25',1,7,$/,=(

INTERNET FAX OUTPUT Number of internet FAX output
INTERNET FAX Number of internet FAX sending page
SEND OUTPUT
INTERNET FAX Number of internet FAX receive
RECEIVE
INTERNET FAX SEND Number of internet FAX send
MAIL COUNTER Number of times of E-MAIL send
FTP COUNTER Number of FTP send
SMB SEND Number of SMB send
USB CNT Number of times of USB storage $5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(

TRIAL MODE_B&C Trial mode counter (B/W & COLOR scan job)
SCAN TO HDD_B/W SCAN TO HDD record quantity (B/W)
SCAN TO HDD_CL SCAN TO HDD record quantity (COLOR)
(N model only) 25
 25-1
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
1(7:25.6&$11(5&2817(5'$7$&/($5 Purpose Operation test/check
1(76&125*B%: 1(76&125*B&/
,17(51(7)$;ǂ287387 ,17(51(7)$;6(1'ǂ287387 Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the devel-
,17(51(7)$;ǂ5(&(,9(
0$,/&2817(5
,17(51(7ǂ)$;ǂ6(1'
)73&2817(5
oping section, and to display the toner den-
60%6(1' 86%&17 sity detection level.
75,$/02'(B% & 6&$172+''B%:
6&$172+''B&/ Section Toner supply, developing
Operation/Procedure
1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The developing motor and the OPC drum motor rotate for 3
$5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(  minutes and the output level of the toner density sensor is dis-
played.

24-30 TCD_K Toner density detection level K
Purpose Data clear/Reset TCV_K Toner density sensor output voltage level K

Function (Purpose) Used to initialize the administrator pass- NOTE: The toner cartridge must be removed before executing this
word. simulation.
Section If this simulation is executed with the toner cartridge
Operation/Procedure installed, toner will be forcibly supplied to the developing
1) Press [EXECUTE] key. unit, resulting in over toner and a trouble.
2) Press [YES] key. 
The administrator password is initialized. ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
721(56(1625287387021,725
If the administrator password of system setting and Web page is 7&'B.

forgotten, execute this simulation to set the password to "admin" 7&9B.

(default).



ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
$'0,13$66:25',1,7,$/,=(

/2: 0,''/( (;(&87( 

$5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(

MX-M503N SIMULATION 5 – 27

25-2
26
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to make the initial setting of toner
26-1
density when replacing developer. (Auto-
matic adjustment) Purpose Setting
Section Toner supply, developing Function (Purpose) Used to set the paper exit operation from
the right side.
Operation/Procedure
1) Press [EXECUTE] key. Section Paper exit section
The developing motor rotates for 3 minutes, and the toner density Operation/Procedure
sensor makes sampling of the toner density. The detected level is 1) Enter the set value with 10-key.
displayed. 2) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
After stopping the developing motor, the average value of the toner This setting is required to use the paper exit tray unit (MX-TRX1).
density sampling results is set as the reference toner density con-
trol level. Item/Display Content
A 0 YES Paper exit tray: YES
NOTE: When the above operation is interrupted on the way, the
1 NO Paper exit tray: NO
reference toner concentration level is not set. Also when
error code of EE-EC, EE-EL or EE-EU is displayed, the ref-
erence toner density level is not set normally. 

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
Do not execute this simulation unless new Developer material has 5,*+775$<6(783

been installed. If it is executed in other cases, under toner or over- $˖
$˖ ˖ <(612


tone may occur, causing a trouble. ˷̚˹

Adjustment result data display
Item/Display Content
AT DEVE ADJ _K Toner density adjustment value
AT DEVE VO _K Toner density sensor control voltage level

Data display during execution
Item/Display Content 2.

TCD_K Toner density sensor detection level K
TCV_K Toner density sensor control voltage level K
26-2
Display in case of an error
Purpose Setting
Error display Content Details of content
EE-EL EL abnormality Sensor output level less than 67, or Function (Purpose) Used to set the paper type and the weight
sensor control voltage level over 197 type.
EE-EU EU abnormality Sensor output level over 154, or sensor Section Paper feed, paper reverse/transport
control voltage level less than 49
Operation/Procedure
EE-EC EC abnormality The sampling level in the automatic
toner density adjustment is outside of Select a paper size to be changed with the touch panel.
1005.
LCC 0 8.5 x 11
1 A4

 2 B5
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
$8720$7,&'(9(/23(5$'-8670(17 G/LBS SET 0 GRAM
$7'(9($'-B.
1 LBS
$7'(9(92B.


ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
6,=(6(783
/&& ˖ h $ %
*/%66(7 ˖ *5$0 /%6

. & 0 < (;(&87( 



MX-M503N SIMULATION 5 – 28

Default
26-3 Item/Display Content
value
Purpose Setting PRINTER MODE1 PRINTER CONTROL MODE
Function (Purpose) Used to set the specifications of the auditor. CONTROL MODE1 (All the items of 1
(Japan only) OUTSIDE AUDITOR can be
selected.)
Section Auditor MODE2 PRINTER CONTROL
Operation/Procedure MODE2 (The item of
Select an item to be set with the touch panel. OUTSIDE AUDITOR must
be the value of "P VENDOR
Default 1" and the other buttons are
Item/Display Content gray out.)
value
BUILT-IN P10 Built-in auditor mode P10 MODE3 PRINTER CONTROL
AUDITOR (standard mode) operation. MODE3 (The item of
OUTSIDE AUDITOR must
EC1 EC1 mode operation
be the value of "P OTHER"
OUTSIDE NONE No external connection NONE
and the other buttons are
AUDITOR vendor is used.
gray out.)
P VENDOR1 Coin vendor mode
(Only the copy mode can be (*1) Displayed only when EQUITRAC.
controlled.)
(*2) Details of the vendor mode
P VENDOR2 Vendor mode communicating
with the parallel I/F (for Completion of Insufficient Completion of
DocuLyzer) (Japan only) the specified money during the specified
VENDOR-EX Vendor I/F for EQUITRAC VENDER quantity. copy job quantity.
(*1) MODE (Money No money (No money
VENDOR-EX VENDOR-EX + Multi job remaining) remaining remaining)
(MULTI) (*1) cueing Enable mode Condition 1 Condition 2 Condition 3
P OTHER NOT USED MODE1 Operation 1 Operation 2 Operation 1
S_VENDOR Serial vendor mode MODE2 Operation 1 Operation 1 Operation 1
DOC ADJ ON Support for the auditor in OFF MODE3 Operation 1 Operation 3 Operation 3
document filing print
OFF No support for the auditor in Operation 1:
document filing print Standby during setting time of auto clear. Default is 60 seconds,
PF ADJ ON Continuous printing is OFF which can be changed in the system setting.
performed in the duplex print
Operation 2:
mode.
Auto clear is not made.
If the remaining money
expires during continuous Operation 3:
printing, the sheets in the The display is shifted to the initial screen.
machine are discharged
without being printed on the 

back surfaces. ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
$8',7256(783
OFF Continuous printing is not %8,/7,1$8',725 ˖ 3 (&
performed in the duplex print 2876,'($8',725 ˖ 121( 39(1'25 39(1'25
mode. (The remaining 327+(5 9(1'25(; 9(1'25(; 08/7,

amount is checked for 6B9(1'25

printing every surface in all '2&$'- ˖ 21 2))
3)$'- ˖
the printing process.) 9(1'2502'( ˖
21 2))
02'( 02'( 02'(
If the remaining money &2817837,0,1* ˖ )86(5B,1 )86(5B287 (;,7B287
expires during printing, the ,06&21752/ ˖ 21 2))
sheet is discharged without 35,17(5&21752/ ˖ 02'( 02'( 02'(

printing on the back surface.
VENDOR MODE1 Vendor mode 1 MODE

MODE (*2) MODE2 Vendor mode 2 3
MODE3 Vendor mode 3
COUNTUP FUSER_IN When the paper lead edge EXIT_
TIMING passes the fusing rear OUT 26-5
sensor. Purpose Setting
FUSER_OUT When the paper rear edge
passes the fusing rear Function (Purpose) Used to set the count mode in A3 (11" x
sensor. 17") print.
EXIT_OUT When the paper rear edge Section
passes the paper exit sensor
Operation/Procedure
in the main unit, the right tray,
and the after process unit. 1) Select an item to be set with [] [] keys.
IMS ON There is some restriction in OFF 2) Enter the setting value with 10-key
CONTROL the image send mode. 1 = Count up by 1, 2 = Count up by 2
OFF There is no restriction in the 3) Press [OK] key.
image send mode.
The set value in step 2) is saved.

Item/Display Content Default value
A TOTAL (B/W) Total counter (B/W) 2
B MAINTE (B/W) Maintenance counter (B/W) 2
C DEV (B/W) Developer counter (B/W)

MX-M503N SIMULATION 5 – 29

 

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12 &/26( ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
7(67
$ h

&281783 1(7:25.6&$11(575.$/02'(6(783 $˖ ˖727$/ %:.

17( %:.$/02'(˄<(612˅ $˖ $˖   %˖ ˖0$. $˖ ˖75.

˷̚˹ &˖ ˖'(9 %:.

) Section Section Operation/Procedure Operation/Procedure 1) Select an item to be set with the touch panel. United States of America CANADA Canada Default INCH Inch series. other destinations 0 1 Copy toner save mode is allowed EUROPE Europe B PRINTER 0 Printer toner save mode is inhibited.08/$7. The selected set content is saved. U. save mode operation. AUS. 0 U. (For the Japan and the UK versions.21ǂǂ12 7(67 &/26( 721(56$9(02'(6(783 $˖ ˖&23< <(612. Australia AB_A AB series (A5 detection). other destinations Item Display Content value JAPAN Japan A COPY 0 Copy toner save mode is inhibited. 3) Press [OK] key. 1) Select an item to be set with [] [] keys. 26-18 26-6 Purpose Setting Purpose Setting Function (Purpose) Used to set Disable/Enable of the toner Function (Purpose) Used to set the specifications of the desti. 2) Enter the set value with 10-key. ˷̚˹ 2. 2.S. other destinations  CHINA China ǂǂǂ6. United Kingdom 1 Printer toner save mode is allowed. nation.K. 2) Press [EXECUTE] key. AB_B AB series (B5 detection). The set value in step 2) is saved.A.

17(5 <(612.   $˖  %˖ ˖35.

K.1&+ -$3$1 $%B% (8523( 8. Purpose Setting Section Function (Purpose) Used to set the trial mode of the network Operation/Procedure scanner. 0 (CE supported) INCH 1 (CE not supported) AUS.(&87(   Purpose Setting Function (Purpose) Used to set the operation mode corre- 26-10 sponding to the CE mark (Europe safety standards). 2) Press [OK] key. etc.S. U. 1 Control inhibited 2) Press [OK] key.A 1 (CE not supported) EUROPE 0 (CE supported) CANADA 1 (CE not supported) U. 26-30 (. The set value in step 1) is saved. the control may not be executed due (0: YES 1: NO) 1 Trial mode cancel (Default) to the power frequency. ǂǂǂ6. $86 $%B$ &+. Section Operation/Procedure 0 Control allowed 1) Enter the set value with 10-key.1$7. TRIAL MODE 0 Trial mode setting * Even in Enable state.08/$7.21ǂǂ12 7(67 &/26( ˷̚˹ '(67. 1) Enter the set value with 10-key. 0 (CE supported) JAPAN 1 (CE not supported) AB_A 0 (CE supported) AB_B 1 (CE not supported) CHINA 0 (CE supported) MX-M503N SIMULATION 5 – 30 . The set value in step 1) is saved.1$ 2.216(783 86$ &$1$'$ .

1(/.)(29(56(77.&21752/6(77.1* $˖ ˖ <(612.08/$7.21ǂǂ12 7(67 &/26( 7(67 &(0$5.1* (1*.21ǂǂ12 &/26( ǂǂǂ6.     ǂǂǂ6.08/$7.

17(1$1&(/.)(29(5 &217. $˖ ˖0$.18(6723.

18(˖6723. $˖  $˖  %˖ ˖)86(5:(%(1' ˖&217.

Operation/Procedure Section 1) Enter the set value with 10-key. 2. The set value in step 1) is saved. 2) Press [OK] key. The set value in step 1) is saved. 1 Any time display.21ǂǂ12 &/26( <Default value of each destination> 7(67 7528%/(0(025<02'(6(783 $˖ ˖ 21&($1<. cation ratio automatic select function (AMS) Section in the center binding mode. 26-35 26-41 Purpose Setting Purpose Setting Function (Purpose) Used to set the trouble history display Function (Purpose) Used to set Enable/Disable of the magnifi- mode. 0 AMS Disable 1 AMS Enable 2) Press [OK] key.08/$7. ˷̚˹ ˷̚˹ 2.   ǂǂǂ6. 0 Only once display. Operation/Procedure 1) Enter the set value with 10-key.

K. 0 (Disable) JAPAN 0 (Disable) AB_A 0 (Disable) AB_B 0 (Disable) CHINA 0 (Disable)   ǂǂǂ6.21ǂǂ12 7(67 &/26( 3$03+/(702'($066(77. U. 1 (Enable) ˷̚˹ INCH 0 (Disable) AUS.A 0 (Disable) EUROPE 1 (Enable) $˖  CANADA 0 (Disable) U.1* $˖ ˖ <(612.S.08/$7.

The set value in step 1) is saved. Section Operation/Procedure 26-49 1) Enter the set value with 10-key. 1 Continue/Stop setting of print LOW: The paper feed interval is long. ˷̚˹ 26-38 Purpose Setting Function (Purpose) Used to set "Print continue" or "Print stop" when the maintenance timing is reached or the consumable part life is over. Default Section Item/Display Content value Operation/Procedure A MAINTENANCE 0 Print continue 0 LIFE OVER 1 Print stop Select the copy speed mode with the touch panel. the number of sheets of jam paper is greater than that in the LOW mode. the paper feed interval in print or (0: CONTINUE when the fusing web is end copy in the postcard mode is changed and the job speed is 1: STOP) (Print Continue) changed accordingly. (Default: LOW) B FUSER WEB END 0 Continue/Stop setting of print 0 When the setting is changed. (Normal mode) when the fusing web is end (Print Stop) HIGH: The paper feed interval is short. Function (Purpose) Used to set the print speed of postcards mode. 2. (when a paper jam occurs.) MX-M503N SIMULATION 5 – 31 . Purpose Setting 2) Press [OK] key. $˖  2.

however.*+ 1K Postcard. tab 100 sheets of a same kind are sheet. 26-50 however. the of paper exit is operation is performed similarly detected. different kinds of paper exit tray sheets are mixed and full. limited. the of paper exit is JAPAN 1 operation is performed similarly detected. however. The operation is stopped when The operation 1) Select a target item of setting with [] [] key on the touch finisher envelope 10 sheets of a same kind are is stopped panel.08/$7. (The set value is saved. different kinds of 1 Finisher special paper sheets are mixed and The number of paper exit is discharged and less than 100 not limited. (*2)   ǂǂǂ6.1* $˖ ˖%:5(9(56(<(6 $˖  %˖ ˖). When. 1 BW reverse copy Enable to *1 Label The operation is stopped when B FINISHER 0 Finisher special paper 0 sheet. AB_B 1 to that of setting value "1".21ǂǂ12 7(67 &/26( Target Target paper setting &23<63(('02'(6(783 paper 0 1 3267&$5' ˖ /2: +. 500 discharged and less than 30 sheets. different kinds of paper exit tray Destination Item A sheets are mixed and full. OHP discharged continuously. the operation is performed similarly to that of setting value "1". detected. When.6+(5)81&7. continuously discharged. When.) discharged and less than 10 sheets. tab 100 sheets of a same kind are AUS 1 sheet. tab 100 sheets of a same kind are FUNCTION The number of paper exit is Refer sheet. discharged continuously. The operation is stopped when The operation finisher envelope 100 sheets of a same kind are is stopped (*1) Default values for each destination of item A discharged continuously. when the finisher however. or CANADA 1 sheets of a kind are 94mm height INCH 1 continuously discharged. OHP discharged continuously.  ǂǂǂ6. sheets of a kind are C FEED TRAY 0 Paper feed tray color display 0 continuously discharged. EUROPE 1 Label The operation is stopped when UK 0 sheet.1. When. when the 2) Enter the set value with 10-key. When. The operation is stopped when The operation saddle envelope 30 sheets of a same kind are is stopped stitch discharged continuously. when the however. the height of Item/Display Content value operation is performed similarly paper exit is A BW REVERSE 0 BW reverse copy Disable Refer to that of setting value "1". 650 USA 1 discharged and less than 100 sheets. Operation/Procedure Inner Postcard. the Section operation is performed similarly to that of setting value "1". or sheets of a kind are 33. 250 3) Press [OK] key.  Label The operation is stopped when sheet. MX-M503N SIMULATION 5 – 32 . or sheets of a kind are 94mm height continuously discharged. different kinds of AB_A 1 sheets are mixed and CHINA 1 discharged and less than 100 sheets of a kind are continuously discharged.5mm Default continuously discharged.216(77. different kinds of paper exit tray sheets are mixed and full.21ǂǂ12 7(67 &/26( )81&7.21<(6 ˷̚˹ &˖ ˖)(('75$<&2/25<(6 2.08/$7. to that of setting value "1". When. OHP discharged continuously. to *2 however. the COLOR ON during paper feed operation is performed similarly 1 Paper feed tray color display to that of setting value "1". OFF during paper feed 4K Postcard. different kinds of Purpose Setting sheets are mixed and discharged and less than 100 Function (Purpose) Used to set the operation specifications sheets of a kind are and functions.

26-52 26-65
Purpose Setting Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set whether non-printed paper Function (Purpose) Used to set the limit of the staple process.
(insertion paper, cover paper) is counted up Section
or not.
Operation/Procedure
Section
Use the touch key to set.
Operation/Procedure
[Target paper size]
1) Enter the set value with 10-key.
<LIMIT SHEETS>
0 Count up A4, A4R, B5, B5R, 8.5 x 11, 8.5 x 11R, 16K, 16KR
1 No count up <LIMIT SHEETS(L)>
(A3, B4, 11 x 17, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 13.5, 8.5 x 13.4, 8.5 x 13, 8K)
2) Press [OK] key.
* When mixed sizes of a same width are loaded, the setting con-
The set value in step 1) is saved.
forms to the LIMIT SHEETS(L) setting.
Destination Default
Set Setting Default
U.S.A 0 (Counted) Item Content
value range value
CANADA 0 (Counted)
LIMIT 30 Number of sheets of stapling: 30 or 50 50
INCH 0 (Counted) SHEETS Max. 30
JAPAN 1 (Not counted) 50 Number of sheets of stapling:
AB_B 0 (Counted) Max. 50
EUROPE 0 (Counted) LIMIT ON Inner finisher: ON or ON
U.K. 0 (Counted) COPIES 30 copies for all sizes OFF
AUS. 1 (Not counted) 1K saddle finisher:
AB_A 0 (Counted) 50 copies for all sizes
CHINA 0 (Counted) 4K finisher: A4, B5, 8.5 x 11, 16K
 100 copies
Other than the above

  50 copies
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12 &/26(
7(67
$%/$1.3$3(5&281702'(6(783
OFF Number of sets of stapling: Not
$˖ ˖ <(612

Limited
$˖  LIMIT 25 Number of sheets of stapling: 25 or 30 25
˷̚˹
SHEETS Max. 25
(L) 30 Number of sheets of stapling:
Max. 30
SADDLE ON Number of sets loaded in the ON or ON
COPIES saddle staple: Limited (*1) OFF
OFF Number of sets loaded in the
saddle staple: Not Limited

2.
* LIMIT SHEETS: The 4K finisher is fixed to 50 sheets.
* LIMIT SHEETS(L): Valid only for the 1K saddle finisher.
The 4K finisher is fixed to 30 sheets.
26-53 *1: 1-5sheets (20 sets) / 6-10 sheets (15 sets) /
Purpose Setting 10-15 sheets (10 sets)
Function (Purpose) Used to set Inhibit/Allow of the user auto


calibration (gradation, density adjustment) ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
in the copy mode. ),1,6+(5$/$5002'(6(783 67$3/(/,0,7

/,0,76+((76 ˖  
Section /,0,7&23,(6 ˖ 21 2))

Operation/Procedure /,0,76+((76˄/

˖  
6$''/(&23,(6 ˖ 21 2))
1) Enter the set value with 10-key.

0 Inhibit (Default)
1 Allow

2) Press [OK] key.
The set value in step 1) is saved.



ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
(1$%/,1*2)$8720$7,&*5$<&$/,%5$7,21
$˖ ˖ <(612

$˖ 
˷̚˹

2.

MX-M503N SIMULATION 5 – 33

D: Setting of the allowable quantity of copy/print/FAX after display-
26-69
ing the message when item B is set to "0" (the message is dis-
Purpose Setting played at toner near end). (Range: 0 - 200 sheets)
Function (Purpose) Used to set the operating conditions for The number of output print allowed in item D is based on the
toner near end. assumption that the sheets are of A4 size with print ratio of 6%.
Section (The number of outputs allowed differs depending on the paper
size and the print ratio.)
Operation/Procedure
1) Select an item to be set with [] [] keys.
Set values of Item D and the number of output print allowed
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
1: Print Disable after toner near end
3) Press [OK] key.
2: 25 sheets print Enable after toner near end
The set value in step 2 is saved.
3: 50 sheets print Enable after toner near end
Item/Display Content
Setting Default 4: 100 sheets print Enable after toner near end
range value
5: 200 sheets print Enable after toner near end
A TONER 0 The toner preparation 0-1
PREPARATION message is NOTE: When item B is set to "0" and item D to a desired number,
(0: YES 1: NO) displayed. printing can be made after toner near end. However, insuf-
1 The toner preparation ficient density, thin spots, or improper color balance may be
message is not resulted depending on the using conditions. When item D
displayed. is set to "1" printing is disabled after toner near end. this
B TONER NEAR 0 The toner near end 0-1 case, toner end display is made in the toner near end sta-
END message is tus, and copy/print/FAX outputs are disabled.
(0: YES 1: NO) displayed.
1 The toner near end 
message is not ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
displayed. 721(51($5(1'6(77,1*
$˖ ˖721(535(3$5$7,21 <(612

C TONER END 1 Operation Enable in 1-3 2 $˖  %˖ ˖721(51($5(1' <(612

TONER END ˷̚˹ &˖ ˖721(5(1'
2 Operation STOP in '˖ ˖721(5(1'&2817

TONER END (˖ ˖721(5(0$,/$/$57

3 Operation STOP in
TONER END
D TONER END Setting of the number of 1-5 3
COUNT copy/print/FAX outputs
Enable after TONER
NEAR END.
2.
E TONER E-MAIL 0 Condition for Low 0-1 1
ALART status send of E-mail
alert
When the toner 26-73
preparation message
Purpose Setting
is displayed (in near
near toner end) Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the image loss (shade
1 Condition for Low removal amount) in the poster, the continu-
status send of E-mail ous enlargement copy, the card scan, and
alert the A3 wide copy mode.
When near toner end
Section
<List of Default values and set values for each destination> Operation/Procedure
Set value 1) Select an item to be set with [] [] keys.
Destination Toner preparation 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
Toner near end message
message 3) Press [OK] key.
U.S.A 0 (Displayed) 0 (Displayed)
When the adjustment value is increased, the image loss
CANADA 0 (Displayed) 0 (Displayed)
(shade delete quantity) is increased.
INCH 0 (Displayed) 0 (Displayed)
JAPAN 0 (Displayed) 1 (Not Displayed) Setting
AB_B 0 (Displayed) 0 (Displayed) Item/Display Content Default value
range
EUROPE 0 (Displayed) 0 (Displayed) A DELETING Rear frame side 0 - 50 0
U.K. 0 (Displayed) 0 (Displayed) SHADOW ADJ image loss quantity (Adjustment
AUS. 0 (Displayed) 0 (Displayed) (M) (shade delete amount:
AB_A 0 (Displayed) 0 (Displayed) quantity) adjustment 0.1mm/step)
CHINA 0 (Displayed) 0 (Displayed) B DELETING Lead edge image 0 - 50 0
SHADOW ADJ loss quantity (shade (Adjustment
(Contents of set items) (S) delete quantity) amount:
adjustment 0.1mm/step)
A: Enable/Disable setting of the toner preparation message display
when the toner remaining quantity reaches 25%.
B: Enable/Disable setting of the toner preparation message display
when the toner near end status is reached.
C: Enable/Disable setting of the machine operation when the toner
end status is reached.
For except Japan, performs operation of set value "3" regardless of
the setting value.

MX-M503N SIMULATION 5 – 34

08/$7.1*6+$'2:$'-8670(17 $˖ ˖'(/(7.1*6+$'2:$'- 0. ǂǂǂ6.21ǂǂ12 7(67   &/26( 27 '(/(7.

$˖  %˖ ˖'(/(7.1*6+$'2:$'- 6.

16 digits) operation panel mode.08/$7. Sender registration number (Max. Function (Purpose) Used to set the OSA trial mode. (FSS function) Section Operation/Procedure 1) Select an item to be set with touch panel. to delete the entered value one digit by one digit.08/$7.1* $˖ $˖ ˖26$75.21ǂǂ12 7(67 &/26( 26$75$.   ǂǂǂ6. Host server telephone number (Max. 2. press the [clear] key HOST. [USER FAX NO] [SERVA TEL NO] 2) Enter the set value with 10-key. ˷̚˹ Setting Default Item/Display Content range value A OSA TRIAL 0 Used to set the 0-1 1 MODE OSA trial mode. SERVA TEL_NO. 26-78 3) Press [SET] key. 2) Press [SET] key.$/02'(6(77. Purpose Setting The set value in step 1) is saved. Function (Purpose) Used to set the password of the remote USER FAX_NO.8 digits) the power is turned ON (from OFF) or rebooted. The entered password is displayed on the column of "NEW”. (0: YES 1: NO) 1 OSA trial mode is canceled. 0 Not detection 1 Detection 26-74 2) Press [OK] key.1387.216(783 . calling to the HOST may be continuously made every time when 1) Enter a password with 10-key. 16 digits) Section • If the connection process is not completed Operation/Procedure normally when registering the FSS. $˖  2) Press [OK] key. (5 . In this case.08/$7.21ǂǂ12 7(67 &/26( Operation/Procedure '. 2. 27-1 ˷̚˹ Purpose Setting Function (Purpose) Used to set non-detection of communica- tion error (U7-00) with RIC.  ǂǂǂ6.6$%/(<(6 1) Enter the set value with 10-key. enter "********" to inhibit calling to the In order to correct the entered password. Purpose Setting The set value in step 2) is saved.21ǂǂ12 7(67 &/26( )66)81&7. 2.$/02'(˄<(6˖12˅ 27-2  ˷̚˹ Purpose Setting Function (Purpose) Used to set the sender's registration num- ber and the HOST server telephone num- ber. Section  ǂǂǂ6.1*2)87528%/( $˖ ˖'. (FSS function) Section Operation/Procedure 1) Enter the set value with 10-key.6$%/.

08/$7.1* 86(5)$.21ǂǂ12 ǂǂ1(:˖ 6(7 7(67 &/26( 523(3$66:25'6(77.  35(6(17˖ ǂǂǂ6.B12 6(59$7(/B12 35(6(17˖ ǂǂ1(:˖ 6(7 3$86(  MX-M503N SIMULATION 5 – 35 .

0(5 0.15 2 * 0: No retry C TIMER (MINUTE) _BUSY Resend timer setting (minute) when busy 1 .50% timing setting (K) 74% .75% Toner order auto send 100% . 3) Press [OK] key.21ǂǂ12 7(67 &/26( )66)81&7.187(. The set value in step 2) is saved. (FSS function) Section Operation/Procedure 1) Select an item to be set with [] [] keys. 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.15 1 F TONER ORDER 100% .27-4 Purpose Setting Function (Purpose) Used to set the initial call and toner order auto send.216(783 $˖ ˖)66ǂ02'(1(% $˖  %˖ ˖5(75<B%86< ˷̚˹ &˖ ˖7.25% 3 LOWER 25 25% or less 2 NEAREND NEAREND 1 EMPTY EMPTY 0   ǂǂǂ6.15 1 * 0: No retry E TIMER (MINUTE) _ERROR Resend timer setting (minute) when error 1 .08/$7. Setting Item/Display Content Default value Remarks range A FSS MODE NEB1 Set the FSS MODE Exclusive for send 0-3 0 1 in NE-B mode NEB2 Send/Receive in 1 NE-B mode NFB1 Exclusive for send 2 in NE-F mode NFB2 Send/Receive in 3 NE-F mode B RETRY_BUSY Resend number setting when busy 0 .15 3 D RETRY_ERROR Resend number setting when error 0 .75% 0-5 5 3 (49%-25%) TIMING (K) 74% .50% 4 49% .25% 49% .

187(.0(5 0.B%86< '˖ ˖5(75<B(5525 (˖ ˖7.

1* .B(5525 )˖ ˖721(5ǂ25'(5ǂ7.0.

8 digits) with 10-key. MX-M503N SIMULATION 5 – 36 . press the [clear] key to delete the entered value one digit by one digit.1* Function (Purpose) Used to set the machine tag No.08/$7.21ǂǂ12 &/26( Purpose Setting 7(67 7$*6(77. In order to correct the entered password. 2) Press [SET] key. 2. 35(6(17˖ ǂǂ1(:˖ 6(7 (FSS function) Section Operation/Procedure 1) Enter the password (max. 27-5  ǂǂǂ6. The entered password is displayed on the column of "NEW”.

27-6  ǂǂǂ6.21ǂǂ12 &/26( Purpose Setting 7(67 )66)81&7.08/$7.21.216(783 )81&7.

Function (Purpose) Used to set of the manual service call. $˖ $˖ ˖)81&7.21 <(612.

 %˖ ˖$/(57 <(612.

/.21 ˖)$. (FSS function) ˷̚˹ &˖ ˖&211(&7.˖(0$.

0 Allow (Default) 1 Inhibit 2) Press [OK] key.21ǂǂ12 7(67 &/26( 0$18$/6(59. 2. The set value in step 1) is saved.08/$7. Section Operation/Procedure 1) Enter the set value with 10-key.  27-9 ǂǂǂ6.&(&$//6(783 Purpose Setting $˖ ˖ <(612.

1$'-8670(175(75< Service call When pressing Service call. time for judgment as a jam between sheets of paper. B: 0%. %˖ ˖)(('7. $˖  Function (Purpose) Used to set the paper transport time record- ˷̚˹ ing YES/NO threshold value and shading gain adjustment retry number. Toner collection request Revision of the toner installation date (only for a new product) Alert resend 2.100 Threshold value of the paper (FSS function) transport time between sensors (DSPF/RSPF) (50: Default) Section C GAIN ADJUSTMENT 0 . (11: Default) 2) Enter the set value with 10-key. B FEED TIME 2 0 . D JAM ALERT 1 .21ǂǂ12 7(67 &/26( )66)81&7. 2. The set value in step 2) is saved.100 Threshold value of the paper transport time between sensors Purpose Setting (Main unit) (50: Default) Function (Purpose) Used to set of the enable.) *2 Alert send timing   ǂǂǂ6.100 Alert judgment threshold value for occurrence of continuous jams 3) Press [OK] key.21$'-8670(17 No alert cause Initial state / Trouble / Continuous JAM alert $˖ ˖)(('7. Enable. 2) Enter the set value with 10-key. MX-M503N SIMULATION 5 – 37 .08/$7. (Cannot be changed from Enable to Disable.0( $˖  Maintenance When the maintenance timing is reached. '˖ ˖-$0$/(57 Toner send request When the toner order automatic send setting is reached. alert call out.20 Threshold value of the gain Operation/Procedure RETRY adjustment retry number 1) Select an item to be set with [] [] keys. standard passing time between sheets of paper. Alert judgment threshold value for The set value in step 2) is saved. occurrence of continuous jams (Setting of the number of times of A FSS 0 FSS function enable continuous jams as the alert for FUNCTION 1 FSS function disable (*1) (Default) continuous jams) (Default: 10 B ALERT 0 Alert call enable (*2) (Default) times) 1 Alert call disable * Items A. 3) Press [OK] key.0( ˷̚˹ &˖ ˖*$. (FSS function) Section Operation/Procedure 1) Select an item to be set with [] [] keys. C CONNECTION 0 FAX connection enable 100%. the number of *1 The FSS function setting can be changed only from Disable to retry is actually not registered. 27-7 A FEED TIME 1 0 . 1 E-MAIL connection enable * Item C: Because of a trouble in shading operation.

7.1$'- Target history Serial communication retry number history  High density process control error history Half tone process control error history Scanner gain adjustment retry history DSPF gain adjustment retry history (DSPF model only) 27-12 Paper transport time between sensors Purpose Information display Function (Purpose) Used to check the high-density and the  half-tone process control error history.(&87( HV_ERR5 High density error history 5 H_TONE ERR1 Half tone error history 1 H_TONE ERR2 Half tone error history 2 H_TONE ERR3 Half tone error history 3 27-11 H_TONE ERR4 Half tone error history 4 Purpose Information display H_TONE ERR5 Half tone error history 5 Function (Purpose) Used to check the serial communication retry number and the scanner gain adjust.1.1$'- 2) Press [YES] key.27-10   ǂǂǂ6.21ǂǂ12 Purpose Data clear/Reset 7(67 7528%/(35(&2*1.1$'- 6&$1*$.6725<&/($5 Section Operation/Procedure The high density and the half-tone process control error history are displayed.1$'- 6&$1*$.1$'- The history information of trouble prediction is cleared.1$'- '63)*$. 6&$1*$.1$'- '63)*$.08/$7.215(68/7 $'-8670(17B(5525. (FSS ǂǂǂ6.21ǂǂ12 7(67 &/26( Function) 7528%/(35(&2*1. (FSS function) /68 '(6.1$'- '63)*$.1.215(68/7 &/26( '$7(5(75< Function (Purpose) Used to clear the trouble prediction history /68 information.08/$7.7.21+.6+(5 Operation/Procedure '63) '63) 6&$1*$.21ǂǂ12 7(67 &/26( 7528%/(35(&2*1. '(6. HV_ERR1 High density error history 1 HV_ERR2 High density error history 2 HV_ERR3 High density error history 3 HV_ERR4 High density error history 4 $5(<28685(" <(6 12 (.6+(5 ).08/$7. '63)*$. 6&$1*$. (FSS function) ǂǂǂ6. Section ).7.   ment retry number history.1$'- 1) Press [EXECUTE] key.

) DSPF GAIN ADJ4 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits DSPF GAIN ADJ5 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits MX-M503N SIMULATION 5 – 38 . only the DSPF2 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits DSPF model is FINISHER1 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits displayed. Section '$7((5525&2'( +9B(55 Operation/Procedure +9B(55 +9B(55 +9B(55 The serial communication retry number history and the scanner +9B(55 +B721((55 gain adjustment retry number history are displayed. +B721((55 +B721((55 +B721((55 Display Item +B721((55 Occurrence date Retry Content Item name (Display) number LSU1 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits Serial LSU2 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits communication retry  DESK1 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits number history DESK2 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits display * For DSPF1/ DSPF1 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits DSPF2. FINISHER2 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits SCAN GAIN ADJ1 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits Scanner gain SCAN GAIN ADJ2 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits adjustment retry SCAN GAIN ADJ3 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits history SCAN GAIN ADJ4 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits SCAN GAIN ADJ5 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits DSPF GAIN ADJ1 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits DSPF gain DSPF GAIN ADJ1 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits adjustment retry DSPF GAIN ADJ2 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits history DSPF GAIN ADJ3 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits (Only the DSPF model is displayed.

08/$7.21ǂǂ12 7(67 &/26( ǂǂǂ6.08/$7.21ǂǂ12 7(67 &/26( 7528%/(35(&2*1.215(68/7 )(('7.7. (FSS function) Section Operation/Procedure Change the display with [] [] key.0(. Code Reference Item/Display Content Occurrence date between Passing time passing sensors time Main FEED TIME1 History of paper transport time between sensors 1 99/99/99 99:99:99 5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms) unit FEED TIME2 History of paper transport time between sensors 2 99/99/99 99:99:99 5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms) FEED TIME3 History of paper transport time between sensors 3 99/99/99 99:99:99 5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms) FEED TIME4 History of paper transport time between sensors 4 99/99/99 99:99:99 5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms) FEED TIME5 History of paper transport time between sensors 5 99/99/99 99:99:99 5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms) FEED TIME6 History of paper transport time between sensors 6 99/99/99 99:99:99 5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms) FEED TIME7 History of paper transport time between sensors 7 99/99/99 99:99:99 5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms) FEED TIME8 History of paper transport time between sensors 8 99/99/99 99:99:99 5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms) FEED TIME9 History of paper transport time between sensors 9 99/99/99 99:99:99 5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms) FEED TIME10 History of paper transport time between sensors 10 99/99/99 99:99:99 5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms) DSPF FEED TIME1(SPF) History of paper transport time between SPF sensors 1 99/99/99 99:99:99 5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms) FEED TIME2(SPF) History of paper transport time between SPF sensors 2 99/99/99 99:99:99 5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms) FEED TIME3(SPF) History of paper transport time between SPF sensors 3 99/99/99 99:99:99 5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms) FEED TIME4(SPF) History of paper transport time between SPF sensors 4 99/99/99 99:99:99 5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms) FEED TIME5(SPF) History of paper transport time between SPF sensors 5 99/99/99 99:99:99 5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms) FEED TIME6(SPF) History of paper transport time between SPF sensors 6 99/99/99 99:99:99 5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms) FEED TIME7(SPF) History of paper transport time between SPF sensors 7 99/99/99 99:99:99 5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms) FEED TIME8(SPF) History of paper transport time between SPF sensors 8 99/99/99 99:99:99 5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms) FEED TIME9(SPF) History of paper transport time between SPF sensors 9 99/99/99 99:99:99 5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms) FEED TIME10(SPF) History of paper transport time between SPF sensors 10 99/99/99 99:99:99 5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms) RSPF FEED TIME1(SPF) History of paper transport time between SPF sensors 1 99/99/99 99:99:99 5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms) FEED TIME2(SPF) History of paper transport time between SPF sensors 2 99/99/99 99:99:99 5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms) FEED TIME3(SPF) History of paper transport time between SPF sensors 3 99/99/99 99:99:99 5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms) FEED TIME4(SPF) History of paper transport time between SPF sensors 4 99/99/99 99:99:99 5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms) FEED TIME5(SPF) History of paper transport time between SPF sensors 5 99/99/99 99:99:99 5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms) FEED TIME6(SPF) History of paper transport time between SPF sensors 6 99/99/99 99:99:99 5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms) FEED TIME7(SPF) History of paper transport time between SPF sensors 7 99/99/99 99:99:99 5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms) FEED TIME8(SPF) History of paper transport time between SPF sensors 8 99/99/99 99:99:99 5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms) FEED TIME9(SPF) History of paper transport time between SPF sensors 9 99/99/99 99:99:99 5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms) FEED TIME10(SPF) History of paper transport time between SPF sensors 10 99/99/99 99:99:99 5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms) [N model] [U model]    ǂǂǂ6.27-13 Purpose Information display Function (Purpose) Used to check the history of paper transport time between sensors.

7.0( 7528%/(35(&2*1. '$7(6(1625&2'(3$667.0(.0(67$1'$5'7.215(68/7 )(('7.

0( )(('7.0( 63).0( )(('7.0(67$1'$5'7.0( )(('7.0( )(('7.0( )(('7.0( )(('7.0( )(('7.0( )(('7.0( )(('7.0( )(('7.0( )(('7.0( )(('7.0( )(('7.0( )(('7.0(   )(('7.0( '$7(6(1625&2'(3$667.0( )(('7. )(('7.

0( 63). )(('7.

0( 63). )(('7.

 )(('7.0( 63).

 )(('7.0( 63).

0( 63). )(('7.

0( 63). )(('7.

  MX-M503N SIMULATION 5 – 39 .

76(1625&+(&.08/$7. '6:B5 '6:B& '6:B) 71) 71%2.08/$7.  The set value in step 1) is saved.21ǂǂ12 7(67 &/26( )667(6702'(6(783 Purpose Operation test/check $˖ ˖&211(&7. 33' 33' 32' 32' Function (Purpose) Used to set the FSS function connection 32' 7)' 7)' +326 test mode.181.  30-2 ǂǂǂ6. Section Operation/Procedure 1) Enter the set value with 10-key. 0 Disable (Default) 1 Enable 2) Press [OK] key.217(6702'( 212)).21ǂǂ12 &/26( Purpose Setting 7(67 0$.27-14   ǂǂǂ6.

The sensors and the detectors which are turned ON are high- 2. $˖  Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the sen- ˷̚˹ sors and the detectors in the paper feed section and the control circuits. MPLD Manual feed paper length detection MTOP1 Manual feed tray retraction detection The sensors and the detectors which are turned ON are high- MTOP2 Manual feed tray extension detection lighted. * For setting the FSS function connection test mode. paper reverse/transport CSS23 Tray 2 rear edge detection 3 Operation/Procedure CSS24 Tray 2 rear edge detection 4 The operating conditions of the sensors and detectors are dis. MPED Manual feed paper empty detection PPD1 Resist pre-detection PPD2 Resist detection   POD1 Fusing rear detection ǂǂǂ6. lighted. (ENABLE to DISABLE cannot CLUD1 Tray 1 upper limit detection be made. 0$.08/$7. MPFD Manual feed paper entry detection played. only DIS.21ǂǂ12 7(67 &/26( 75$<6(1625&+(&.1.) CPED1 Tray 1 paper empty detection CSPD1 Tray 1 paper remaining quantity detection CSS11 Tray 1 rear edge detection 1 30 CSS12 CSS13 Tray 1 rear edge detection 2 Tray 1 rear edge detection 3 CSS14 Tray 1 rear edge detection 4 30-1 CPFD2 Tray 2 transport detection Purpose Operation test/check CLUD2 Tray 2 upper limit detection CPED2 Tray 2 paper YES/NO detection Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the sen- CSPD2 Tray 2 paper remaining detection sors and the detectors in other than the CSS21 Tray 2 rear edge detection 1 paper feed section and the control circuits. paper reverse/transport Operation/Procedure The operating conditions of the sensors and detectors are dis- played. CSS22 Tray 2 rear edge detection 2 Section Paper feed. Section Paper feed. CPFD1 Tray 1 transport detection ABLE to ENABLE can be made.

POD2 Main unit paper exit detection &3)' &/8' &3(' &63' POD3 Right tray paper exit detection &66 &66 &66 &66 &3)' &/8' &3(' &63' TFD2 Main unit paper exit full detection &66 &66 &66 &66 TFD3 Right tray paper exit full detection 03)' 03/' 0723 0723 HPOS Shifter home detection 03(' DSW_R Right door open/close detection DSW_C Tray 1 transport cover open/close detection DSW_F Front cover open/close detection TNF Waste toner full detection TNBOX Waste toner near end detection  MX-M503N SIMULATION 5 – 40 .

08/$7. &$5' '$7$ &/2&. 8) Press [EXECUTE] key. The sensors and the detectors which are turned ON are high. DATA Card number signal detection The P1 width (A4) detection level is recognized. paper reverse/transport Operation/Procedure 1) Select a target item to be adjusted with [] [] buttons.08/$7. width 19 MX-M503N SIMULATION 5 – 41 . 3) Open the manual paper feed guide to P1 width (A4). The min.21$'-8670(17 Purpose Data clear/Reset 35(66>(. Default Item/Display Content value A MAX POSITION Manual feed max. lighted.21ǂǂ12 7(67 &/26( %<3$6675$<$'-8670(17 33-2 0$.21ǂǂ12 7(67 &/26( &$5'.08/$7. The set value in step 2) is saved. (. When completed normally. 1) Open the manual paper feed guide to the max. Section Paper feed.326. $5(<28685(" <(6 12 (. width (MAX) detection level is recognized. 2) Press [EXECUTE] key. (HDD-installed machine only) Section Others Operation/Procedure 1) Press [EXECUTE] key. width (MIN) detection level is recognized. 33 40 33-1 40-2 Purpose Operation test/check Purpose Adjustment Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the card Function (Purpose) Manual paper feed tray paper width sensor reader sensor and the control circuit. 7) Open the manual paper feed guide to the min.   The P2 width (A4R) detection level is recognized. adjustment.(&87(   ǂǂǂ6. 2) Press [YES] key. width P1(A4)POSITION Manual feed P1 position width (A4) P2(A4R)POSITION Manual feed P2 position width (A4R) MIN POSITION Manual feed min.(&87(@7267$57 Function (Purpose) Used to delete the ID (IDM) information of card. width   ǂǂǂ6. paper reverse/transport Operation/Procedure Operation/Procedure The operating conditions of the sensors and detectors are dis. width 241 B P1(A4) POSITION Manual feed P1 position width 231 (A4) C P2(A4R) POSITION Manual feed P2 position width 140 (A4R) D MIN POSITION Manual feed min. "ERROR" is displayed. played.''$7$&/($5 40-7 Purpose Setting Function (Purpose) Used to set the adjustment value of the manual paper feed tray paper width sensor. MAX POSITION Manual feed max. width (MIN). When the above operation is not performed normally.(&87( 3) Press [OK] key. 2) Enter the set value with 10-key. Section Others Section Paper feed. 6) Press [EXECUTE] key. width (MAX). "COMPLETE" is displayed.21ǂǂ12 7(67 &/26( &$5'5($'(56(1625&+(&. The ID (IDM) information of Felica card in the HDD is deleted. ǂǂǂ6. The max.7. CLOCK Reference clock signal detection 5) Open the manual paper feed guide to P2 width (A4R). CARD Card Yes/No detection 4) Press [EXECUTE] key.

21 $˖  %˖ ˖3326.=(3+2726(16256(783 $˖ ˖0$. Operation/Procedure ment size sensor and the control circuit. MX-M503N SIMULATION 5 – 42 . If it is changed. Operation/Procedure The light receiving range of PD1 .08/$7.255 PD3 Document detection 3 0 .21ǂǂ12 7(67 &/26( ǂǂǂ6. the set value must not be changed.     ǂǂǂ6. (Default: 128) The operating conditions of the sensors and detectors are dis- Item/Display Content Detection level range played. 43-1 Section Others Purpose Setting Operation/Procedure Function (Purpose) Used to make the fusing reference temper- 1) Open the document cover.255 PD1 .7. When the above operation is normally completed. it is displayed. The sensor level when detecting the document is displayed.08/$7. PD1 Document detection 1 0 .7. and press [EXECUTE] key without ature setting 1 in each operation mode. Operation/Procedure 2) Set A3 (11” x 17") paper on the document table. and press [EXECUTE] key.21 '˖ ˖0. 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.21 2.21ǂǂ12 7(67 &/26( 3'6(1625&+(&.21ǂǂ12 &/26( 7(67 %<3$6675$<9$/8(6(77.255   ǂǂǂ6. a trouble may be occur. 3) Press [OK] key. The set value in step 2) is saved.255. (.1326. PD2 Document detection 2 0 .255 OCSW Document cover status Open: Normal display PD4 Document detection 4 0 . OCSW Original cover SW 0-1 ("1" to Close) The sensors and the detectors which are turned ON are high.(&87( 41-3 41 Purpose Operation test/check Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the docu- 41-1 ment size sensor and the control circuit.21 ˷̚˹ &˖ ˖3326.326. Purpose Operation test/check Section Others Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the docu.08/$7. Section Fusing The sensor level without document is recognized.7.7. 1) Select an item to be set with [] [] keys.